7.2.1 Technical Specification of 33/11 KV, 10/13.

33 MVA Power Transformer

7.2.1.1 GENERAL
This section of the document includes the design, engineering, manufacture, supply,
delivery, offloading, testing & inspection and performance requirements of 33/11KV,
10/13.33 MVA MVA Power transformers and accessories as specified.
7.2.1.3 CLIMATE DATA
The distribution transformers to be supplied against this tender shall be suitable for
satisfactory use under the following climatic condition:
Climate : Tropical, intense sunshine, heavy rain,
humid.
Maximum Temperature : 450 C
Minimum Temperature : 030 C
Maximum yearly weighted average : 300 C
temperature
Relative Humidity : 50-100%
Annual mean Relative Humidity : 75%
Average annual rain fall : 3454 mm
Maximum wind velocity : 200 km/ hour
Maximum altitude above the sea level : Sea level to 300 metres
Atmospherically, Mechanical and Chemical : Moderately polluted
impurities
The information is given solely as a guide for Tenders and no responsibility for its,
accuracy will be accepted nor will any claim based on the above be entertained.
Transformer supplied under this contract will be installed in tropical locations that can be
considered hostile to its proper operation. Particular problems that shall receive special
consideration relate to operation in a hot environment and presence of the insects and
vermin.
7.2.1.4 SYSTEM PARTICULARS
SL.
SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS VOLTAGE LEVEL
NO.
1. Normal System Voltage, kV (Voltage Class) 230 132 33 11
3. Maximum System Voltage, kV 245 145 36 12
4. System Frequency, Hz 50 50 50 50
5. Phase Rotation (Anti-Clock wise) RST RST RST RST
6. Type of System Grounding Solid Solid Solid Solid
7. Rated Fault Level (3-Phase Symmetrical), MVA
16000 7200 1800 600/500
3 sec.
8. Basic Insulation Level, kV p 750 650 170 75

High Voltage current carrying equipment should be capable of carrying the three phase
fault level for a period of 3 Sec.

295
7.2.1.5 STANDARDS
The equipment specified in this Section of the contract shall conform to the latest edition of
the appropriate IEC specifications and other recognized international standard. Equipmet
shall conform to all the related latest IEC 60076 series . In particular:
IEC 60076-1 Power transformers (General).
IEC 60076-2 Power transformers (Temperature Rise).
IEC 60076-3 Power transformers (Insulation Levels, Dielectric Tests and External
Clearance in air).
IEC 60076-5 Power transformers (Ability to Withstand short circuit)
IEC 60137 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1 kV.
IEC 60156 Method of determination of electrical strength of insulating oils
.
IEC 60296 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and
switchgear.
IEC 60551 Measurement of transformer and reactor sound levels.
IEC 60616 Terminal and tapping markings for power transformers.
IEC 722 Guide to lightning and switching impulse testing of power transformers.
IEC 5493 Protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion.
IEC 551 Noise and Vibration of power transformer.

7.2.1.6 Technical Specification:

1. Rated MVA (ONAN/ONAF) A. 10/13.33 MVA
2. Number of Phases 3 (Three)
3. Frequency 50 Hz
4. Winding Insulation Uniform
5. Normal Transformation Ratio at No- 33/11.55 KV
load
6. Rated HT Voltage (Phase to Phase) 33 KV
7. Maximum HT Voltage (Phase to Phase) 36 KV
8. Rated LT Voltage (Phase to Phase) 11 KV
9. Maximum LT Voltage (Phase to Phase) 12 KV
10. Rated Current HT
A. 10/13.33MVA( ONAN/ONAF) 175/233 A
11. Rated Current LT (ONAN/ONAF)
A. 10/13.33 MVA ( ONAN/ONAF) 525/700 Amps
12. Basic Insulation Level :
a) High voltage winding 170 KVp
b) Low voltage winding 75 KVp
13. Installation Outdoor, Tropical, High rainfall & Humidity.
14. Type Core, Conservator & Oil Immersed
15. Type of Windings Double Wound of Electrolytic Copper, free from
burs and splinter.
16. Type of Cooling ONAN/ ONAF
17. Coolant Mineral Oil as per IEC-60296
18. Type of System Earthing Effectively Earthed
19. Bushing Material Porcelain
296
20. Type of Base On wheels with adequate size and 10 M length of
rails and fixing arrangement.
21. Direction of Normal Power Flow HT-LT
22. Phase connection :( -)
a) 33 KV winding with bushing CT Delta
b) 11 KV winding with bushing CT Star
23. Vector Group Dyn11
24. Neutral to be brought out :
a) HT Nil
b) LT Yes
25. Neutral Insulation Full uniform insulation and 100% loading capacity
26. Maximum Temperature rise over 40 C 0

ambient at full load & tap change is at

normal position :
a) Winding by Resistance (0C) 65 0C
b) Oil by Thermometer (0C) 55 0C
27. Impulse Front Wave Test Voltage
(1.2/50 Micro Sec. Wave Shape) :
a) High voltage side 170 KVp
b) Low voltage Side 75 KVp
28. Power Frequency withstand Test
Voltage for 1 (one) Minute :
a) High voltage side 70 KV
b) Low voltage Side 28 KV
29. Impedance Voltage at 750C, at normal 1. For 10/13.33 MVA 8.0 %
ratio and rated frequency, and at ONAN
condition.
30. Type of tap changer control
Features The tap changer will be on load auto regulation,
remote control and manual. The on load tap changer
will immersed in the transformer tank. The diverter
switch compartment will be provided with its own
oil conservator which, will not be connected to the
transformer oil tank.
The diverter switch can easily be lifted out of its
tank for maintenance and inspection without
opening the transformer cover. The on load tap
changer will operate by means of a motor drive unit.
This unit will install on the side of the transformer.
On Load Tap changer with motor drive MR, Germany
unit manufacturer’s name & country
Tapping Range :
a) HT 17 Tapping  10% in steps of 1.25% i.e. 33 KV  8 x
1.25%
b) LT Nil

297
31. Bushing CT for differential protection
A. 10/13.33 MVA ( ONAN/ONAF) 300/5A on HV, 900/5A on LV of accuracy class
5P30, burden 30 VA.
32. Neutral Bushing CT for Standby Earth .
Fault (SEF) & Restricted Earth Fault
(REF) protection
A. 10/13.33 MVA ( ONAN/ONAF) 900/5-5A on LV neutral of accuracy class 5P20,
burden 30 VA.
33. Standard Design, Manufacture, Testing, Installation and
Performance shall be in accordance to the latest
editions of the relevant IEC standards.
34. Transformer Oil
Application Insulating mineral oil for Transformer It will be free
from PCB (polychlorinated biphenyl)
Grade of oil Class-1
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Appearance Liquid and free from suspended matter or sediment
Density at 200 C 0.895 g/cm3 (maximum)
Flash point (Closed cup) 1400 C (minimum)
Kinematics Viscosity at -150 C 800 c St. (Maximum)
Kinematics Viscosity at 200 C 40 c St. (Maximum)
Pour point -300 C (maximum)
ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES
Dielectric Strength at 50 Hz (with 2.5 New untreated oil, shall go through filtration
mm standard gap and 40 mm standard treatment before the oil are introduce into the
depth) apparatus or equipment. The break down voltage of
this oil shall be at least 50KV
Loss tangent/Dielectric dissipation 0.005 (maximum)
factor at temp. 900 C, stress 500V/mm
to 1000 v/mm and frequency 40 Hz to
62 Hz.
CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Neutralization value 0.03 mg KOH/g (maximum)
Neutralization value after oxidation 0.40 mg KOH/g (maximum)
Total sludge after oxidation 0.10% weight (maximum)
PCB Content Free from PCB
STANDARDS Performance and testing of oil shall comply with the
latest revision of the relevant standards BS 148 :
1972, IEC-60296 or latest revision there on.

298
 35. FEATURES & ACCESSORIES OF TRANSFORMER:
a) Bushing Insulator on HT and LT.
b) Arcing horns on HT and LT bushings.
c) Remote Tap Changer Control (RTCC) facility with AVR Relay in separate RTCC PCM
Panel.
d) Oil conservator.
e) Buchholz relays in main conservator oil pipe.
f) Tap Changer Protective Relay in between conservative and tap changer oil pipe.
g) Conservator drain valve, breather and oil level gauge with alarm contact.
h) Pressure Relief Device (PRD).
i) Dial type thermometers with alarm and trip contracts.
j) CT for winding temperature shall be located at mid-phase (Y-phase) of the transformer.
k) Radiators with valves.
l) Bladder/Airbag in conservator to separate air from oil.
m) One inspection hole with cover.
n) Facilities for lifting cover and coil assembly from tank.
o) Lifting lugs for lifting complete Transformer.
p) Base designed for rollers with bi-directional flanged rollers parallel to either Centre
line.
q) Tank oil sampling, draining valve and oil centrifuging outlets.
r) Tank earthing points.
s) Fans for forced cooling (ONAF).
t) All mounting accessories including rails (2 Nos. rails each 10 Meter long).
u) All equipment should be fully tropicalized.
v) Painting to approved colour and shade.
w) Rating nameplate and diagram plate of stainless steel having engraved letters filled
with black enamel paint.
x) The oil shall be supplied/ delivered in non-returnable sealed containers/ drums.
y) The oil shall be fresh, unused, cleaned and free from suspended matter or sediment.
z) The test shall be carried out on the oil as to be supplied without drying and degassing.
aa) Uninhibited oils must not contain anti-oxidant additives.
bb) Laminated, detailed Schematic Diagram of Control Circuit of Transformer & Tap changer
inside Marshalling kiosk.
cc) Dehydrating Silica-gel breather.
dd) Air release plug.
ee) Earthing terminals with lugs.
ff) Thermometer pockets.
gg) Winding temperature indicator with two contacts
hh) Bottom mounting channel for 10/13.33
ii) Operation and maintenance manual along with troubleshooting procedure and installation
guideline/manual shall be supplied with each transformer.
36 Following instructions to be followed for Submission of Test reports &
Calculation during drawing approval:
aa) All Type test Report and related routine test report shall be of same transformer
of same name plate serial no.
bb) Calculation of load loss shall be provided for load loss in all 3( three) tap
position (Nominal, Maximum, Minimum).

7.2.1.6 INFORMATION REQUIRED

The Tenderer/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information. Besides
these, the following information/Documents have to be submitted along with the tender:-

299
 (a) The Tenderer/Manufacturer shall submit with the bid the testing procedure & list of
testing/ measuring equipment, meters etc. used for Factory test witness.
(c) Construction, Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual.
7.2.1.6.1 TEST REPORTS:
The following test reports/certificates including their test results for the routine and type
tests prescribed in "relevant IEC Standard" for the offered type or higher rating
transformer of same voltage Class are to be furnished with the Bid, otherwise the bid will
be treated as non-responsive and will not consider for further evaluation.

7.2.1.6.2 ROUTINE TESTS

a) Measurement of insulation resistance.
b) Measurement of Voltage ratio test.
c) Measurement of Winding resistance at each Tap position.
d) Vector group test.
e) Measurement of No-load loss & current.
f) Measurement of short circuit impedance and load loss.
g) Power Frequency (Separate source voltage) withstands test.
h) Transformer Oil test.

7.2.1.6.3 TYPE TESTS

a) Temperature Rise Test
b) Lightning Impulse Test
7.2.1.6.4 SPECIAL TESTS
a) Short Circuit withstands test report of HV-LV.
7.2.1.7 CAPITALIZED COST:
Bidder shall declare guaranteed No Load Loss and Full Load Loss value in GTP. Any
Tenderer quoted the No Load Loss & Full Load Loss above the upper limit of the loss as
mentioned in GTP (Section 8, Clause 8.18, Sl No.3.9) in Tender Document will not be
considered for further evaluation & treated as non- responsive. The Tenderer who will
quote the No Load Loss & Full Load Loss below the lower limit of No Load Loss & Full Load
Loss as mentioned in GTP (Section 8, Clause 8.18, Sl No.3.9) In that case during evaluation
Capitalization cost will be calculated only on the basis of the lower limit of No Load Loss &
Full Load Loss. Tenderers quoted No load Loss and Full load loss shall be supported by
loss calculation, otherwise the bid will also be treated as non- responsive.
The fixed and running losses are to be low as consistent with reliable and economical use
of materials. The cost of losses is to be minimized and the following capitalized parameters
will be used in the evaluation of the transformer:
C = 68,706 x e x P0 + 54,964 x e x PFL
Where,
C = Capitalized cost of transformer loss in Bangladesh Taka.
e = Energy Cost, Tk. 6.00/KWh
PFL = Full Load losses at rated voltage, normal ratio and rated frequency in ONAF
condition at 750C in KW + Auxiliary loss in KW
P0 = No load losses at rated voltage, normal ratio and rated frequency in KW
The cost of energy (C) will be added to the quoted prices to arrive at the evaluated cost of
the transformer.
The contract will be cancelled if losses exceed the guaranteed value by an amount in excess
of followings:
Total losses : 10%
Component : 15% of each component loss (Unless the total losses exceeds 10%).
300
7.2.1.8 SHIPPING:
All the delicate components shall be dismantled and packed in strong wooden boxes
having inside lined with metallic sheets with proper sealing to protect the content from
accidental direct exposure to weather during storage. The holes of the transformer tank
shall be sealed with proper metal plate and gaskets to prevent leakage of oil and its
contamination with atmospheric moisture. The transformer shall be shipped with
radiators, busing conservator etc. dismantled but the tank filled with oil. The transformer
oil from radiators and conservator shall be shipped in non-returnable drums. The bushing
shall be shipped in oil sealed containers to avoid moisture absorption during shipment and
storage. Oil shall be complying with IEC-60296.
7.2.1.9 The bushings shall have high factor of safety against leakage to ground and shall be so
located as to provide adequate electrical clearances between bushings and grounded parts.
Bushings of identical voltage rating shall be interchangeable. All bushings shall be
equipped with suitable terminals of approved type and size & shall be suitable for
bimetallic connection. The insulation class of the high voltage neutral bushing shall be
properly coordinated with the insulation class, of the high voltage winding.Each bushing
shall be so coordinated with the transformer insulation so that all flash over will occur
outside the tank.All main winding and neutral leads shall be brought out through “out
door” type bushings which shall be so located that the full flashover strength will be
utilized and the adequate phase clearance shall realised.All porcelain used in bushings
shall be of the wet process, homogeneous and free from cavities or other flaws. The glazing
shall be uniform in colour and free from blisters, burrs and other defects.

7.2.1.10 HT BUSHING:
Provide 3 porcelain outdoor type, oil filled, impulse tested bushing with arcing horns of
standard gap and bolted type terminal connectors, with head shrink rubber insulated cap
suitable for connection to the incomes leads of ACSR Grosbeak (636 MCM) conductor.

7.2.1.11 LT BUSHING:
Provide 4 porcelain outdoor type bushing with bolted type connectors, suitable for
connection to outgoing leads of one number of 500 Sq.mm XLPE, single core copper
conductors per phase and suitable for head shrink termination.

7.2.1.12 FAULT CONDITIONS:

The transformer shall be capable of withstanding, on any tapping, for three seconds
without damage an external short circuit between phases. The transformer winding shall
be capable of withstanding for three seconds without damage a short circuit between one
phase and earth with the neutral of the transformer directly earthed. For the purposes of
this clause a fault level of 1800 MVA at the transformer 33KV terminals shall be assumed.

Evidence shall be submitted with the Tender as to the extent to which the manufacturer
has provided or is able to prove either by calculation or test the ability of the specified
transformers to withstand on any tapping, without damage under service conditions, the
terminal and dynamic effects of external short circuit.
The Bid shall state tin the Technical Schedule a brief description of those transformers or
parts thereof, which have been subjected to short circuit tests or for which short circuit
calculations are available. It is preferred that this information relates to designs
comparable with the transformer’s bidder but in the event this is not so the Engineer
301
 reserves the right to require calculating to prove that the design of transformers tendered
will satisfactorily comply with this clause: such calculations being in accordance with the
latest revision of IEC/ BS standard.

7.2.1.13 NOISE:
Vibration and noise levels of all transformers and auxiliary plant shall be in accordance
with the IEC 551 and its latest version. The contract price shall include noise level tests to
be carried out on one transformer.
7.2.1.14 HARMONIC SUPPRESSION:
Transformer shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of harmonic
voltages especially the third and fifth harmonics and to minimize the detrimental effects
resulting there from.
7.2.1.15 IMPEDANCE AND REGULATION:
The Bidder shall be state in the Technical Schedules guaranteed values of impedance
measured on normal and extreme tapping and the voltage regulation from no load to CMR
at unity power factor and at 0.9 lagging power factor with constant voltage across the
higher voltage windings.
7.2.1.16 MAGNETIC CIRCUIT:
The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharge development of
short circuit paths internally or to the earthed clamping structure and the production of
flux components normal to the plane of the laminations. Each lamination shall be insulated
with a material stable under the action of pressure and hot oil.
The winding structure and major insulation shall be designed to permit an unobstructed
flow of cooling oil through core cooling oil ducts to ensure efficient core cooling.
The magnetic circuit shall be insulated from all structural parts and shall be capable of
withstanding a test voltage to core bolts and to the frame of 2000 volts rms for one minute.

7.2.1.17 FLUX DENSITY:

Cores shall be constructed from clod rolled grain-oriented steel sheets. Provided the
contractor can provide adequate evidence that there will be no adverse effects due to stray
flux heating of core with the quality of steel employed, designs may be offered such that
when operating under the most onerous conditions, flux density in any part of the
magnetic circuit does not exceed 1.7 Tesla.

The Contractor shall determine the operating conditions under which the maximum flux
density will be attained within the following simultaneously applied limits.

- Frequency : 50 Hz
- LV and HV : Up to but not exceeding the specified maximum System voltage.
Voltage
- Load : The transformer may be subjected to intermittent overloading of
150% rated MVA at 0.8 power factor lagging in accordance with IEC-
60035.

The maximum flux densities anticipated under these conditions are to be stated in
Technical Schedules (GTP).

302
7.2.1.18 WINDINGS:

a) The windings shall be of high-conductivity electrolytic copper.

b) The transformer windings shall have uniform insulation as defined in the latest
revision of IEC standard. The insulation of the coils shall be such as to develop
the full electrical strength of the windings. All materials used in the insulation
and assembly of the windings shall be insoluble, non-catalytic and chemically
inactive in the hot transformer oil, and shall not soften or otherwise be
adversely affected under the operating conditions.
c) The transformers shall be designed to withstand the impulse voltage levels and
the power frequency voltage tests specified in the Technical Schedules.
d) The winding shall be located in a manner which will ensure and that they
remain Electro-statically balanced and that their magnetic centers remain
coincident under all conditions of operation.
e) The winding shall also be thoroughly seasoned during manufacture by the
application of axial pressure at a high temperature for such length of time as
will ensure that further shrinkage is unlikely to occur in service.
f) All electrical connections within windings shall be brazed to withstand the
shocks, which may occur through rough handling and vibration during
transport switching and other transient service conditions.
g) Coil clamping rings shall be of the on on-magnetic steel or insulating materials built up
from flat laminations. Auxiliary laminated material other then Bakelite paper is not to
be used. Where Bakelite paper rings are used with the layers of paper lying in the axial
direction, the rings may be relied upon to provide the major insulation between the
windings and frame subject to there being adequate creepage distance. Any metal
pieces in contact with laminated rings shall be designed and secured so that they do
not weaken the electrical or the mechanical properties of the rings. If the winding is
built up of section or of disc-coils separated by spacers, the clamping arrangement
shall be ensure that equal pressure are applied to all columns of spacers.
h) The winding shall be so designed that all coil assemblies of identical voltage
ratings shall be interchangeable and field repairs can be readily done, without
special equipment. The coils shall be supported between adjacent sections by
insulating spacers and the barriers, bracings and other insulation used in the
assembly of the windings shall be arranged to ensure a free circulation of the oil
and to reduce hot sports in the windings. The insulation paper shall be of high
quality and the value of degree of polymerization shall not be less than 1200 dp
and the necessary test certificate shall be submitted along with the Pre –
delivery inspection report. Provision shall be made in the tank, for taking
sample, in future, of paper for testing purpose and location shall be easily
accessible and indicated on the transformer tank by affixing special caution
plate.
7.2.1.19 INTERNAL EARTHLING ARRANGEMENT:
All metal parts of the transformer with the exception of the individual core lamination,
core bolts
and associated individual clamping plates, shall be maintained at some fixed potential.

303
 The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the tank body by a copper
strap and the bottom main core clamping structure shall be earthen by one or more of the
following methods:
- by connection through vertical tie rods to the top structure.
- by direct metal-to-metal contact with the tank base maintained by the weight of the
core and windings.
- by connection to the top structure on the same side of the core as the main earth
connection to the tank.
The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the clamping structure at one point through a
removable link placed in an accessible position just beneath an inspection opening in the
tank cover and which, by disconnection, will enable the insulation between the core and
clamping plates, etc. to be tested at voltages up to 2 KV for the purpose of checking
deterioration during service. The connection to the link shall be on the same side of the
core as the main earth connection. These requirements are mandatory.
Magnetic circuits having an insulated sectional construction shall be provided with a
separate link for each individual section and the arrangement of the connections shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Where oil ducts or insulated barriers parallel to the plane the laminations divide the
magnetic circuits into two or more electrically separates parts, the ducts and insolating
barriers which have the thickness greater than 0.25, mm are to be bridged with tinned
copper strips so inserted as to maintain electrical continuity.
Where coil-clamping rings are of metal at each potential, each rings shall be connected to
the adjacent core clamping structure on the same side of the transformer as the main
earthing connection.

Main earthing connections shall be a cross-sectional area of not less than 100mm2 but
connections inserted between laminations may have cross sectional areas reduced 20mm2
when in close thermal contact with the core.
7.2.1.20 CORE

The core shall be constructed from high grade cold rolled non-ageing grain-oriented silicon
steel laminations, M4 or Superior Grade. Only prime quality CRGO sheets should be used in
the transformers and no Second/Defective/Scrap CRGO finds way into transformers.
Therefore, regarding quality control following documents are to be furnished with the Post
– delivery inspection report.

1. Invoices of supplier
2. Mill’s test certificate
3. Packing list.
4. Bill of lading
5. Bill of entry certificate by custom
6. Description of material, electrical analysis, Physical inspection, certificate for surface
defects, thickness and width of the material.

It is to note that, using seconds/defective CRGO sheets or load losses found to be more
than stipulated limit, heavy penalty will be imposed or the suppliers will be black listed.

304
7.2.1.21 TRANSFORMER TANK
The Transformer Tank shall be welded construction fabricated from high tensile steel plate
and shall be designed to withstand full vacuum. The transformer shall have air seal type oil
conservator tank at the top.
a) The transformer tank and cover shall be fabricated from good commercial
grade low carbon steel suitable for welding and of adequate thickness.
b) The transformers tank shall be capable of withstanding full vacuum without
deflection.
c) The plates (tank & Cover) shall have the following minimum thickness.

Length of Transformer Tank Minimum Thickness

Side Plates Bottom Plates
Less than 2500 mm Min 6 mm Min 9 mm
Greater than 2500 mm Min 9 mm Min 12 mm

d) The base of each track shall be so designed that it is possible to move the
complete transformer unit in any direction without injury when using rollers,
plates or rails. A design, which required that slide rails be placed in a particular
position, is not to be used. 20/26 MVA and lower rate transformers shall be
provided with base plates having bi-directional wheels for placing on rails.
e) An inspection window with a welded flange & a bolted cover shall be provided
on the tank cover. The manhole shall be of a sufficient size to ease access to the
lower ends of the bushings, terminals etc.
f) Lifting eyes or lugs shall be provided on all parts of the transformers requiring
independent handling during assembly or dismantling. In addition, the
transformer tank shall be provided with lifting lugs and bosses properly
secured to the sides of the tank for lifting the transformers either by crane or by
jacks. The design of the tank, the lifting lugs and bosses shall be such that the
complete transformer assembly filled with oil can be lifted with the use of those
lugs without any damage or distortions.
g) The tank shall be provided with two suitable copper alloy or any other suitable
material lugs for the purpose of grounding.
h) The tank shall be so designed that with the cores and windings in position there
shall be no possibility of air or gas being trapped when filling the tank with oil.
Likewise, water shall not be trapped on the exterior of the tank.
i) The tank shall be fitted with pockets for a thermometer and the bulb of a
winding temperature indicator and an oil temperature indicator.
j) Necessary drain valves, filter valves, vales to take oil sample etc shall be
provided.

7.2.1.21.1 Conservator Tank

A conservator tank shall be mounted above the highest point of the oil circulating system
of the equipment. Tanks shall be formed of substantial steel plate. Connections between
the main tank and the conservator shall be such that air or gas is not entrapped and the
Buchholz relays can be correctly installed. One end of the conservator shall be fixed by
305
 bolts so that it can be removed to enable the tank to be cleaned. The capacity of each
conservator tank shall be adequate to accommodate the expansion and contraction of oil in
the whole system, over the extreme range possible in operation, i.e. equipment
unenergised in an ambient temperature of 5 deg. C to the condition corresponding to
maximum oil temperature rise. Conservator shall be fitted with:-
(a) A hydro compensator for separating oil and air. A dehydrating breather shall be used
for the air intake of the hydro compensator. Alarm for leak of the hydro compensator shall
also be provided.
(b) At least one magnetic oil level indicator type visible from ground level and indicating
the oil levels over the range specified above. The oil level indicator shall be marked to
indicate the correct oil level with the oil at a temperature of 5 deg. C, 30 Deg. C and 90 deg.
C. The temperature markings shall preferably be integral with the level indicating device
but subject to the approval of the Authority.
(c) Low oil alarm initiating device.

7.2.1.21.2 Pressure Relief Device

The transformer shall be fitted with a pressure relief device designed to protect the tank
from damage and to control the expulsion of oil during an internal fault. The pressure relief
device shall be of the spring-loaded diaphragm type capable of opening fully within two
milliseconds of detecting an excess pressure, and shall fully reseal after release of the
exceeded pressure. Corrosion resistant materials shall be used and a visual indication of
operation shall be provided. Two pairs of normally open contacts and a suitable terminal
box shall be provided for remote electrical indication and tripping.

7.2.1.21.3 Gaskets
Any gaskets provided with the transformers shall be suitable for making oil tight joints,
and there shall be no deleterious effects of either gaskets or oil when the gaskets are
continuously in contact with hot oil. No gaskets shall be used in which the material of the
material of the gasket is mounted on a textile backing. Exterior gaskets shall be
weatherproof and shall not be affected by strong sunlight.

7.2.1.21.4 Oil
All transformers shall be filled to the required level with new, unused, clean, standard
mineral oil after treatment in compliance with IEC 60296 & BS 148.

7.2.1.22 ACCESSORIES

7.2.1.22.1 Winding Temperature Indicator

The transformer shall be provided with a winding temperature indicator and combined
alarm and trip relays of approved design. The alarm and trip settings shall be adjustable.
The winding Temperature Indicator shall also be provided with badditional contacts for
automatic 'start/stop' of cooling plant (fans). It shall be fitted with dial indicator calibrated
in degrees Celsius and fitted with a hand reset pointer the highest temperature attained.
The winding temperature indicator shall be so mounted in the transformer marshalling
kiosk so that the dial is not more than 1500 mm from ground level. The cover shall be
equipped with a viewing aperture of adequate size, fitted with clear, reinforced glass.

306
7.2.1.22.2 Oil Temperature Indicators
The transformer shall be provided with an oil temperature indicator of approved design
incorporating contacts and relay(s) for initiating alarms and trips. The indicator shall be
fitted with a dial calibrated in degrees Celsius, with a hand reset pointer to register the
highest temperature attained.
The oil temperature indicator shall be mounted in the transformer marshalling kiosk so
that the dial is not more than 1500 mm from the ground level and the cover shall be
equipped with viewing aperature of adequate size, fitted with clear, reinforced glass.
7.2.1.22.3 Buchholz relay
A Buchholz relay with alarm and tripping contacts to detect accumulation of gas and
sudden changes of oil pressures, complete with two shut-off valves and flange coupling to
permit easy removal without lowering oil level in the main tank, a bleed valve for gas
venting and test valve shall be provided. The relay shall be provided with a test cock
suitable for a flexible pipe connection for checking its operation & taking gas sample.
7.2.1.22.4 Breathers
Each transformer and tap changer conservator shall be provided with a silica gel breather
complete with oil seal, oil level indication window and a sight glass for inspection of the
silica gel. Due to the climatic conditions at site, this breather shall be liberally sized and
one size larger than would be fitted for use in a temperate climate.
A visual indication of the extent to which the drying agent has absorbed moisture is
preferred, showing how much active material remains effective.

Maintenance free breather shall have sensor-controlled heating apparatus. The supply
voltage shall be 230V AC. Adequate cable shall be provided to connect with marshalling
box.
7.2.1.22.5 Padlocks
The supplier shall provide padlock able handles and non-ferrous padlocks with duplicate
keys for tap changer control panel and kiosks door to prevent all unauthorized access and
operation.
7.2.1.22.6 the other accessories shall be provided is listed below
a) Ladder permanently fixed with transformer tank
b) Dial Thermometer with pocket for oil temperature indicator with one set of alarm and
one set of trip contacts and maximum reading pointer.
7.2.1.22.7 Marshalling Kiosk (box):
Marshalling box shall be connected at one side of transformer. It shall consist of
WTI(winding temperature indicator) and OTI(oil temperature indicator), magnetic oil
gauge and Buchholz relay and other control terminals. WTI are in two numbers, one for HV
and other for LV. It shall also consist of all auxiliary contactors as required in the order to
make necessary potential free contacts for remote alarm and tripping, a heater which is
used to absorb the moisture in the box, SPN socket outlet, complete with switch and HRC
fuse for hand lamp connection.
7.2.1.22.8 Painting
The minimum standards acceptable are :
a) cleaning by shot blasting to Grade Sa 2.5 of ISO 8501-1
b) All sheet steelwork shall be degreased, pickled and phsphated in accordance
with IEC 60076.
307
 c) Interior surface of mechanism chambers, boxes and kiosks, after preparation,
cleaning and priming shall be painted with one coat of zinc chromate primer,
one coat of phenolic based undercoating, followed by one coat of phenolic
based finishing paint to white colour followed ba a final coat of anti-
condensation white paint of a type and make to the approval of purchaser. A
minimum overall paint film thickness of 150 micons shall be maintained
throughout.
d) Exterior steel work and metalwork, after preparation and priming shall be
painted with one coat od xinc chromate primer, one coat of phenolic based
under coating and two coat of micaceous iron oxide paint, then painted with
final coat of phenolic based hard gloss finishing paint of the light grey shade to
provide an overall minimum paint thickness of 200 microns
7.2.1.22.9 Galvanizing

All galvanizing shall be carried out by the hot dip process, in accordance with
specification ISO 1460. However, high tensile steel nuts, bolts and spring washers shall
be electro galvanized. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous and uniform. It shall
be free from acid spots and shall not scale, blister or be removable by handling or
packing. There shall be o impurities in the zinc or additivies to the galvanic bath which
could have a detrimental effect on the durability of the zinc coating.
Before pickling, all welding, drilling, cutting, grinding etc must be complete and all
grease, paint, varnish, oil, welding slag etc completely removed.
The weight of zinc deposited shall be in accordance with the staed in BS 729, ISO 1460
and shall be not less than 0.61Kg/sq. mtr. with minimum thickness of 86microns for
items of thickness more than 5mm, 0.46Kg/sq.mtr. (64microns) for items thickness
between 2mm and 5 mm and minimum 0.33kg/sqmm (47microns) for the item less
than 2mm thick. Repair of galvanizing on site will generally not permitted.
7.2.1.22.10 Terminal marking
Each terminal including the neutral shall be clearly marked on both the primary and
secondary side in accordance with the diagram of connection supplied with the
transformers.
The terminal marking shall be clear and permanent. Painted markings are not acceptable.
the winding shall be leveled as follows:
High voltage : 3 phases A B C
Low voltage : 3 phases and neutral a b c n

7.2.1.23 EVALUATION CRITERIA

a) The Tenders will be evaluated on the basis of the capitalized cost of the Transformer
losses.
b) Bidder will declared/ guaranteed No-Load loss and Full load loss value, otherwise the
bid will be rejected.
c) Bidders declared/ guaranteed percentage impedance value shall be within the specified
value, otherwise the bid will be rejected.

7.2.1.24 Acceptance criteria of transformer loss and percentage impedance during factory
test :

308
 Transformer will be tested during technical orientation & quality acceptance and will be
accepted if the measured transformer losses are within the offered value or within the
following tolerance with deduction of amount from the contract price as below:
i) Any component loss (No load loss or Full load loss) may exceed up to 15% of the offered
component loss, provided that the total loss ((No load loss + Full load loss) shall not
exceed 10% of the offered total loss. If any component loss exceeds 15% of the offered
component loss, the full consignment will be rejected.
ii) Total loss (No load loss + Full load loss) may exceed up to 10% of the offered total loss.
If it exceeds 10%, the full consignment will be rejected.
iii) Percentage Impedance may vary up to 10% of the specified value. If the value exceeds
the tolerance (10%), the full consignment will be rejected.
Transformer will be tested during factory test witness and will be accepted if the measured
transformer losses are within the offered value or within the acceptable limit as specified
in (i), (ii) and (iii) provided an amount will be deducted from the Contract price for the
loss(s) exceeding the offered/declared loss(s) according to the following formula:-
Amount to be deducted from the Contract price.
= Contract Price x {(Measured loss - Specified loss /declared loss) ÷ Specified loss/declared
loss} X %MT
Where,
Measured Loss (in KW) : Measured Average No load Loss* 1+ Measured
= Average Full Load Loss* 2.
Offered Loss (in KW) = Offered No Load Loss + Offered Full load loss
Transformer Economic = 20 Years
Life
%MT (Percentage of Monetized Transformer) = % of the Monetized Transformer found
during factory test witness by NESCO's inspection team whose measured loss(s) (No load
loss or Full load loss or Both) exceed the offered loss (No load loss or Full load loss or Both)
but remain within acceptable limit. For example : If total no. of transformers to be
inspected is 80 and the no. of selected transformers during QAT/pre-delivery inspection is
8, 6 nos. are found within the offered losses and 2 nos. are found exceeding the offered
losses then the %MT will be (2/8)x100=25%

* 1Measured Average No Load Loss = [Sum of the measured No-load losses of the tested
transformer(s) exceeding the offered No-load loss ÷ Nos. of tested transformer(s) which
exceeds the offered No-load loss]

* 2Measured Average Full Load Loss = [Sum of the measured Full-load losses of the tested
transformer(s) which exceeding the offered Full-load loss ÷ Nos. of tested transformer(s)
which exceeds the offered Full-load loss

7.2.1.25 Mandatory SPARE PARTS

The Supplier shall provide for every five transformers the following mandatory spares:
•One HV Bushing
•One LV Bushing
•One complete set of bi-metallic connectors for both HV & LV bushings.
• One OTI and WTI.

7.2.1.26 Approval of Drawings

309
 Design, Drawing diagrams, Specification and Technical Particulars & Guarantees etc, shall
be submitted to the Project Director, NESCO ltd, Rajshah by the Supplier for approval, prior
to the manufacturing of the goods. The Supplier shall have to submit 3 (three) sets of the
same for approval within 15 (fifteen) days from the date of signing Contract. The
submitted Design, Drawing diagrams, Specification and Technical Particulars & Guarantees
etc must be approved by Design & Inspectoin, NESCO Ltd, Rajshahi prior to the
manufacturing of the goods.

The supplier shall submit the following drawings in AutoCAD format and in hard copy for
the approval of the purchaser within commencement period.

Full Technical Specification and Guaranteed Technical Particulars

Max. Temp. Rise of Winding & Oil over 400C ambient supported by Load Losses and Heat
Dissipation by Radiator and also Short Circuit Calculation along with thermal & mechanical
calculations on the basis of proposed Design Data
General outline drawing showing front, side elevation and plan of the transformer and
accessories with detailed dimensions. The clearances between HV and LV terminals and
ground should also to be shown.
Drawings of each type of bushings, lifting dimensions, clearance between HT and LT
terminals and ground, quantity of insulating oil, name plate details etc.
Large scale drawings of high and low-tension windings of the transformers showing the
nature and arrangement of insulators and terminal connections.
Schematic control and annunciation wiring diagram for all auxiliary equipment
(temperature indicator, alarm circuits, Buchholz relay, PRV, WTI, OTI, OLTC, cooling
control etc,Schematic diagram showing the flow of oil in the cooling system, Large scale
drawing of high and low tension winding of the transformer showing the nature and
arrangement of insulation and terminal connections
Drawing/ Wiring diagram showing construction and mounting details of marshalling
boxes.
Operation and maintenance guide for transformer and OLTC.
Detailed loading drawing to enable the Purchaser to design and construct foundations for
the transformer.
Installation, Operation and maintenance manual along with troubleshooting procedure.

No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication and manufacture of the
Testing Equipment until the technical data and drawings have been approved. The
manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
purchaser.
The cost of supplying drawings and specifications shall be borne by the supplier.
At the time of delivery of Equipment, the supplier shall supply Five (5) sets of all approved
technical data and drawings in bound book form along with manufacturer’s original catalogue
of the Equipment to the Project office.

7.2.1.27 Tests at Manufacturers Works:

7.2.1.27.1 General
310
 Functional electrical, material, mechanical and hydraulic tests shall be carried out at
manufacturers’ premises. The extent and method of recording the results shall be agreed
by the Purchaser in ample time to enable the tests to be satisfactorily witnessed or to make
any changes to the proposed program of tests.

7.2.1.27.2 Material Tests:

The supplier shall provide test pieces free of charge as required to enable the quality of the
material to be determined at the supplier’s expense. Purchaser may at its own discretion
and by specific arrangement accept certified particulars of tests carried out in the absence
of his authorized representative.

7.2.1.27.3 Type Test:

Type tests are required on all items to prove the general design of the goods offered. The
Bidders shall submit the type test report of offered item from STL member testing
laboratories.

7.2.1.27.4 ROUTINE TESTS:

All items shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with the relevant latest version
of IEC, BS & BDS standards at the manufacturers works and shall include, but not be
limited to, an operational test.

7.2.1.28 TECHNICAL ORIENTATION AND QUALITY TEST WITNESS :

The following test shall be carried out as per latest version of IEC or equivalent standard
unless otherwise mentioned at the manufacturer premises or other places where the test
facilities are available:-

Acceptance Tests:-
1. Measurement of turn ratio test;
2. Vector group test;
3. Measurement of winding resistance;
4. Measurement of insulation resistance;
5. Measurement of no load loss & no-load current;
6. Measurement of impedance voltage & load loss;
7. Dielectric withstands Tests;
8. Transformer oil test;
9. Temperature rise test.
10. Separate source voltage withstand test.
12. Tap-changer operation test
14. Dimension and physical check.
15. Magnetic Balance Test
16. Bucholz, PRD, WTI, OTI Operation Check
17. WTI, OTI Operational Accuracy Check
18. Bushing CT Test

The purchaser can carry-out the testing of any no. of transformers during Quality Test
Witness. But, the testing of transformers during Quality Test Witness will not be less than
10% at random basis of the transformer ready for inspection but in any case it will not be

311
 less than 3 nos. The manufacturer will provide all arrangements for the testing of
transformers desired by the purchaser in his factory.

Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any
manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of
charge such assistance, labor, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments
as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test efficiently.
These test shall be performed as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or equivalent and only
routine tests as agreed upon, will be performed.

As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passes the
tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect.

Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall
have the right to reject any of the item or complete batch if necessary. In that case Supplier
have to replace the Equipment and to make good of them without any financial
involvement to the Purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not conforming with the
specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relieved
from the responsibility of replacing them on making them good at their own cost, despite
the Equipment were found good at the time of Factory Acceptance Test. Nothing in this
clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligations under
the contract.No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been
approved and written instruction have been received by the Purchaser.
Remote Control Panels:
The remote control panels shall be floor mounted sheet steel cubicles of approved type,
layout and color RAL7035 shall be provided for each transformer. Panel width not more
than 600mm. Each shall form a complete enclosure with lockable rear doors and shall be
fitted with interior lamp, door switch, heaters, cable gland plates for bottom entry of cables
and all other equipment to provide the features specified, the standard requirements
(which may be varied to suit manufacturer’s design) being as follows:
Instruments:
Voltmeter (voltage at the low voltage terminals of the transformer)
Tap position indicator with integral or separate scale to indicate the no-load LV Voltage in
kV appropriate to each winding tap.

Relays:
Automatic voltage control

Controls:
Automatic/Non-automatic voltage control selector switch
Remote/Supervisory tap change control selector switch
Pistol grip selector switch with centre zero
AVR voltage reference adjuster

Indications and Alarms:

Tap change in progress – white lamp
Tap change out of step – amber lamp

312
 Tap change incomplete – amber
Tap change control on “local”
Tap change control on auto/manual
Group 1 Air forced Cooling equipment running – white
Group 1 Air forced Cooling over current alarm – amber
Group 2 Air forced Cooling equipment running – white
Group 2 Air forced Cooling over current alarm – amber
Forced cooling failure–amber lamp
VT Fail alarm – amber
Supply voltage to OLTC failure – amber lamp
Remote control schemes shall be entirely suitable for operation with the distance between the
transformer and remote-control panels as shown on the Specification drawings.

SUPERVISORY CONTROL

Requirements

Transformer tap change control will be effected from the sub-station control room with
facilities for remote control from the Distribution Control Centre. All necessary
connections, indications, auxiliary switches, relays and changeover switches to meet
supervisory control requirements shall be provided and connected under this Contract to
terminal blocks in the remote control panels. The supply and installation of the
multicore control cables between the remote control panels and the Plant/Telecontrol
Interface Cubicle shall be provided under the Contract.
The following supervisory facilities are required:

Controls:

i) Supervisory selection of auto/non-auto voltage control.

ii) Tap change raise/lower by direct operation of tap changer.
iii) Tap change blocking on/off.
iv) Remote/Supervisory selection “Override”
v) Parallel/Independent control.

Indications and Alarms:

i) Tap position indication by means of transducer with 4 – 20mA dc output range
proportional to step increment.
ii) Tap change out of step alarm.
iii) Buchholz and winding temperature non-trip alarm.
iv) Tap change control on Local/Supervisory.
v) Parallel/Independent, master/follower.
vi) Tap change blocking on/off.
vii) Tap change control on Automatic/Manual.

All contacts for supervisory alarms and indications shall be potential free.

7.2.2 Technical Specification of 33/.415KVA, 200KVA Transformer

7.2.2.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION:

313
 1. Installation Outdoor, Tropical, High Rainfall &
Humidity
2. Type Core
3. Coolant Mineral oil
4. Method of Cooling ONAN
5. Phases 3 (Three)
6. Frequency 50 Hz.
7. Winding Two windings of high conductivity
copper
8. KVA Rating 200 KVA
9. Rated Voltage at no-load 33/0.415 kV
10. Vector Group Dyn11
11. Percentage Impedance at 750C, % 4%
12. No Load Loss Max 430 Watts
13. Load loss at 750 C Max 2800 Watts
14. Maximum Temperature Rise at full a 650C for Winding measured by
load Over 400C ambient ) Resistance Method.
temperature with tap changer in b 550C for Top Oil measured by
principal position. ) Thermometer Method.
7.2.2.2 Major Components

H.T WINDING :
Nominal rated voltage 33 kV
Maximum system voltage 36 kV
Basic insulation level 170 kVp
(minimum)
+1x2.5%, 0, -3x2.5% of rated kV & all fully
rated capacity. Tap Changer shall be off load
Tap Changer
type, manually operated from an external
five-position mechanism.
Inter phase connection Delta
Bushings Porcelain, outdoors type with arcing horns
of standard gap, mounted on top of tank.
Quantity - 3 Nos.
Power frequency withstand 70 kV
voltage for one minute
L.T WINDING :
Nominal rated voltage 415 volts
Highest system voltage 457 volts
Inter phase connection Y (Wye) with neutral brought out.
Bushings Porcelain, outdoor type, mounted on the
side of tank. (Longest side) Quantity – 4 nos.
Power frequency withstand
voltage for one minute 2.5 kV

Transformer Oil :
Application Insulating mineral oil for Transformer. It
will be free from PCB (Poly Chlorinated
314
 Biphenyl)
Grade of oil Class-1
a) Physical Properties
Appearance Liquid and free from suspended matter
or sediment
Density at 200 C 0.895 g/cm3 (Maxm.)
Flash point (Closed cup) 1400 C (Minm.)
Kinematics Viscosity at -150 C 800 cSt. (Maxm.)
Kinematics Viscosity at 200 C 40 cSt. (Maxm.)
Pour point -300 C (Maxm.)
b) Electrical Properties
Dielectric Strength at 50 Hz (with New untreated oil, shall go through
2.5 mm standard gap and 40 mm filtration treatment before the oils are
standard depth) introduced into the apparatus or
equipment. The break down voltage of
this oil shall be more than 50 kV.
Loss tangent/Dielectric
dissipation factor at temp. 900 C,
0.005 (Maxm.)
stress 500V/mm to 1000 V/mm
and frequency 40 Hz to 62 Hz.
c) Chemical Properties
Neutralization value 0.03 mg KOH/g (Maxm.)
Neutralization value after 0.40 mg KOH/g (Maxm.)
oxidation
Total sludge after oxidation 0.10% weight (Maxm.)
PCB Content Free from PCB (Poly Chlorinated
Biphenyl)
d) Standards Performance and testing of oil shall
comply with the latest revision of the
relevant standards BS 148 : 1972, IEC-
60296 or latest revision there on.

7.2.2.3 Features and Accessories

a) All bolts and nuts connected with transformer tank, conservator, radiator etc. shall
be of non-ferrous metal. If it is ferrous metal, it shall be hot dip galvanized as per
standard ASTM A90/ BS EN ISO 1461:1999.
b) Lugs for lifting & towing complete unit.
c) Facilities for lifting core & coil assembly.
d) Base designed for platform mounting on poles.
e) First filling of new oil shall comply to the latest revision of IEC-60296 standard or
other equivalent standards.
f) Each H.T. bushing shall have bolted type bimetallic connector suitable for
accommodating ACSR conductor having Dia. range from 9mm to 14.5mm.
g) Each L.T. bushing shall have bolted type bimetallic connector for accommodating
copper/AAC of area range 2x70mm2 to 2x120mm2 .
h) The L.T. bushing shall be installed on the side/ top lengthwise of the transformer
body. However radiator shall be avoided on this side on the body.
i) Dial thermometer for oil temperature mounted on L.T. side of the tank.
j) Earthing terminals at the bottom corners of Tank.

315
k) Name plate with transformer rating & winding diagram made of stainless steel
shall have engraved letters filled with black enamel.
l) The tank & radiator or flanged radiator shall be painted with two coats of gray
finishing paint on suitable prime coats.
m) Transformer capacity with Sl.No. and NESCO Contract No. should be marked with
emboss/ engrave on the transformer tank adjacent to name plate easily visible
from ground.
n) HT and LT bushing shall be outdoor porcelain type
o) Set of sundries such as similar wiring terminals boards and glands for multi-core
0.415KV Power cables, 33KV terminal connectors suitable for ACSR etc.

For Conservator Type :

a) Transformer tank completes with covers, necessary openings & gaskets.
b) Complete oil preservation system consisting of an oil conservator with shut-off
valve oil level gauge. The system shall have valve for filter press inlet & oil drain.
The oil sampling valve & dehydrating breather shall be provided.

7.2.2.4 Information Required

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing Specification and Technical Data for
crucial components of offered 33/0.415KV, 200KVA, 3-Phase, Dyn11 distribution
transformer.
b) Detail dimensional drawings of offered 33/0.415KV, 200KVA, 3-Phase, Dyn11
distribution transformer.
c) Manufacturer's valid ISO 9001 Certificate;
7.2.2.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA OF TRANSFORMER LOSS AND PERCENTAGE IMPEDANCE DURING FACTORY
TEST WITNESS
Transformer will be tested during factory test witness and will be accepted if the measured
transformer losses are within the specified value or within the following tolerance with
deduction of money from the quoted/ contract price as below :
i) Each component loss (No load loss or Full load loss) may exceed up to 15% of the
specified component loss, provided that the total losses cannot be exceeded 10% of the
specified total losses.
ii) Percentage Impedance may vary up to ± 10 % of the specified value.
iii) The purchaser can carryout the testing of any no. of transformers during pre-delivery
inspection. But, the testing of transformers during pre-delivery inspection will not be
less than 10% at random basis of the transformer ready for inspection but in any case
it will not be less than 3 nos. The manufacturer will provide all arrangements for the
testing of transformers desired by the purchaser in his factory.
iv) If the results of any transformer exceeds the specified losses and impedance (each
component loss exceeds more than 15% or total loss exceeds more than 10% of the
specified losses or percentage impedance exceeds 4±10% then the whole lot will be
rejected or on request of the supplier/manufacturer every transformer may be tested
(Transformer losses, percentage impedance, vector group test etc.) at his factory
premises/CERS, NESCO by the NESCO inspection team. If the said transformers are
tested by the NESCO inspection team at the manufacturers/suppliers premises, then
the testing fees at the rate of Tk. 2000/-(Two thousand) per transformer shall be paid
by the supplier through invoice in advance. If the said transformers are tested at CERS,
NESCO all the expenditure for carrying, loading/unloading and testing fees fixed by the
CERS are to be borne by the supplier in advance. After completion of the test, the
316
 transformer passes the test will be properly sealed by the inspection team. The
supplier will be liable to protect those seal up to delivery to the NESCO’s designated
Store(s).
The transformers which pass the tests will be accepted by NESCO subject to fulfillment
of the other qualification criteria as per contract. The remaining transformers failed to
qualify the tests will be rejected.
v) If the measured loss(es) (No load loss or Full load loss or Both) of the tested sample
transformer(s) during factory test witness by the NESCO's inspection team and test
performed by BUET/ DUET/ CUET/ KUET/ RUET exceed the specified loss (No load
loss or Full load loss or Both) but remain within acceptable limit as specifiec in clause
7.11(i) & (ii), then an amount will be deducted from the Contract price for the loss(s)
exceeding the specified loss(s) (No load loss or Full load loss or Both) according to the
following formula :
Amount to be deducted from the Contract price
= Contract Price x {(Measured Loss - specified Loss) ÷ specified Loss} x %MT
Where, Contract = Total Contract Price
Price
Measured = Measured Average No-load Loss* 1 + Measured Average Full
Loss Load Loss* 2.
Specified = Specified No Load Loss + Specified Full load loss
Loss

%MT (Percentage of Monitized Transformer) = % of the Monitized Transformer found

during factory test witness by the NESCO's inspection team and test performed by
BUET/ DUET/ CUET/ KUET/ RUET whose measured loss(es) (No load loss or Full load
loss or Both) exceed the specified loss (No load loss or Full load loss or Both) but
remain within acceptable limit. For example : If total no. of transformers to be
inspected is 100 and the no. of selected transformers during pre-delivery inspection is
10, 8 nos. are found within the specified losses and 2 nos. are found exceeding the
specified losses then the %MT will be (2/10)x100=20%
*1 Measured Average No Load Loss = [Sum of the measured No-load losses of the
tested transformer(s) exceeding the specified No-
load loss ÷ Nos. of tested transformer(s) which
exceeds the specified No-load loss]
* 2 Measured Average Full Load Loss = [Sum of the measured Full-load losses of the
tested transformer(s) which exceeding the
specified Full-load loss ÷ Nos. of tested
transformer(s) which exceeds the specified Full-
load loss]
It is to be noted that if the measured value found less than or equal to specified value, no
benefits will be given to the supplier/ manufacturer. In this case, the tested transformers
whose loss (No load loss or Full load loss or Both) have not exceed the specified loss, will
not be taken into account for averaging the measured loss for using the above formula.
7.2.2.6 APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS
Calculation for the Max. Temp. Rise of Winding & Oil over 400C ambient supported by Load
Losses and Heat Dissipation by Radiator and also Short Circuit Calculation along with
thermal & mechanical calculations on the basis of proposed Design Data.

7.2.2.7 TRANSFORMER CORE AND COILS

Transformers core and coils must be new, unused, and clean.
Supporting frames of the core and coils of transformers shall be designed to accommodate
variations in tank height.
317
 The core and coil assembly shall have the core and coils rigidly connected to the tank and
suitably closed lugs shall be provided for removing the core and coil assembly from the
tank.
Transformer Sl. no. should be marked with emboss on the Supporting frames of the core
and coils of each transformers minimum in 2(two) places.

7.2.3.8 TRANSFORMER SEALING

A satisfactory lid-sealing gasket shall be provided on each of these transformers to
maintain the seal at extremes of operating temperature. A cold oil level (COL) mark shall
be provided inside each transformer marked COL.
7.2.2.9 FINISHES
a) Painting
Painting ferrous metal work is to be provided with an effective vapour sealing paint finish,
applied generally in accordance with BS 5493 and /or other recognised international
standard.
Paint shall be applied to produce a uniform film. Edges corners, crevices, welds, bolts, and
rivets shall receive special attention to maintain the required thickness.
Before painting or filling with oil or compound, all un-galvanised parts shall be completely
clean and free from rust, scale and grease and all external rough metal surfaces on the
casting shall be filled.
The paint system shall be in accordance with best practice for hot and humid locations in a
highly aggressive environment. A description of the paint system to be used and the
proposed method of application shall be fully described in the Tender.
All external surfaces shall receive a minimum of three coats of paint. The primary coat
shall contain an approved rust inhibitor and shall be applied as soon as possible after the
completion of the surface preparation. The second coat shall be of oil and weather resisting
nature and have a shade of colour easily distinguishable from the primary. The final coat
shall be of oil and weather resisting and non-fading glossy paint of a colour agreed by the
Engineer.
b) Non-ferrous parts and Bright Steel parts
All exposed metal liable iron corrosion during transport is to be appropriately protected
by casting with an approved anti-rusting composition. Other non-ferrous parts shall be
adequately protected against corrosion during shipment or in service.
c) Galvanizing
Galvanizing where applicable shall be applied by the hot dipped process generally in
accordance with ASTM A90/ BS EN ISO 1461:1999 or equivalent standard of metal surface
unless specified otherwise.
The zinc coating shall be smooth clean and of uniform thickness and free from defects. The
preparation of galvanizing itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the
coated material.
All drilling, punching, cutting, shaping and welding of parts shall be completed and all
burrs shall be removed before the galvanizing process is applied.
Surfaces that are in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium plated.

7.2.2.10 RATING PLATE

A brass or stainless-steel rating plate shall be fitted to each transformer. The information
shall deeply etched including the diagram of the connections of the windings, the vector
diagram showing the general phase relations of the transformer, and a diagrammatic plan
of the transformer cover showing the terminal positions and marking and other essential

318
 particulars. The plate shall be mounted in an accessible position and preferably adjacent to
the tapping switch if this is located on the side of the tank.
The rating plate shall be fitted below the LV terminals. Rating and diagram plates shall be
attached by a 5 mm brass screw in each corner to 20 mm mild steel brackets welded
horizontally approximately 20 mm from the tank side. The following information is to be
provided on the rating and diagram plate in the English language – clearly and indelibly
marked.
‫٭‬ Transformer type
‫٭‬ Manufacture’s name
‫٭‬ Manufacturer’s serial number
‫٭‬ Year of Manufacture
‫٭‬ Number of phases
‫٭‬ Rated power
‫٭‬ Rated frequency
‫٭‬ Rated voltages
‫٭‬ Rated currents
‫٭‬ Connection symbol
‫٭‬ Impedance voltage at rated current
‫٭‬ Type of cooling
‫٭‬ Total mass
‫٭‬ Mass of insulating oil
‫٭‬ Insulation levels
‫٭‬ Details regarding tapings
Each Transformer should be marked with emboss or welded on the body easily visible from
the ground, with letters of size mentioned against each word(s)/ sentence(s) below:

NESCO (40 mm)

Contract No & Date: (20 mm)
Sl. No. :--------- of ------------KVA ---------- (20 mm)

Note :
a) Sl. No. ......................of ..............KVA ...... is meant for particular No. of the
Transformer out of the contracted quantity under this contract.
b) The above marking on the body of the transformer shall be done in addition to
the normal nameplate of the transformer. The nameplate shall be continuous
welded on the body of the Transformer before Pre-delivery inspection. 7.2.2.11
TERMINAL MARKING
All transformers shall have the primary and secondary terminal markings plainly
and indelibly marked on the transformer adjacent to the relevant terminal. These
markings shall preferably be 25 mm in height. The terminal marking shall be
embossed on the body of the Transformer with respective color code.
7.2.2.12 TERMINAL LEADS
Outgoing leads shall be brought out through bushings. The leads shall be such that the
core and coils may be removed with the least possible interference with these leads, and
they shall be specially supported inside the transformer to withstand the effects of
vibration and short circuits.
7.2.2.13 BUSHINGS
All bushings shall be porcelain clad, and shall be of the highest quality. They shall be sealed in a
manner to prevent ingress of moisture and to facilitate removal. The neutral bushings

319
 and stems shall be identical to those provided for phase terminations. Bushing stems,
nuts and washers shall be made of brass.
7.2.2.14 EARTHING CONNECTIONS
Earthing connections shall be provided with connection facilities for 2x50 mm2 copper
stranded conductor. The bolts shall be located on the lower side of the transformer and
be of M12 size; each shall be clearly indicated with an engraved ‘earth symbol’. Two
earthing connections are required on each transformer.
7.2.2.15 GASKETS
Any gaskets provided with the transformers shall be suitable for making oil tight joints,
and there shall be no deleterious effects of either gaskets or oil when the gaskets are
continuously in contact with hot oil. No gaskets shall be used in which the material of the
material of the gasket is mounted on a textile backing. Exterior gaskets shall be
weatherproof and shall not be affected by strong sunlight.
7.2.2.16 OIL
All transformers shall be filled to the required level with new, unused, clean, standard
mineral oil after treatment in compliance with IEC 60296 & BS 148.
7.2.2.17 TAPINGS
Five voltage tapings shall be provided on the primary side of each transformer and shall give: +
2.5%, 0,- 2.5%, – 5% and –7.5% steps of the primary nominal voltage.
The tapings shall be selected by an ‘off load’ tapping switch with an external hand wheel with
provision for looking onto a selected tapping. The switch shall have a positive action designed to
eliminate the possibility of stopping in an intermediate position. The shaft shall be adequately
sealed so that no seepage of oil occurs under all conditions of service. The voltage operating
positions, together with tap change positions shall be clearly and indelibly marked

320
 SECTION 7.3

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF POWER CABLES &

CONDUCTOR

321
7.3 Power Cables, Conductor and Control Cables
7.3.0 11 KV XLPE Power Cables
7.3.1 General

Where a Manufacturer’s Standard or a national Standard equal to or better than the

appropriate specified standard has been issued and is acceptable to the Purchaser, any
material or goods supplied shall be manufactured, installed and tested in accordance with
the latest revision of the relevant standard unless otherwise specified.
Where any Standard referred to in this Specification has been superseded by a new
standard prior to the date of the letter or invitation to Bid, the reference shall be deemed
to be to such superseding standard.
Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be mentioned in
the Bid and shall be taken into consideration by the Purchaser before contract placement.
The goods shall be designed to ensure continuity of service under all working condition at
the site as the first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and repairs. All
electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and the
specified ambient temperature.

7.3.2 References
The recommendations and tests specified in the standards shall be adhered to. It shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to demonstrate to the Purchaser that any proposed
Standard is equal to or superior to the equivalent IEC or BS. All costs for proving such
equivalence are deemed included in the Contractors Bid Prices.

7.3.3 Climatic Condition

The offered XLPE U/G cables with jointing Kits must be suitable for working in the climate
conditions of Bangladesh as described below:
• Altitude : 0-300 meters above the sea level
• Maximum ambient temperature : 45 C
• Minimum ambient temperature : 5 C
• Humidity : 98 %
• Mean annual rainfall : 1500-3000 mm
• No. of annual rainy days : 80-120 days
• Average isokeraunic level : 80 days/year
• Pollution of ambient air : dust, salt, chemical.

322
7.3.4 General Requirement of 11KV XLPE 1x300 mm2, 11KV XLPE 3x185 mm2 ,
150mm2, 95 mm2 Copper Cable.

11KV, XLPE, 1Cx 300-mm2 Copper Cable.

Ite
m Description of Items Unit Particulars
No.
1 System Voltage KV 11
2 Rated Voltage KV 6/10(12)
Cross sectional Area of
3 mm2 300
Conductors
Average thickness shall not be less than
3.40 mm nominal value as per IEC
60502. However, thickness at any point
4 Insulation thickness Mm
may be less than nominal value
provided that the difference does not
exceed 0.1mm + 10% of nominal value.
5 Manufacturing process Manufactured through VCV/CCV.
6 Conductor Material Copper
7 Shape of Conductor Compact Circular
8 Type of Conductor Screen Semi-conducting XLPE
Conductor Temperature at
9 C 250
end of short Circuit

Indoor Termination Kits for 11KV, XLPE, 1-Core, 300 mm2 Copper cable
I Application For 11KV, 1-core, XLPE 300 mm2 Copper Conductors
Ii Installation For Indoor switchgear terminations
Iii System 11KV, effectively earthed system
Iv Cable conductor 300 mm2 1-core, Copper Conductors
V Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-
tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 300 mm2 Copper Conductors
- Installation instructions

Outdoor Termination Kits for 11KV, XLPE, 1-Core, 300 mm2 Copper cable
I Application For 11KV, 1-core, XLPE 300 mm2 Copper Conductors
ii Installation For outdoor installation on poles/structures
iii System 11KV, effectively earthed system
iv Cable conductor 300 mm2 1-core Copper Conductors
v Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-
tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
323
 - Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt
- Support insulator
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 300 mm2 Copper Conductors
- Support insulators Tee Brackets
- Installation instructions

11KV, XLPE, 3Cx 185 mm2 Copper Cable

Item
Description of Items Unit Particulars
No.
1 System Voltage KV 11
2 Rated Voltage KV 6/10(12)
Cross sectional Area of
3 mm2 3x185
Conductors
Average thickness shall not be less than
3.40 mm nominal value as per IEC
60502. However, thickness at any point
4 Insulation thickness Mm
may be less than nominal value
provided that the difference does not
exceed 0.1mm + 10% of nominal value.
5 Manufacturing process Manufactured through VCV/CCV.
6 Conductor Material Copper
7 Shape of Conductor Compact Circular
Type of Conductor
8 Semi-conducting XLPE
Screen
Conductor Temperature
9 C 250
at end of short Circuit

Indoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 Copper cable
i Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm2 Copper Conductors
ii Installation For Indoor switchgear terminations
iii System 11KV, effectively earthed system
iv Cable conductor185 mm2 Copper Conductors
v Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-
tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 185 mm2 Copper Conductors
- Installation instructions
Outdoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 Copper cable
i Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm2 Copper Conductors
ii Installation For outdoor installation on poles/structures
324
 iii System 11KV, effectively earthed system
iv Cable conductor 185 mm2 Copper Conductors
v Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-
tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt
- Support insulator
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 185 mm2 Copper Conductors
- Support insulators Tee Brackets
- Installation instructions

Technical Requirements:
Cross Link Polyethylene (XLPE) cables shall be suitable for operation at voltage of
11KV between phases at continuous maximum conductor temperatures of 90 deg. C.
The cable shall be suitable in all respect for use on 11KV system with a nominal three-
phase fault level of 25KA. The cables and associated fittings, joints and termination
shall be so designed to prevent damage to the cable or fittings, except in the immediate
vicinity of the fault, in the event of an insulation failure at any point which results in a
fault current to earth of 25KA for 1 sec.
Each core of Power Cable shall comprise 1x500 q. mm, 3x185 sq.mm. & 95 sq.mm
Copper Conductor XLPE Insulated, Copper screen and shall comply with IEC 60502,
except as modified or extended by the requirement of the specification. The length of
cable on a drum shall be 500 Metre continuous or as specified by the Purchaser and it
shall be shipped on standard non-returnable steel drum, each drum having stencilled
on its side; size, type and length of cable, together with its gross weight, net weight and
contract number.
7.3.4.1 Conductors
The conductor shall be stranded compacted round copper conductor complying the
requirement of flexibility Class-2 of IEC 60228. The wires shall be made of high
conductivity copper and shall be stranded mid compacted. The copper used for the
conductor shall be of highest purity. The nominal area of conductor shall be 1× 500 sq.
mm , 3× 185 sq. mm.
The minimum number of wires in conductor and the maximum DC resistance of
conductor shall be as per relevant standard.
7.3.4.2 Conductor Screening
The conductor screen shall consist of an extruded layer of thermosetting semi
conducting compound and shall be continuous and cover the whole surface of the
conductor. The screen shall be firmly bonded to XLPE insulation. The minimum
thickness of conductor screen shall be 0.8 mm. (approx.)
The outer surface of the conductor screen shall be circular and free from irregularities.
7.3.4.3 Insulation
The insulation shall consist of cross-linked polyethylene tightly extruded over the
conductor screen. The insulation shall generally comply with IEC 60502.

325
 The highest possible purity of insulation material is required. The Bider shall confirm
that adequate precautions are taken to remove contaminants and to eliminate the
introduction of particles of contaminants during material handling or extrusion
process.
The Cable shall be manufactured through VCV/CCV.
The insulation material shall be cross-linked by a dry process. A cross-linking process
using steam curing will not be permitted.
7.3.4.4 Insulation Thickness
The thickness of insulation shall be determined by taking the average of number of
measurements and shall be not less than the values tabulated in IEC Publication 60502.
Insulation thickness shall not depart from the specified nominal value by an amount
exceeding the tolerances specified in IEC Publication 60502.
The thickness at any point, however, is less than the specified value, provided the
difference does not exceed 10 percent plus 0.1mm.
The thickness of the semi conducting screens on the conductors and over the
insulation shall not be included in the measurement of insulation thickness.
7.3.4.5 Insulation Screening
The insulation screen shall comprise a non-metallic semi-conducting polyethylene part
in combination with a metallic part.
The non-metallic semi-conducting part shall be applied directly upon insulation of the
core and shall comprise a layer of extruded semi-conducting polyethylene compound.
The conductor screen, insulation and semi-conducting part of insulation screen layer
shall be applied to the conductor in common extrusion process with dry curing system.
The metallic part shall be stranded copper applied over the layer of semi conducting
compound.
There shall be single layer of copper wires adequately spaced apart on each core of
Power cable.
The non-metallic part shall be applied directly upon the insulation and shall be a layer
of extruded semi-conducting compound. This screen shall be formed in such a way that
it can be readily removed for jointing.
The insulation screen shall be capable of withstanding a fault current of 10KA for 1 sec.
without damage.
7.3.4.6 Metallic Screen
The metallic Screen shall consist of a concentric layer of copper wires or a combination
of copper wires and helically applied copper tape(s) as per IEC Standard.
The metallic Screen shall be so designed to carry the specified earth fault current of 25
KA for 1 second.
7.3.4.7 Separation Sheath
The Separation Sheath should covering the whole surface area of the metallic screen as
per IEC Standard.
7.3.4.8 Over sheath

326
 The cable shall be sheathed overall with a Medium Density Polyethylene (MDPE) outer
sheath. The outer sheath shall be of smooth and uniform composition and free of holes,
cracks, and bisectors.
As a protection against termite attack, the outer covering shall contain the termite
repellent substance of Pb napthanate.
The outer sheath shall have adequate strength and thickness to withstand the test
voltage and mechanical tests and be suitable for ambient conditions at site.
The outer sheath material shall be capable of withstanding the highest temperature
achieved with the cable at its rated current without damage or deformation at site
ambient conditions.
The outer surface of the polyethylene outer sheath shall be as specified in IEC 60502.
7.3.4.9 Armour
The armour shall be Aluminium Alloy round wires or Corrugated Aluminum sheath as
per IEC Standard.
The joints are brazed or welded and any wire shall be not less than 01 mm from the
nearest joints in any other armour wire in the complete cable.
7.3.4.10 Continuous Current Rating
The continuous current rating of the cable shall be calculated in accordance with the
procedure described in IEC 60287 based on the site ambient condition, with the
insulation parameters as specified. The Cable current ratings shall base on site
ambient conditions, with the general methods of installation and bonding.
The maximum conductor temperature shall not exceed 90 deg. C when
carrying the rated current under the most onerous site conditions.
7.3.4.11 Short Circuit Rating
The cable shall be capable of withstanding the specified maximum short circuit current
for the specified times without damage or permanent distortion.
The temperature of the conductor at maximum fault current for the specified time
shall not exceed 250 deg. C as specified in IEC 60502.

7.3.4.12 Manufacturer Identification

The external surface of the cable shall be marked by the following at an interval of
1000 mm with 10mm high character throughout the length of the cable:
(i) 11KV, XLPE, 1Cx 500 sq.mm Cu”
(ii) 11KV, XLPE, 3Cx 185 sq.mm Cu”
(iii) 11KV, XLPE, 1Cx 150 sq.mm Cu”
(iv) 11KV, XLPE, 1Cx 95 sq.mm Cu”
(v) “NESCO”, “Manufacturers Name

7.3.4.12.1 Information Required

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all
information. Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data
b) Outline and General Arrangement drawings.
c) The Bidder/ Manufacturer shall submit the list of available testing/ measuring
327
 equipment, meters, etc., along with valid Calibration Certificate(s) from competent
authority used in manufacturer's laboratory for performing Routine Test as per IEC
standard.
e) Copy of relevant IEC standards (to be submitted with design and drawing for
approval after the contract).

150 mm2 PVC Copper Cable

7.3.5 GENERAL SPEC IFICATIONS :

These single core cables shall be designed as per above standards and suitable for
operation at a maximum voltage of 1000V line to line and suitable for use underground
buried in earth or in ducts and above ground in air or in buildings under local ambient
conditions.

The maximum acceptable length of cable on a drum shall be 500M and shall be supplied
on standard non-returnable treated wooden drum, each drum having stenciled on each
side: drum number, code name of conductor, drum wound length together with gross and
net weight, the manufacturer name, the purchaser's name and contract number with date.
The cover of the drum should be of same treated wood.
Cable construction shall be as per BS 6004:1994 or equivalent to any internationally
acceptable standard. Conductors shall be circular plain annealed copper in accordance
with IEC 60228. Thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with IEC 60502-1. The over
sheath shall be an external layer of black PVC.
A means of identifying the cable size and NESCO ownership shall be inscribed throughout
the length of the Cable in a single line on the PVC Insulation. The letters shall be upright
block characters embossed on the surface; they are being not more than 300 mm between
each group. The manufacturer’s name with year of manufacture and Progressive Meter
Marking shall be provided throughout the length of the cable.

Drum wound length of each drum may vary up to ± 5% of the total drum length as
tolerance. However, the sum of total drum length shall be as per ordered quantity. Only one
short length of conductor on a drum is considered for acceptance, if necessary. For the
other requirements, the given data shall be considered as minimum and maximum where
necessary. No negative tolerances for the diameter and thickness are acceptable.
Description Unit Requirements
Cable Size mm2 1CX150
Material PVC Insulated
plain annealed copper.
Numbers & Diameter of wires No/mm min 37 wires with
sufficient dia.
Maximum resistance at 20 °C /KM 0.124
Nominal thickness of insulation mm 1.8
Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8
Co lour of sheath Black
Approximate outer diameter mm 21.9
Approximate weight Kg/KM 1640
Continuous permissible service V 600/1000
voltage
Current rating at 30 °C ambient Amps 350
328
 temperature U/G
Current rating at 35 °C ambient in Amps 405
air

7.3.5.1 FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES:

o Conductors shall be delivered on standard non-returnable strong wooden
drum. The central hole of the drum shall be reinforced to fit on axle size 95 mm
diameter. The interior of the conductor drum shall be lined with bituminous
paper to prevent the conductor from being in contact with timber or
Aluminium water proof paper and felt lining shall overlap at seams by at least
20 mm and the seams shall be sealed.
o Drum shall be adequately protected by securely fastening substantial wooden
battens around the periphery. These battens shall be secured by means of hoop
metal bindings. Conductor drum shall be treated in an approved manner to
resist termite and fungus attacks and shall be suitable for outside storage for a
minimum period of 3 years in an equatorial climate with out undue
deterioration.
o The PVC covering shall be complete with PVC/A for Insulation and PVC-ST2 for
Sheath as per requirement of IEC60502-1.
o There shall be only one length of conductor on a drum.
o Treated wooden drum standard: AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83, C16 –82, P5 –83.

7.3.5.2 INFORMATION REQUIRED:

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all
information. Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data
for offered cable.
b) Cross-sectional drawings of offered cable.
c) Detail description of testing facilities (Routine & Type Test) at manufacturer's
plant.

95 mm2 PVC Copper Cable

7.3.6 GENERAL SPEC IFICATIONS :

These single core cables shall be designed as per above standards and suitable for operation at a
maximum voltage of 1000V line to line and suitable for use underground buried in earth or in
ducts and above ground in air or in buildings under local ambient conditions.

The maximum acceptable length of cable on a drum shall be 500M and shall be supplied
on standard non-returnable treated wooden drum, each drum having stenciled on each
side: drum number, code name of conductor, drum wound length together with gross and
net weight, the manufacturer name, the purchaser's name and contract number with date.
The cover of the drum should be of same treated wood.
Cable construction shall be as per BS 6004:1994 or equivalent to any internationally
acceptable standard. Conductors shall be circular plain annealed copper in accordance
with IEC 60228. Thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with IEC 502-1. The over
sheath shall be an external layer of black PVC.
329
 A means of identifying the cable size and NESCO ownership shall be inscribed throughout the
length of the Cable in a single line on the PVC Insulation. The letters shall be upright block
characters embossed on the surface; they are being not more than 300 mm between each group.
The manufacturer’s name with year of manufacture and Progressive Meter Marking shall be
provided throughout the length of the cable.
Drum wound length of each drum may vary up to ± 5% of the total drum length as tolerance.
However, the sum of total drum length shall be as per ordered quantity. Only one short length of
conductor on a drum is considered for acceptance, if necessary. For the other requirements, the
given data shall be considered as minimum and maximum where necessary. No negative tolerances
for the diameter and thickness are acceptable.

Description Unit Requirements

Cable Size mm2 1CX95
Material PVC Insulated
plain annealed copper.
Numbers & Diameter of wires No/mm 19/2.52
Maximum resistance at 30 °C /KM 0.1964
Nominal thickness of insulation mm 1.6
Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8
Co lour of sheath Black
Approximate outer diameter mm 19.4
Approximate weight Kg/KM 1129
Continuous permissible service voltage V 600/1000
Current rating at 30 °C ambient temperature Amps 270
U/G
Current rating at 35 °C ambient in air Amps 300

7.3.6.1 FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES:

o Conductors shall be delivered on standard non-returnable strong wooden drum. The
central hole of the drum shall be reinforced to fit on axle size 95 mm diameter. The
interior of the conductor drum shall be lined with bituminous paper to prevent the
conductor from being in contact with timber or Aluminium water proof paper and
felt lining shall overlap at seams by at least 20 mm and the seams shall be sealed.

o Drum shall be adequately protected by securely fastening substantial wooden

battens around the periphery. These battens shall be secured by means of hoop
metal bindings. Conductor drum shall be treated in an approved manner to resist
termite and fungus attacks and shall be suitable for outside storage for a minimum
period of 3 years in an equatorial climate with out undue deterioration.

o The PVC covering shall be complete with PVC/A for Insulation and PVC-ST2 for
Sheath as per requirement of IEC60502-1.

o There shall be only one length of conductor on a drum.

o Treated wooden drum standard: AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83, C16 –82, P5 –83.

330
7.3.6.2 INFORMATION REQUIRED:
The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all
information. Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data
for offered cable.
b) Cross-sectional drawings of offered cable.
c) Detail description of testing facilities (Routine & Type Test) at manufacturer's
plant.
7.3.7 Technical Specification of ACSR MARTIN
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS:
This conductor shall be designed as per above standards for operation in overhead lines in air
under local ambient conditions. The conductor shall be constructed from hard drawn
Aluminium and Zinc Coated Steel wires where the centre wire or wires are of Zinc Coated Steel
and the outer layer or layers are of Aluminium. The wires shall be smooth and free from all
imperfections not consistent with good commercial practice. No joint of any kind shall be
permitted in the Zinc Coated Steel wires.

In all constructions, the successive layers shall have opposite directions of lay, the outermost
layer being right handed. The lay ratio of any Aluminium layer shall not be greater than the lay
ratio of Aluminum layer immediately beneath it. The lay ratio of different layers shall be within
the limit as per above standards.

The maximum acceptable length of conductor in a drum shall be as stated below and shall be
supplied on standard non-returnable treated wooden drum, each drum having stenciled on each
side : drum number, code name of conductor, drum wound length together with gross and net
weight, the manufacturer's name, the purchaser's name and contract number with date. The
cover of the drum should be of same treated wood.

Drum wound length of each drum may vary up to ± 5% of the total drum length as tolerance.
However, the sum of total drum length shall be as per ordered quantity. Only one short length of
conductor on a drum is considered for acceptance, if necessary. For the other requirements, the
given data shall be considered as minimum and maximum where necessary. No negative
tolerances for the diameter and thickness are acceptable.

ACSR MARTIN
Code name ACSR MARTIN
Installation Overhead
Type Stranded
Material Hard drawn Aluminum steel
reinforced
Overall diameter of the conductor 36.17 mm

331
 Nominal cross sectional area of the 772.10 sq. mm
conductor
Number/diameter of Aluminum Strand 54/4.02 mm
Nominal Aluminum cross sectional area 685.40 sq. mm
Number/diameter of Steel Strand 19/2.41 mm
Nominal Steel cross sectional area 86.70 sq. mm
Weight of conductor 2590 Kg/KM
Drum wound length 500 M
Maximum DC Resistance of Conductor at 0.0425 /Km
20 °C
Minimum breaking Load of Conductor min 11400 Kg
Lay direction for Outermost Layer of Right hand
Aluminium
Rated Strength Min 206

7.3.7.1 FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES:

o Conductors shall be delivered on standard non-returnable strong wooden drum. The
central hole of the drum shall be reinforced to fit on axle size 95 mm diameter. The
interior of the conductor drum shall be lined with bituminous paper to prevent the
conductor from being in contact with timber or Aluminium water proof paper and
felt lining shall overlap at seams by at least 20 mm and the seams shall be sealed.
o Drum shall be adequately protected by securely fastening substantial wooden
battens around the periphery. These battens shall be secured by means of hoop
metal bindings. Conductor drum shall be treated in an approved manner to resist
termite and fungus attacks and shall be suitable for outside storage for a minimum
period of 3 years in an equatorial climate with out undue deterioration.
o There shall be only one length of conductor on a drum.
o Treated wooden drum standard: AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83, C16 –82, P5 –83.

7.3.8 SPECIFICATION FOR COPPER CONTROL CABLE

7.3.8.1 STANDARDS:
The cable as specified in this Section shall be conforming to the latest
edition of the following standards for operation under local ambient conditions.
Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance of the cable shall be in accordance with
the IEC 502-1, BS 6004:1994 or equivalent International standards.

7.3.8.2 SPECIFICATIONS:

These cables shall be designed as per above standards and suitable for operation at a
maximum voltage of 1000V line to line and suitable for use underground buried in earth
or in ducts and above ground in air or in buildings under local ambient conditions.
The maximum acceptable length of cable on a drum shall be 1000M and shall be
supplied on standard non-returnable treated wooden drum, each drum having stencilled
on each side, drum number, code name of conductor, drum wound length together with

332
 gross and net weight, the manufacturer name, the purchaser's name and contract number
with date. The cover of the drum should be of same treated wood.
Cable construction shall be as per BS 6004:1994 or equivalent to any internationally
acceptable standard. Thickness of PVC insulation shall be in accordance with IEC 502-1.
The over sheath shall be an external layer of black PVC.
A mean of identifying the cable size and NESCO ownership shall be inscribed
throughout the length of the Cable in a single line on the PVC Insulation. The letters
shall be upright block characters embossed on the surface; they are being not more than
300 mm between each group. The manufacturer’s name shall be provided throughout the
length of the cable with year of manufacture.

Drum wound length of each drum may vary up to ± 5% of the total drum length as
tolerance. However, the sum of total drum length shall be as per ordered quantity. Only
one short length of conductor on a drum is considered for acceptance, if necessary. For
the other requirements, the given data shall be considered as minimum and maximum
where necessary. No negative tolerances for the diameter and thickness are acceptable.
Description Unit Requirements
2
Cable Size mm 4CX2.5 4CX4m 4CX6m 8CX2.5 16CX2. 24CX2.5 mm2
2 2
mm m m2 mm2 5 mm2
Material plain plain plain plain plain plain annealed
anneale annealed annealed anneale anneale copper
d copper copper d d
copper copper copper
Numbers & No/m 7/0.67 7/0.85 7/1.04 7/0.67 7/0.67 7/0.67
Diameter of m
wires
Diameter of mm 1.4 4×0.8 4×0.8 4x0.8 4x0.8 4x0.8
Steel wires/
Strips
Thickness of mm - 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
Steel Tape
Maximum /K 7.28 3.20 3.20 7.69 7.69 7.69
resistance at M
30 °C
Nominal mm 0.8 1.0 1.0 0.8 0.8 0.8 (min.)
thickness of (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.)
PVC insulation
Nominal mm 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 (min.)
thickness of (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.) (min.)
PVC sheath
Co lour of Black Black Black Black Black Black
sheath
Approximate mm 17 20 21 20 25 28
outer diameter
Approximate Kg/K 670 810 920 1040 1630 1730
weight M
Continuous V 600/10 600/1000 600/1000 600/10 600/10 600/1000
permissible 00 00 00
service voltage
333
7.3.8.3 FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES:
o Cables shall be delivered on standard non-returnable strong wooden drum. The
central hole of the drum shall be reinforced to fit on axle size 95 mm diameter. The
interior of the conductor drum shall be lined with bituminous paper to prevent the
conductor from being in contact with timber or Aluminium water proof paper and
felt lining shall overlap at seams by at least 20 mm and the seams shall be sealed.
o Drum shall be adequately protected by securely fastening substantial wooden
battens around the periphery. These battens shall be secured by means of hoop
metal bindings. Conductor drum shall be treated in an approved manner to resist
termite and fungus attacks and shall be suitable for outside storage for a minimum
period of 3 years in an equatorial climate with out undue deterioration.
o There shall be only one length of cable on a drum.
o Treated wooden drum standard: AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83, C16 –82, P5 –83.

7.3.8.4 INFORMATION REQUIRED:

The Bidder/ Manufacturer as per tender requirements shall provide all information.
Besides these, the following information has to be submitted:
a) Manufacturer’s Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data for
offered cable.
b) Cross-sectional drawings of offered cable.
c) Detail description of testing facilities (Routine & Type Test) at manufacturer's plant.
d) Manufacturer's valid ISO 9001 Certificate.
7.3.9 SPECIFICATION FOR GROUNDING COPPER CONDUCTOR
7.3.9.1 STANDARDS:
The cable as specified in this Section shall be conform to the latest edition
of the following standards for operation under local ambient conditions. Design,
Manufacture, Testing and Performance of the conductor shall be in accordance with the
IEC 502-1, BS 6004:1994 or equivalent international standards.

7.3.9.2 SPECIFICATIONS:

These single core cables shall be designed as per above standards and suitable for
operation at a maximum voltage of 1000V line to line and suitable for use underground
buried in earth or in ducts and above ground in air or in buildings under local ambient
conditions.
The maximum acceptable length of cable on a drum shall be 500M and shall be supplied
on standard non-returnable treated wooden drum, each drum having stencilled on each
side, drum number, code name of conductor, drum wound length together with gross
and net weight, the manufacturer name, the purchaser's name and contract number with
date. The cover of the drum should be of same treated wood.
Cable construction shall be as per BS 6004:1994 or equivalent to any internationally
acceptable standard. Thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with IEC 502-1.
A means of identifying the cable size and NESCO ownership shall be inscribed
throughout the length of the Cable in a single line on the PVC Insulation. The letters
shall be upright block characters embossed on the surface; they are being not more than

334
 300 mm between each group. The manufacturer’s name shall be provided throughout the
length of the cable with year of manufacture.
Drum wound length of each drum may vary up to ± 5% of the total drum length as
tolerance. However, the sum of total drum length shall be as per ordered quantity. Only
one short length of conductor on a drum is considered for acceptance, if necessary. For
the other requirements, the given data shall be considered as minimum and maximum
where necessary. No negative tolerances for the diameter and thickness are acceptable.

Description Unit Requirements

Cable Size mm2 1CX50
Material PVC Insulated
plain annealed copper.
Numbers & Diameter of wires No/mm 19/1.83
Maximum resistance at 30 °C /KM 0.379
Nominal thickness of insulation mm 1.4
Co lour of insulation Black
Approximate outer diameter mm 13
Approximate weight Kg/KM 532
Continuous permissible service V 600/1000
voltage
Current rating at 30 °C ambient Amps 136
temperature U/G
Current rating at 35 °C ambient in Amps 164
air

7.3.9.3 FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES:

a) Conductors shall be delivered on standard non-returnable strong wooden drum. The
central hole of the drum shall be reinforced to fit on axle size 95 mm diameter. The
interior of the conductor drum shall be lined with bituminous paper to prevent the
conductor from being in contact with timber or Aluminium water proof paper and felt
lining shall overlap at seams by at least 20 mm and the seams shall be sealed.
b) Drum shall be adequately protected by securely fastening substantial wooden battens
around the periphery. These battens shall be secured by means of hoop metal bindings.
Conductor drum shall be treated in an approved manner to resist termite and fungus
attacks and shall be suitable for outside storage for a minimum period of 3 years in an
equatorial climate with out undue deterioration.
c) The PVC covering shall complete with requirement of BS-6746 for type T-II
compound.
d) There shall be only one length of conductor on a drum.
e) Treated wooden drum standard: AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83, C16 –82, P5 –83.

7.3.9.4 INFORMATION REQUIRED

The bidder /manufacturer as per tender requirement shall provide all information.
Besides these the following has to be submitted:
1) Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing specification and technical data of
offered cable.
2) Cross sectional Drawings of offered cable.
3) Detail description of testing facilities (Routine & Type Test) at manufacturer's plant.

335
 4) Manufacturer's valid ISO 9001 certificate
7.3.10 Technical Specification of ACSR Grosbeak

SPECIFICAT IONS:

This conductor shall be designed as per above standards for operation in overhead lines
in air under local ambient conditions. The conductor shall be constructed from hard
drawn Aluminium and Zinc Coated Steel wires where the centre wire or wires are of
Zinc Coated Steel and the outer layer or layers are of Aluminium. The wires shall be
smooth and free from all imperfections not consistent with good commercial practice.
No joint of any kind shall be permitted in the Zinc Coated Steel wires.
In all constructions, the successive layers shall have opposite directions of lay, the
outermost layer being right handed. The lay ratio of any Aluminium layer shall not be
greater than the lay ratio of Aluminum layer immediately beneath it. The lay ratio of
different layers shall be within the limit as per above standards.

The maximum acceptable length of conductor in a drum shall be as stated below and
shall be supplied on standard non-returnable treated wooden drum, each drum having
stenciled on each side : drum number, code name of conductor, drum wound length together
with gross and net weight, the manufacturer's name, the purchaser's name and contract
number with date. The cover of the drum should be of same treated wood.

Drum wound length of each drum may vary up to ± 5% of the total drum length as tolerance.
However, the sum of total drum length shall be as per ordered quantity. Only one short length of
conductor on a drum is considered for acceptance, if necessary. For the other requirements, the
given data shall be considered as minimum and maximum where necessary. No negative
tolerances for the diameter and thickness are acceptable.

ACSR G R O S B E A K
Code name ACSR G R O S B E A K
Installation Overhead
Type Stranded
Material Hard drawn Aluminum steel
reinforced
Density of hard drawn Aluminium wire at 20 2.703 Kg/dm3
°C
Density of Zinc Coated Steel wire at 20 °C 7.80 Kg/dm3
Overall diameter of the conductor 25.15 mm
Nominal cross sectional area of the 374.70 sq. mm
conductor
Number/diameter of Aluminum Strand 26/3.97 mm
Nominal Aluminum cross sectional area 321.68 sq. mm
Number/diameter of Steel Strand 7/3.09 mm
Nominal Steel cross sectional area 53.02 sq. mm
Weight of conductor 1304 Kg/KM
Drum wound length 500 M
Maximum DC Resistance of Conductor at 20 0.0900 /Km
°C
Minimum breaking Load of Conductor 11400 Kg
Lay ratio for Outermost Layer of Aluminum 10-14

336
Lay direction for Outermost Layer of Right hand
Aluminum

337
FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES:

o Conductors shall be delivered on standard non-returnable strong wooden drum.

The central hole of the drum shall be reinforced to fit on axle size 95 mm diameter.
The interior of the conductor drum shall be lined with bituminous paper to
prevent the conductor from being in contact with timber or Aluminum water
proof paper and felt lining shall overlap at seams by at least 20 mm and the
seams shall be sealed.
o Drum shall be adequately protected by securely fastening substantial
wooden battens around the periphery. These battens shall be secured by means
of hoop metal bindings. Conductor drum shall be treated in an approved manner
to resist termite and fungus attacks and shall be suitable for outside storage for
a minimum
period of 3 years in an equatorial climate without undue deterioration.
o There shall be only one length of conductor on a drum.
o Treated wooden drum standard: AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83, C16 –82, P5 –83.

338
7.4 CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURE

339
 CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURE GENERAL PROVISION FOR
AIS SUB-STATION

7.4.1 References

7.4.1.1 General

The design and construction shall conform to the latest edition of the relevant codes and
standards. Any proposed substitution for the listed standards by an equivalent standard
will be subject to approval by the Engineer. Relevant standards include.

7.4.1.2 Design and Construction Standards

BS 12 Portland Cement
BS EN 124 Gully and Manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian
areas
BS 812 Testing Aggregates
BS 882 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
BS 1377 Methods of test for soil for civil Engineering purposes
BS 1722:Part10 Anti-intruder fences
BS 1881 Testing concrete
BS 2853 Design and testing of overhead runway beams
BS 3148 Methods of test for water for making concrete
BS 3921 Clay bricks
BS 4449 Steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 5262 External renderings
BS 5395 Stairs, ladders and walkways
BS 5572 Sanitary pipe works
BS 5628 Code of practice for use of masonry
BS 5930 Code of practice for site investigations
BS 6031 Code of practice for earth works
BS 6367 Code of practice for drainage of roofs and paved areas
BS 6399: Part1 Code of practice for dead and imposed loads
BS 6399: Part 2 Code of practice for wind loads
BS 6465 Sanitary installations
BS 6651 Code of practice for protection of structures against
lightning
BS 6700 Design, installation, testing and maintenance of services
supplying water for domestic use.
BS 8004 Code of practice for foundations
BS 8005 Sewerage
BS 8100 Lattice towers and masts
BS 8102 Code practice of protection of structures against water
the ground structural use of concrete.
BS 8110 Structural use of concrete
340
 BS 820 Lightning of buildings
BS 8215 Code practice for design and installation of damp-proof
courses in masonry
BS 8290 Suspended ceilings
Bs 8301 Code of practice for Building drainage

7.4.1.3 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The engineering & execution of all Civil, Structural & Architectural works
shall be based on the latest edition or revision of the applicable portion of the
following Codes and Specifications. In case any particular aspect of work is
not covered by these Standards, other standard specifications, as may be
specified by the Engineer, shall be followed.

a) The Bureau of British Standard Codes.

b) Bangladesh National Building Code
c) Environmental protection agency
d) American Codes and standards (ASTM, ACI, AASHTO,AASHO)
e) Local Statutory regulations
f) Rules & Regulations of local authorities

The Civil Works shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the
Specifications, relevant Standards and Codes of Practice approved by the
Engineer. Local code of practice shall be followed where not mentioned. The
Contractor shall submit together with his bid a schedule of standards and codes of
practice to be followed in the design and construction of the Works. Copies of these
codes and standards shall be made available to the Engineer during the design and
construction period. In the case of the Standards and Codes not published in
English, the Contractor shall obtain English translations when required and send
them to the Engineer.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the establishment of design parameters to

satisfy the requirement of the project.

Basic design conditions shall be as follows: -

a. Seismic coefficient at Ground

Level (Horizontal) (PGA) : Seismic Zone-1, Zone coefficient, Z=0.12

(as per BNBC, 2015).

b. Design Storm : Based on frequency-intensity Duration

curves prepared for Rajshahi Zone

c. Wind velocity : 177.12 km/hr

d. Design load for road : H-20-S16-44 (AASHO)

e. Standards and codes of practice : ASTM, ACI, BNBC and inter-national

codes of practice and other Standards
to be approved by the Engineer

341
7.4.2 Design

Both Architectural and Structural Design shall be submitted by the contractor to the
employer for approval.

7.4.2.1 Architectural and structural Requirements of Buildings

The details Architectural, Structural & other related drawing and design with Green
Building concept shall be submitted by the contractor to employer for approval.

1. Structure : Modern Architectural designed R.C.C or Steel Framed Structure

featured by

Green Building Technology.

2. Partition Wall :
• For all Exterior wall thickness should be 10 (ten) inches and
interior wall thickness should be 5 (five) inches and to be
used 1st Class Bricks.
• All Brick wall should be plastered both sides as per standard
(Except where Fare-Facing Treatment to be used)
• In case of R.C.C. works 20mm down graded Stone chips
should be used.

3. Covered Area : Minimum required area in Building are included with service areas
& Other

Specific Functions - Control Room, Battery room, Cable Trench,

Store, Office Rooms, walkway, open Space & stair case etc.

4. Foundation : Considering 02 storied building (no Basement) (G+1) with three

storied foundation
• Plinth Level at +3ft above from Ground Level
• Ground Floor clear height 9’-6” ft Cable Trench & Ancillary
Facility
• 1st Floor clear height 13’-6” ft for Control room

5. Floor/Roof Finish :
• To be used 24 inch x 24 inch size European standard Mirror
Polished
Homogeneous tiles for 1st Floor.
• Standard Quality Tiles for walk way or other common space.
6. Toilet/ Sanitary:
• Floor and full height wall of the Toilet should be furnished
by European
Standard Tiles with decorative boarder. Floor tiles should
be non-slippery.
• To be used European Standard Commode, Basin and others
Sanitary Fittings & Fixtures (such as Pillar Cock, Bib Cock,

342
 Push Shower etc.) should be European Standard as well as
approved sample and design.
• To be Constructed 50 users septic tank, inspection pit,
sewerage line, apron, drain etc.
• To be provided water supply system with Deep Tube well &
over head water tank.
7. Electrical Fittings & Fixture :
• Concealed Electrical wiring by
Eastern/BRB/Paradise
Fire Resistant Cable
• European Made MK type Gang switch, socket
MCB etc
• Provision for Internet facilities system, Dish
Line, Telephone & Intercom wiring.
• Sufficient Earthling facilities.
• To be used LED Light
• To be provided sufficient Air Conditioner
• To be provided sufficient Ceiling Fan

8. Interior Wall Finishing : Smooth Finished & soft colored Plastic paint should
be
used over the Plastering work of interior wall and
ceiling.

9. Exterior Wall : Smooth Finished & Architectural approved colored

weather coat
should be used over the Plastering work of
Exterior wall. Some
where should be used Ceramic Facing brick /
Rustic Tiles

10. Window : Window should be made Standard Quality Thai Aluminum

frame and
minimum 5mm thickness glass using U.S (AAMA)
Standard.

11. Door : Door Frame and Shutter should be made by solid wood such
as Burma
Teak, Teak Chambal, Chapalish etc. which shall be
approved by the owner's engineer.

12. Stair Railing : Should be used approved designed SS Railing in the Stair
case.

13. Sign, Signal & Annotation : ● Integrated Design of Different kind of Indicators
like-
Acrylic Sign Board, LED Sign Board, Neon Sign
Board,
Reception Sign Board, Safety Sign, PVC Letters,
Glow

343
 Sign Board, Customized Display Boards, Overhead
Signage, Metal Nameplates, Commercial Sign
Boards,
Outdoor Signs, Electronic Sign Boards etc. should be
provided in the design & construction.

● Digital
LED Signboard with the features of-
Excellent visibility (even in daylight); Good quality at
reasonable
price and light weight; Simple installation, Safe to
touch and
clean; Changing color for attracting attention;
Extremely low
power consumption.

● Should be provided the Accessories like Adaptor

and chains
etc.

14. Approval & Test : The set of plans, designs and specification of a building
submitted to the Authority as per
provision of this Code and duly approved and sanctioned
by the Authority.
Materials & Item (if required) should be tested from any
authorized
Institutions of Bangladesh furnished by the Contractor.

The columns of the ground story shall be extended above roof level to permit starter bars
to be left in place for a future story. An external concrete open staircase shall be provided
up to the roof. The slab shall be a RCC slab designed. The floor slab shall be 5.5 kN/m2 for
control room floor and for live load for all floor as per BNBC-2006. If a future story is not
required, a fixed ladder of galvanized steel shall be provided up to the roof or provide
temporary CI sheet shade over the stair case as per direction of the employer.

The main entrance to all buildings shall be shaded, either by a projection of the roof over
the entrance verandah or by a separate roof at a lower level. This area of roof shall also be
lime terraced and drained by rainwater pipes.

The head of each down pipe shall be fitted with an enlarged hopper and purpose made
cast iron grill set into recess in the roof projection.

Window openings shall be fitted with protruding concrete sunshades above and at the
sides of the openings.
All external walls shall be 250 mm first class brick work also provide 237.5mm x 68.75mm
x 12.5mm (9.5”x2.75”x0.5” ) or any other standard sizes of Mirpur ceramics facing bricks
or similar approved, or rendered Rustic Tiles as required by the architectural plan. The
internal walls shall be generally of 125 mm thick first class brick work. Internal walls shall
all be rendered and receive one sealer coat plus two finishing coats of Plastic emulsion
paint. All brickwork shall be tied into the RCC frame by galvanized ties.
Externally, rendered walls shall receive primer plus two finishing coats of PEP acrylic
external quality paint or similar approved.

344
The height of control rooms shall be provided about 1 (One) meter clearance over the top
of the cabinets to the underside of the false ceiling. In the switch gear rooms, about 1
meter clearance shall be provided over the switch gear to the underside roof slab but the
Contractor shall provide a greater clearance if it is required to remove equipment. The
clearance may be reduced below down stand beams provided no equipment is required to
be removed from the top of the switch gear. All rooms in any building shall be one height.
Control buildings housing switch gear and control equipment shall include a cable
basement to facilitates connection to the equipment. Basements shall be constructed so as
to protect the building sub structure from water in accordance with BS 8102.

15. Fire fitting & Fixture:

Provision for Fire fitting & fixture for Installation of fire equipment, fire detection, fire
protection etc. Control room building should have the standard sized fire exit/scape with
facilities and the fire scape should be designed according to floor area accommodation.

7.4.2.2 Ground conditions, Foundations and Site Investigation

(a) Fill Sites
On fill sites where the depth of fill exceeds 3 meters the contract assumes piled
foundations shall be installed below buildings. If placed foundations are found to be
unnecessary in the final site investigation report, a reduction in contract value shall be
agreed on the basis of schedule rates.

Piles shall be concrete (cast in situ or pre-cast) complying with BS 8004. Where timber
piles are used, adequate strip footings shall be provided to support the building after the
timber piles have deteriorated by which time settlement will be complete.
On every fill site the Contractor shall prove that his switchyard foundation will not suffer
settlement greater than 20 mm by constructing a foundation and load testing this to twice
the design bearing pressure for a minimum of 20 days.
Outdoor equipment shall be provided with spread footings. The Contractor will be
provided by the Employer with a survey of soil levels prior to filling. The Contractor shall
impose the site layout on

the survey to check for uneven depth of fill below any foundation and where uneven depth
of fill exists his foundation proposals shall restrict final differential settlement to a 1 in
400 slopes.
If a fill site has not been exposed to one wet season before foundation work starts, the
Contractor shall flood the site to a depth of 50 mm for 10 days (Not required on hydraulic
fill site). This requirement is because silty sands will generally compact to a denser
condition on first time flooding.
On all fill sites the Contractor shall pipe rainwater from pipes down to paddy level and
shall prevent water pond in open foundations and backfill all foundations as soon as
possible.

The Contractor shall monitor settlement of the fill (by placing concrete posts 50x50x750
mm deep on a 10 meter grid and taking readings) at 30 day intervals from the time he is
given access to each fill site.
When a fill site is handed over to the Contractor, The Contractor shall become responsible
for maintaining the entirely of the fill in good condition, including all batter slopes.

345
(b) Unfilled Sites

Original delta levels are generally 4 meters below road level. Therefore most sites are
historically fill sites but fill settlement can sensibly be considered complete, where fill is
over 3 years old.
(c) Site Investigation
The Contractor may appoint a sub contractor to carry out the site investigations but all
work and all lab work shall be witnessed by one of his own staff who shall countersign all
recorded data.
The site investigations and analysis of the data in a final report giving full details of
foundation proposals shall be completed at each site by the programmed date.
Boreholes shall be taken on a 25 meter grid with at least three additional boreholes beside
each building. Additional boreholes may also be required where uneven fill depth is
encountered. The boreholes shall be located to an accuracy of ±0.5 m and shall be located
to site layout.

Boreholes shall be a minimum of 20 meters depth or twice building footing width,

whichever is greater or as per site condition & decision of the employer. All boreholes
shall be back filled with compacted sand.

In each bore hole the following tests shall be carried out :

Standard penetration tests at 1.5 meter intervals.

Undisturbed samples shall be taken at around 1.5 meters depth and 3 meters depth and
tested by unconfined compression tests.

One dimensional consolidation tests shall be carried out on undisturbed samples taken at
1,5,3 and 4.5 meters depth. The samples shall be saturated and the range of applied
pressure shall fully reflected the in situ conditions. Graphs showing void ratio(e) and
applied pressure shall be submitted along with the coefficient of compressibility for the
range of loading anticipated. Mv shall be in m2/MN and shall be recorded at each stress
increment. The coefficient of consolidation, cv, shall be given in m2/year.

Particle size analysis shall be carried out for each stratum and specified gravity, moisture
content, liquid limit and plastic limit determined.

Ground water level shall be determined by dipping the boreholes. Where collapse of the
boreholes occurs, casing shall be used and left in until the water level remains constant for
two days.

In cohesive soils a vane test to BS 1377 : part 9 shall be carried out at three different
depths. The Contractor shall check the aggressively of soil and ground water at each site to
concrete and take all measures necessary to ensure the long term durability of concrete.

(d) Site Investigation Report

The report shall be submitted by the key date at each site given in the program. The
Contractor shall submit 2 copies of the report to the Engineer. The report shall propose
full details of foundations and loading thereon and shall provide estimates of likely
settlements and differential settlements. The report shall be the work of the Contractor’s
own foundation Engineers.

346
If the Contractor uses a local site investigation contractor, he shall appoint one of his own
staff to oversee the entire operation and each piece of data shall be countersigned by this
person.
The Contractor shall supply, install and test at least one of the types of Pile in accordance
with the approved design and the drawing showing the Piling arrangement. Each Pile shall
be suite existing the sub-strata at the site.

(e) Foundations
The minimum depth of all foundations shall be :

(i) Transformer bases bound 1.5 m

(ii) All other switchyard foundations 1.1 m

(iii) Control building foundations, 1.5 m

including all wall foundations
and internal wall foundations
(iv) Boundary wall foundations 1.1 m

All formations shall be hand rammed or mechanically compacted before placing 70 mm

minimum thickness of Class B concrete blinding, within 24 hours of bottoming excavation,
which blinding shall project 300 mm minimum distance beyond all footings. Each footing
shall be inspected by the Engineer. Where soil condition is poor (on fill sites or already
filled sites) or where the Contractor leaves foundations exposed and soil conditions
deteriorate, one of the following measures shall be carried out as agreed with the engineer.

(i) Blinding depth and projection shall be increased

(ii) Soft soil shall be removed and replaced with compacted viti sand with the
top 200 mm consisting of viti sand and brick chips.

The cost of this work shall be borne by the Contractor.

Between column footings all walls, including all internal wall shall be provided with a
reinforced concrete strip footing of minimum dimension 800 mm wide by 250 mm deep
placed at the same level as column footings and linked structurally to the footings. In
addition column footings shall be tied at foundation level and also floor level by beams to
every adjacent column in both orthogonal directions. These beam shall be designed to
resist 1 in 200 differential settlement without distress and shall be capable of resisting the
earthquake load of Rajshahi region as per BNBC 2015.
The deepest parts of any foundations shall be completed first. All foundations shall be
completed and back filled, including all cable tunnel and cable trench work inside
buildings, before walls are raised above floor levels. All other foundations shall be back
filled within 7 days of completing concerning.
All exposed concrete and outer surfaces of cable trenches and cable tunnels shall receive
two coats of bitumastic paint before back filling to reduce ingress of water. The Concrete
surface shall be ground smooth and all air holes etc. filled (rubbed down with a cement
slurry) before painting.
The Contractor shall monitor settlement of all foundations each month and report this
settlement to the Engineer until settlement has reduced to less than 1.5 mm in 3 months.

347
The tops of all foundations shall terminate 1000mm above site average finished surface
level. All exposed edges shall have 20 mm x 20 mm chamfers.

Excavation shall only be carried out when the ground water table at least 1000mm below
foundation level. The excavation shall be kept dry during the construction period by
providing sumps and pumps as required. During the rain season, shelters shall be erected
over all open excavations.

Any over excavation shall be filled with Class B concrete.

All back fill shall be completed to 95% maximum dry density as defined by BS 1377 test
method. 2.5 Kg rammer.

Before starting foundation work the Contractor shall clear all sites of trees, tree roots
shrubs, debris, surplus soil, and any buildings.

Foundations shall be designed to resist uplift, assuming the water table is at ground level
and the weight of soil resting on a foundation is that included within a 150 frustum.

On fill sites where the depth of fill exceeds 3 meters, the Contractor shall provide piled
foundations in accordance with BS 8004 for control buildings. If timber piles are used,
adequate strip footings shall be provided to support the structure after the timber pile has
deteriorated, by which time the fill will be fully consolidated. One working pile chosen by
the Engineer shall be load tested at each site to 150% of design load in accordance with BS
8004.

7.4.2.3 Drainage

The entire surface within boundary walls shall be of uniform sloping site, sloping at q in
150 minimum slope to open channels around the entire perimeter. These channels shall
be designed for a rainfall intensity of 60 mm per hour. Out side the boundary wall the
contractor shall be responsible for drainage up to 20 meters from the wall and will at
some sites need to construct outlets with suitable erosion protection down to paddy level.

The concrete wall of cable trenches shall project at least 70 mm above brick paving level
to prevent run off entering the cable trench. The floors of all cable trenches /tunnels shall
be sloped to soak ways.

The cable trenches shall be free from surface water drainage. If the cutoff area exceeds 30
m2 it shall be drained by a 200 mm minimum diameter concrete pipe to the boundary
drain. The Contractor’s drainage design shall avoid all pond water to avoid forming a
mosquito breeding ground .
All drainage pipe work within buildings shall be ductile iron, generally of 100 mm
diameter. Floor drains shall be placed in each battery room and toilet.

External Pipe work shall be 150 mm minimum diameter concrete pipes at a minimum
depth of invert of 700 mm. Where pipes, including existing pipes along with site, are less
than 400 mm above adjacent foundations they shall be surrounded in concrete. Where
required, drainage pipes shall be kept below cables, allowing 1.1 m cover to top of pipes.

Manholes shall be of brick construction with 600mm x 600mm clear openings and air tight
ductile iron covers to BS EN 124. Manholes shall be located at each change of direction.
Minimum fall on all pipelines shall be 1 in 80. Manhole shall not be located in roads.
348
The Contractor shall be responsible for all negotiations with local authority WASA where a
connection to a public sewer is proposed. Where high water levels in public sewers may
cause effluent to back up into a site, non return valves shall be fitted. The Contractor shall
provide all protection required to existing sewers and shall deepen foundations, including
boundary wall foundations, where required all foundations are below adjacent sewers.
The Contractor shall draw longitudinal sections of all pipelines.
Each control building shall be provided with a septic tank designed for 50 users and a soak
away of open brick construction 10 m deep by 2.2 m diameter filled with broken bricks.
The septic tank shall be located at least 15 meters from buildings. Other buildings shall
have septic tanks designed for the required number of users. All foul drains shall vented
by a vent pipi to above roof level. The inner surface od all manholes and septic tanks shall
be painted with 2 coats of bitumastic paint to protect it against sulphate attack. The septic
tank shall have access holes directly over the inlet pipes and outlet pipes. Where public
sewers exist alongside a site, the Contractor shall connect directly to the foul sewer,
provided effluent from the sewer is treated.

The Contractor shall construct the drainage first to ensure that at no stage is rainwater
ponded on any part of the site. All rainwater shall be able to run off the site or shall be
immediately pumped off site by the Contractor. The Contractor shall complete all
necessary drains before casting any roof and large concrete area which will create large
run off. The condensate drains for the air conditioning shall also be connected to the
drainage. Two vents of minimum height 2.2 m shall be provided on each septic tank.
If a town’s water supply is unreliable, the roof rain water shall be collected in an
underground tank of standard Employer’s design. Scope of this work shall be agreed at Bid
stage.

7.4.3 Earth Work

7.4.3.1 Scope
This clause covers the performance of all works in connection with the required
excavation for the various type of foundations and equipment, as shown in the drawing, or
any other excavation and banking that may be necessary during the progress of works
including the removal, use or disposal of all excavated materials.
7.4.3.2 Clearing
(1) Clearing shall mean include the remove of trees and shrubs, stumps and other
objectionable matters from the area necessary for the works. The contractor shall
cut and remove them from the project area or turn them as approved by the
Engineer.
(2) By no means shall the contractor fell any trees outside the premise of the
construction site without permission of the parties concerned even if such trees
cause obstacle against smooth execution of the work. Therefore, any such trees
shall be felled upon negotiation with and permission of the possessor.
7.4.3.3 Excavation
(1) Excavation under this section shall consist of the removal, hauling, dumping and
satisfactory disposal of all materials from required excavations.
(2) The excavated slope surface shall be protected against any erosion due to heavy
rains during construction period. Should any damage be caused on any face of
slope, the contractor shall immediately repair any such damage at his expense.

349
(3) Excavation shall be carried out by adopting a suitable excavation for the ground so
as not to loosen the ground outside the excavation. If necessary, temporary
sheeting shall be constructed.
(4) During excavation, work shall be performed carefully so as not to cause any
damage to adjacent structures and buried structures.
(5) If the excavated material is to be temporarily stockpiled, designated spaces shall be
kept from the shoulder of the road while considering the earth pressure at the
excavated surface and the working space. Temporary sheeting or other such
structures, if necessary, shall be constructed so that the stockpile can be protected
from damage or being washed away.
(6) Excavation of road, if any, shall be done in such a manner as not to hamper
vehicular traffic. If excavation is to be performed in the vicinity of residences,
appropriate care shall be taken so as not to hinder the passage of residents.
Spoils, materials and equipment shall be carefully handled.
(7) After completion of excavation, excavated widths and bottoms shall be subject to
inspection by the engineer.

(8) Blasting shall not be employed during excavation.

(9) Any and all excess excavation for the convenience of the contractor or over-
excavation performed by the contractor for any purpose or reason, except may be
ordered in writing by the engineer, and whether or not due to the fault of the
contractor, shall be at the expense of the contractor. All such excess excavation and
other excavation shall be filed at the expense by the contractor with materials
approved by the engineer.
(10) The contractor shall be entitled to request the engineer in writing to change the
excavation line as required according to the soil conditions of the foundation
following the progress of excavation. In such a case, upon excavation up to the laid
excavation line, the contractor shall prepare the detailed design drawing of the
said foundation and submit it to the engineer for his approval.

(11) All objectionable materials such as, oil, mud, rock fragments, loose rock, chips,
mortar, organic matters and stagnant water, shall be removed from the surface of
the foundation.
7.4.3.4 Sheeting

(1) Sheeting shall be of the type that is suitable to the condition of foundation and
Ground water and shall have a safe structure.
(2) If sheet piles on retaining piles are to be driven at the piling location in the vicinity
of buried structures, where they shall be investigated and confirmed by manual
trench excavation etc. prior to piling in order to protect these structures from
being damaged when piles are to be pulled out, carefulness shall be taken into
account to cause no damage to the buried structures.
7.4.3.5 Banking
Foundation of banking shall be treated as follows:
(1) Any material having a harmful effect on banking shall be removed.
(a) Where inflow of ground water is expected, it shall be treated so as not to cause
inundation.

350
 (b) In case of sloped ground with unfavorable conditions, such as unsuitable soil,
poor drainage, etc, a method, such as excavating the ground into steps in
advance in order to increase its stability, shall be planned and reported to the
Engineer.

(2) Unless otherwise specified, settlement allowance shall be 3 per cent of the height
of the banking and the surface shall be graded evenly within =5 cm.
(3) Materials for banking shall not include any harmful materials, such as fertile soil or
pieces so wood.
(4) Materials for banking shall not be of an extremely swelling nature.

(5) Impermeable clay shall not be used for back-filling of a structure which is
susceptible to earth pressure.

(6) Banking shall be formed by spreading soil of less than 50 cm in thickness and by
sufficiently compacting each layer.

(7) The type of compactor shall be one that is suitable or banding materials.

(8) Materials for banking shall be so treated as to have optimum water content in
percent of dry weight.

(9) Rocks shall be spread out evenly so as not to form any void space.

(10) Temporary facilities shall not be buried in banking. If it becomes inevitable to do so,
it shall be reported to the engineer and shall be approved by the engineer, upon
which appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent any unfavorable effect on
the banking.

(11) As a standard, extent of satisfactory compaction shall be as follows :

K75 =1.5 Kg./cm3 or more

Where : K 75 is a coefficient of bearing capacity determined by the plate

load test.

When required by the engineer, the contractor shall perform in-sity tests
and penetration test to confirm the extent of compaction and the result shall be
submitted to the engineer.

(12) Any banking work on rainy day shall be carried to upon approval of the Engineer.

7.4.3.6 Back-Filling

(1) Back filling shall be executed as construction proceeds along with the removal of
shoring and other materials at the back filling site.

When sheeting is to be left and buried in order to prevent shear failure of

soil or due to some other inevitable reasons, it shall be done so according to the
direction of the engineer.

351
(2) Except those which are specified in the specifications or the drawings, all the
materials for back filling shall be in accordance with the clauses of “Banking” 2.5 of
these specifications.
(3) If the inflow of water exists at the site of back filling it shall be appropriately
treated.

(4) In back filling, the layer of spreading shall be around 50cm or less per lift, and it
shall be graded as horizontally as possible, and shall be sufficiently compacted by
hydraulic filling or by use of an appropriate compactor such as a rammer.
(5) Extent of compaction shall be such that it will prevent future settlement and such
that the designated bearing capacity can be obtained. If necessary, the extent of
compaction shall be measured by a cone penetrometer etc. and the record shall be
submitted to the engineer.

(6) If there is any surface or buried structure owned by the public or the third party at
the site of back filling, care shall be taken so as to cause no harmful effect to them,
and the execution of the work shall be carried out following direction by the
engineer and in the presence of relevant administrators.

(7) For back filling adjacent to a structure, compaction and back filling shall be carried
out in such a manner that will prevent damage to the structure.

No stones or the like shall be used for back filling.

7.4.3.7 Disposal of Excavated Materials

(1) Spoils produced by excavation shall be piled, graded, sloped or disposed of at the
locations specified by the Board or Engineer and it shall be subject to inspection by
the engineer.

Spoil, whose disposal areas are not specified by the engineer, shall be
disposed of by the contractor at his responsibility.

(2) In transporting the spoils, care shall be taken so as to neither hamper traffic nor
cause trouble to the third party by scattering the spoil over the road.

7.4.3.8 Gravel Layer

(1) Gravel and rubble produced locally shall be used. Gravel layer shall, in principle, be
laid in a single layer with no large gaps, stand on end and interstices shall be filled with
granular gravel.

(2) The compaction shall be executed by a compaction machine (rammers, etc.)

(3) Gravel layer shall be well compacted together with covering gravel and shall be graded
and finished to the designated level.

7.4.4 Piling
7.4.4.1 Pile Driving

(1) Piles shall be driven by a pile driver, suitable for the type and size of the piles,
geological conditions and construction environment, and in such a manner as to cause
no public nuisance, such as noise, to the third party.

352
(2) The method for construction joint of piles shall be submitted in writing to the engineer
and shall be subject for approval by the engineer.

(3) Records shall be kept during the poling operation and these shall be submitted to the
engineer.

(4) Piles shall be driven vertically and at the exact locations indicated in the drawings, and
pile driving shall be continuous without interruption to avoid deviation of pile head.

(5) Caps and other suitable materials shall be used as a cushion to protect the head of piles.

(6) Toward the end of driving the amount of penetration shall be measured for each pole
as directed by the engineer.

(7) Should it be difficult to drive any pile up to the specified depth, the contractor shall
carry out such pilling work in accordance with the instructions of the engineer.

(8) Method and equipment of pile driving to be employed for construction works shall be
subject to approval of the engineer prior to execution.

(9) When driving a group of piles, driving shall begin from the center and gradually moved
outward.
(10) When eccentric error exceeds the allowable values shown in the table below or when a
pile is damaged or creaked during piling operation, it shall be reported to the engineer,
and the pile shall be replaced or an additional pile shall be driven.
Type of Foundation Allowance Remarks

All foundations 10 cm or less

(11) Upon completion of piling, any void portions inside piles shall be filled back with soil
obtained from at site excavation.

7.4.4.2 Field Joining of Piles

(1) Field joining of piles shall be carried out by arc welding.

(2) Welders shall have not less than 6 months continuous experience in welding of pile,
and shall be qualified by JIS Z-3801, “Standard Qualification Procedures for
welding Technique”, or equivalent BDS.

(3) Are welding rods shall be standard items specified in IETC (International Electro
technical Commission) or equivqlent “Covered Electrodes for Mild Steel”, or
equivalent.
Welding rods shall be completely dry prior to use.

(4) The welding surface of parent metal shall be carefully cleaned of slag, moisture,
dust, rust, oil, paint or other foreign matter.

(5) The root face of steel pipe pile shall be 2mm,

(6) Welding shall be performed carefully by selecting welding current and welding
speed which ensure complete penetration of welding rood to avoid cracks in any
portion of the weld.

353
(7) Welding shall not be performed when the parent metal is wet from rainfall or
when strong winds are blowing. However, when the portion to be welded in
suitable protected, welding may be performed upon approval of the engineer.

(8) If harmful defects or cracks have been found in the weld, the deposited metal shall
be carefully chipped off and the affected part shall be re-welded and then inspected
by the engineer.
7.4.4.3 Treatment of Pile head

(1) The head of the piles shall be cut to the designated level and shall be embedded
into the footing.

(2) The steel pipe piles shall be anchored into the footing by a method specified
otherwise.
7.4.4.4 Transportation and Handling
Care shall be taken in transportation ad handling of pole so as to prevent damage to them.
If the pile is damaged or deformed to the extent that it is impractical for the intended use,
the contractor shall repair it prior to driving, and it shall be inspected and approved by the
engineer.
7.4.5 Reinforced Concrete Work
7.4.5.1 General
(1) This clause covers the performance of all reinforced of all reinforced concrete work
for permanent structures in accordance with the drawings and these specifications.

(2) The contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment for the performance of
concrete work.

(3) Reinforced concrete work and plain concrete work shall comply with ACI
(American Concrete Institute), BNBC (Bangladesh National Building Code) or
equivalent standard.

(4) Covering

(a) The covering shall be at least one diameter of the reinforcement.

(b) In general, the covering shall be at least those shown in Table-1.

Table-1 : Minimum Covering (mm)

Conditions Slabs Beams Columns

When not directly exposed to rain or wind 20 40 40
Large and important structure, or when 25 40 65
exposed to Rain or wind
When effective coating is not applied on the
portion Which may be subjected to
injurious chemical reaction
Due to smoke, acid, oil, salts, etc. 37.5 50 75
(c) In case of footings and important members of a structure it is recommended
that the covering be at lest 7.5 cm when concrete is placed directly facing the
ground, and at least 5 cm for bars with diameter of more than 16cm and 4 cm
for bars with the diameter of less than 16 mm when the concrete is buried
and directly facing the ground or when it is subjected to severe weather

354
 conditions. However, the covering at the bottom side of slabs may be at least
2.5cm even if the portion of it is subjected to extreme weather condition.
(d) The covering in structures which are required to be especially fire-proof shall
be determined based on the temperature of the fire, duration, characteristics
of aggregate to be used, etc.
7.4.5.2 Quality of Concrete
(1) General
Concrete shall have the uniform quality with the required strength, durability, water
tightness etc.
(2) Strength
(a) The strength of concrete shall generally be based on 28 days compressive
strength.
(b) Compression tests for concrete shall be performed in accordance with ACI,
BNBC or equivalent standard.
7.4.5.3 Materials

Materials used for the construction of buildings shall conform to standard

specifications listed in this part of the Code. Any deviation from the type design or
architectural detail from those specified in these standards may be accepted by the
Building Official as long as the materials standards specified therein are conformed
with.
7.4.5.3.1 Cement
Cement for shall be Ordinary Portland Cement complies with the standards listed as
follows: BDS 232: 1974, Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid Hardening) or
ASTM C150, Portland Cement; ASTM C91, Masonry Cement; ASTM C595, Blended
Hydraulic Cements.
Cement for other than masonry shall conform to the following standards: BDS 232,
Portland Cement (Ordinary and Rapid Hardening); BDS 612, Sulphate Resisting
Portland Cement-Type A; ASTM C150, Portland Cement; ASTM C 595, Blended
Hydraulic Cements; and to other such cements listed in ACI 318.
7.4.5.3.2 Water
(1) Water shall be free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, salts, organic materials or
other materials that may be deterious to concrete.
(2) Sea water shall not be used in mixing concrete for reinforced concrete.

7.4.5.3.3 Fine Aggregate

(1) General
Fine aggregate shall be clean, strong, hard, durable, suitably graded and
free from injurious amounts of dust, mud, organic impurities, salts etc.

Beach sand shall not used for concrete.

(2) Grading
Fine aggregate shall consist of large and small particles suitably mixed, and
its grading shall, as a standard, be within the range shown in table 2.

355
 Table-2 : Standard Grading of Fine Aggregate

Nominal Size of Weight percentage of Nominal size Weight percentage of

Sieve (mm) those passing a sieve of sieve (mm) those passion a sieve
10 100 0.6 25 – 65
5 90 – 100 0.3 10 – 35
2.5 80 – 100 0.15 2 – 10
1.2 50 – 90

Sieve analysis shall be in accordance with JIS A 1102, or equivalent BD standard.

7.4.5.4 Coarse Aggregate

(1) General

Coarse aggregate shall clear, strong, hard, durable, suitably graded and free from
injurious amount of flakes, elongated pieces, organic impurities, salts etc.
(2) Grading
Coarse aggregate shall consist of large and small particles suitably mixed, and its
grading shall be within the range shown in Table 3 as a standard.

Sieve analysis shall be performed in accordance with JIS A 1102, or equivalent BD

standard.

Table-3 : Standard Grading of Coarse Aggregate

SS (mm) Weight percentage of those passing a sieve

SA (mm) 50 40 30 25 20 15 10 5 2.5
95 40 10 0
40 100
100 65 30 5
95 30 0 0
25 100
100 70 10 5
SS : Nominal Size of Sieve
SA : Size of Aggregate

7.4.5.5 Reinforcement

Reinforcement in masonry shall conform to the standards listed as follows: ASTM

A82, Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement; ASTM A615M, Deformed
and Plain Billet Steel Bars; ASTM A616M, Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars;
ASTM A617M, Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars; ASTM A706M, Low-Alloy Steel
Deformed Bars; ASTM A767M, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars; and ASTM
A775M, Epoxy - Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.

7.4.5.6 Crushed Stones

Crushed Stone to be used as coarse aggregate shall conform to the following

standards:

356
 BDS 243 : 1963, Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete;
ASTM C33, Concrete Aggregates; ASTM C330, Lightweight Aggregates for
Structural Concrete; ASTM C637, Aggregates for Radiation-Shielding Concrete;
ASTM C332 , Lightweight Aggregate for Insulating Concrete; IS: 9142 Artificial
Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units.
7.4.5.7 Admixture

Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior approval by the

Building Official and shall comply with Sec. 2.4.5.1 through 2.4.5.5.
• Chloride : Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride from
admixture ingredients shall not be used in prestressed concrete, concrete
containing embedded aluminum in concrete cast against permanent
galvanized metal forms, or in concrete exposed to severe or very severe
sulphate-containing solutions (see Sec 5.5.2.1 of Part 6).
• Standards : Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM C260.
Water-reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures,
water-reducing and retarding admixtures, and water-reducing and
accelerating admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494, Chemical Admixtures
for Concrete, or ASTM C1017, Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing
Flowing Concrete.
• Pozzolanas : Fly ash (Pulverized Fuel Ash) or other pozzolans used as
admixtures shall conform to ASTM C618.
• Blast Furnace Slag : Ground granulated blast-furnace slag used as an
admixture shall conform to ASTM C989.
• Pigment for Coloured Concrete : Pigment for integrally coloured concrete
shall conform to ASTM C979.
7.4.6 Storage of Materials
7.4.6.1 Storage of Cement
(1) Cement shall be stored separately for each type in either silos or damp-proof
warehouses.
(2) Silos to store cement shall be built or equipped with suitable means so that cement
will not be retained at the bottom without being conveyed out.
In case of sacked cement, it shall be stacked on the floor rising at least 30
cm from the surface or the ground, and shall be stored in such a manner as to
facilitate conveyance and inspection. Height of each stack shall be at most 13 sacks.
(3) Any portion of Cement which has hardened during its storage shall not be used at
all. Cement stored for long period shall be tested for its quality prior to its use.

(4) Cement with excessively high temperature shall be used only after lowering the
temperature.

7.4.6.2 Storage of Aggregate

(1) Fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and other aggregate of different type and grading
shall be separately stored between each.

(2) When receiving, storing and handling aggregate, facilities shall be well maintained,
and handling shall be carefully performed so that no segregation of large particles

357
 from small ones may occur, no foreign materials may become mixed, or in case of
coarse aggregate, no particles may be crushed.
(3) Storage facility of aggregate shall be equipped with a suitable drainage system, and
shall have a suitable capacity so that the aggregate with uniform surface water may
be used and the aggregate received may be used after being tested.
(4) In hot weather, aggregate shall be stored in a place with a facility to avoid direct
exposure to the sun etc. so that extreme drying or temperature rise in the
aggregate does not occur.
7.4.6.3 Storage of Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall not be directly placed on the ground, and it shall be stored in a
warehouse or a place with suitable cover.

7.4.6.4 Storage of Admixture

(1) Admixture shall be stored so as to be free from dusts and other impurities.
Admixture in power form shall be stored in such a manner that absorption of
water and hardening are prevented, and admixture in liquid form shall be stored in
such a manner that segregation and change in quality are prevented.

(2) Admixture materials shall be carefully handled so as not to be scattered.

(3) Admixture material shall be stored in silos or warehouses which are desirably
damp-proof and shall be used in the same order as they are received.

(4) Admixture stored for a long period of found to have changed shall be tested prior
to its use. Should it be found in the test that the admixture does not possess the
required characteristics, its use shall not be allowed.

7.4.7 Testing of Materials

(1) The all materials (cement, water, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, reinforcement,
admixture, etc.) to be used shall be approved by the engineer after the contractor
submits the results of tests.

(2) The testing method shall comply with the various codes of ASTM, ACI, BNBC or
equivalent standard.

7.4.8 Mix Proportions

7.4.8.1 General

(1) Mix proportion for concrete shall be determined in such a manner that the unit
quantity of water is minimized while the required strength, durability, water
tightness and the workability suitable for the work are secured.
(2) Mix proportion for concrete and results of test mixing shall be determined so as to
provide the required strength, workability, uniformity and durability. The scheme
of mix proportion shall be submitted to the engineer for approval, The attached
form of submission shall be used. The design strengths of the concrete shall be the
classes indicated below.

4 Fc = 210 kg/cm2 For Architecture and

Switchyard
4 Fc = 180 kg/cm2 For Transmission
358
 4 Fc = 120 kg/ cm2 For leveling Concrete

Where 4 Fc means concrete compressive strength at the age of 28 days.

Basic design date for mixing are indicated in the table herein.

Table – 4 : Basic Mix Data

Class Design Maximum size Slump Air

strength 4Fc of (cm) entertainment
(kg/cm2) aggregate(mm) (%)
E 210 25 10 – 15 4 1 Architecture
Switchyard
B 180 40 10 – 15 4 1 Transmission
C 120 40 10 – 15 4 1 Leveling Concrete

Note :
1. Specific gravity in design
Cement – 3.15, Fine Aggregate – 2.62, COARSE Aggregate and Crushed Stones –
2.62

2. Relationship between C/W (Cement water ratio) and maximum compressive

strength at 28 days.
ø 28 = 210 + 215 C/W
Concrete Mix Design Report

Quantity (per mixed 1 m3) (kg/m3)

Maximu Slum Air Maximu Sand Water Cement Fi Coarse Admixture
m size or entrain
p m percen W C aggreg
n s
aggregat -ment water/ -tage eate
e (%) cement S/a
(mm) W/c (%) (%) S
mm- mm-mm
mm

7.4.9 Batching and Mixing

7.4.9.1 Batching

(1) General

Each material to be used in concrete is obtained.

(2) Batching Equipment

(a) Batching method and batching equipment for each material shall be subject
to the approval of the engineer in advance.

359
 (b) Batching equipment for each material shall be inspected and adjusted, if
necessary, prior to the commencement of the construction work and
periodically during the construction.
(3) Batching of materials

(a) Batching shall be made in accordance with the job mix. Test for surface water
of the aggregate shall be in accordance with ASTM or equivalent or as
directed by the engineer. Test for the quantity of the effective absorption of
water, in case of dried effective absorption of water, shall be as directed by
the engineer.

(b) Volume of one batch shall be determined as directed by the engineer.

(c) Each material shall be batched by weight for each batch except the water and
the solution of admixture, which may be measured by volume.

(d) Error in the measurement in each batch shall be at most the values given in
Table 5.

Table-5 : Allowable Error in Measurements

Type of Materials Permissible Error (%)

Water 1
Cement &Admixture Material 2
Aggregate 3
Solution of Admixture Agent 3

7.4.9.2 Mixing
All concrete shall be mixed thoroughly until there is a uniform distribution of
materials and shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged.
Ready mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the
requirements of "Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C94) or
"Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing"
(ASTM C685).
Job mixed concrete shall be mixed in accordance with the following:
a) Mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type.
b) Mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer.
c) Mixing shall be continued for at least 90 seconds after all materials are in the
drum, unless a shorter time is shown to be satisfactory by the mixing
uniformity tests of "Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C94).
d) Materials handling, batching, and mixing shall conform to the applicable
provisions of "Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C94).
e) A detailed record shall be kept to identify:
i) number of batches produced;
ii) proportions of materials used;
iii) approximate location of final deposit in structure;
iv) time and date of mixing and placing.
(1) General
Materials for concrete shall be thoroughly mixed until the mixed concrete becomes
uniform in quality.

360
(2) Mixers

(a) Mixers shall be either tilting batch mixers or forced batch mixers.

(b) Any concrete mixers to be used under this project shall be subject to approval
of the engineer.

(c) Mixers shall be such that they will not cause any separation of materials at
the time of discharging.
(3) Mixing

(a) When charging a mixer, all the materials shall be charged uniformly and
simultaneously in principle.

(b) Mixing time shall, in principle, be determined based on tests. As a standard, it

shall be at least 1 minute and 30 seconds for tilting type misers and 1 minute
for forced mixers.

(c) Mixing shall not be continued for more than three times the specified mixing
time.

(d) Materials for new batch shall not be charged into the mixer until all the
concrete in the mixer is discharged.

(e) Mixers shall be thoroughly cleaned before and after their use.

(f) Concrete left as mixed and commenced setting shall not be used after re-
tempering.

7.4.10 Conveying and Placing

(1) Prior to the commencement of the construction work, a plan of conveying and
placing shall be made and this shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.

(2) Concrete shall be conveyed by methods which will minimize separation and loss of
materials, shall be placed immediately and then shall be thoroughly compacted.
Even when it is impossible to place the concrete immediately due to some special
reasons, the time between mixing and the completion of placing shall not exceed
45 minutes.
During the waiting period, the concrete shall be protected against direct
exposure to the sun, wind and rain, and the concrete left for a relatively long time
shall be re-mixed without adding my water. No portion of concrete which has
started to harden shall be used.

(3) When extreme separation is observed in concrete during its delivery or placement,
it shall be made uniform in quality by re-mixing.

7.4.10.1 Conveying

(1) Conveying

361
 Equipment to be used in conveying concrete shall be those which can easily
deposit. Should the delivery distance be long, they shall be equipped with such
facility as an agitator.

(2) Buckets

Structure of buckets shall be such that they will not cause any separation of
materials when charging or discharging concrete and that the concrete can be
easily and swiftly deposited from them.

(3) Belt Conveyors

Should belt conveyors be used, they shall be suitably located so that they
will be suitably located so that they will not impair the quality of the concrete and
the end of the line shall be provided with baffle plates and an elephant trunk so
that the separation of materials can be prevented.

(4) Buggies and Trolleys

Should buggies or trolleys be used, a level runway or path shall be

constructed so that separation of materials will not occur in conveying concrete.

(5) Chutes

(a) Should any chute be used, it shall be a drop chute in principle. The drop chute
shall be connected to an elephant trunk so that the separation of materials is
minimized.

(b) Open chutes may be used, only when approved by the Engineer. Each open
chute shall be inclined at uniform angle all along its length, and the slope shall
be such that it will not cause any separation of materials of the concrete to be
placed. The distance between the bottom end of the chute and the surface on
which concrete is to be deposited shall be at most 1.5m. the discharging end
shall be equipped with a suitable elephant trunk.

7.4.10.2 Placing

(1) Preparation

(a) Prior to the placement, the arrangement of reinforcement, forms etc. shall
be approved by the engineer.

(b) Prior to the commencement of the placement, it shall be certified that

conveying equipment and placing equipment are in conformance to the
plan of placing specified in Clause-______

(c) Prior to the placement, conveying equipment, placing equipment and the
inside of forms shall be thoroughly cleaned to prevent foreign materials
from being mixed into the concrete. Portions expected to face concrete and
to absorb water shall be moistened in advance.

362
 (d) Water in pits and sumps shall be removed prior to the placement of the
concrete. Suitable protective measures shall be taken so that water running
into these pits and sumps will not wash the concrete just placed.

(2) Placing

(a) Concrete shall be placed in accordance with the plan of placing specified in
Clause-_____should it be inevitable to change the placing method, it shall be
so done as directed by the Engineer.

(b) When concerning is done in hot weather, special attention shall be given to
the materials, placement, curing etc.

(c) Portions such as the ground and foundations which may absorb the water
in concrete shall be thoroughly wetted prior to the placement of concrete.

(d) Temperature in concrete at the time of placing shall be at most 35o C.

(e) Conveying equipment for concrete shall be such that they will protect
concrete from being dried or heated.

(f) Concrete shall be protected as soon as the placement is completed or

interrupted. Special care shall be exercised to keep the surface of the
concrete moist.

(g) During the concerning operation, attention shall be paid not to disturb the
arrangement of the reinforcement.

(h) Concrete shall be embedded into concrete with abundant mortar. Should
any notable separation of materials be observed during concerning, the
concrete shall be remised to obtain the uniform quality and necessary
measures to prevent separation shall be taken before the placing operation
is resumed.

(i) Concrete for one section shall be placed continuously until it is completed.

(j) Concrete shall, in principle, be placed in such a manner that the surface of
the placed concrete will be horizontal within the section. One lift in
placement shall be at most 40 cm, in principle.

(k) Should concrete be placed in layers, each succeeding layer shall be placed
while the one below it is still plastic. Should it become necessary to place
concrete on top of a layer which has started setting, it shall be done in
accordance with Clause 4.10.

(l) When height of the form work is great, it shall be provided with openings
for concrete placing, or the placement shall be done using from chutes in
order to prevent the concrete from being segregated or from adhering to
the reinforcement or to the forms above the layer to be placed.

(m) The height of the end of buckets and hoppers shall be at most 1.5 m above
the level of placement.
363
 (n) Should there by any water coming out and accumulated during the
placement, the concrete shall not be placed further until the water is
removed by a suitable means.

(o) When concerning high structures such as walls and columns continuously,
the consistency of the concrete and the rate of lifting shall be controlled in
such a manner that separation of materials during the placement and the
compaction is minimized.

7.4.11 Compaction

(1) In principle, internal vibrators shall be used to compact the concrete. When it is
difficult to use internal vibrators in the case of thin walls, form vibration shall be
used.

(2) Vibrators to be used shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.

(3) Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted immediately after placement and shall be
thoroughly worked around the reinforcement and into the corners of the form.
Where conditions take compaction difficult, batches of mortar containing the same
proportions of cement, sand and water as used in the concrete shall first be
deposited to certify the compaction.

(4) When compaction is achieved by vibrators, it shall be inserted into the layer below
the one just placed by about 10cm. The vibrators shall be pulled out very slowly so
that no hole will form in the concrete.

(5) When concerning is to be compacted by internal vibrators, the spacing and the
time of their application shall be as directed by the engineer.

7.4.12 Additional Placing

Should additional placing be made on top of a layer which has already started to harden, it
shall be thoroughly and carefully worked on as directed by the engineer so that the top
and the lower layer becomes monolithic.

(1) Wet Curing.

(a) Concrete, after being placed, shall be sufficiently cured without being
subjected to injurious effects caused by low temperature, drying, sudden
change in temperature, etc.

The contractor shall report the said method to the engineer and obtain his
approval.

(b) Concrete shall be protected from vibrations, impacts and loads while it is
hardening.

(2) Wet Curing

(a) Concrete being placed and compacted shall be protected from the sun, wind,
showers etc.
364
 (b) Any exposed surface of concrete which has hardened to a degree that works
can be done without impairing it shall be either covered with wet mats,
canvas, sand etc. or directly watered, and shall be kept moistened continually
for at least 5 days after the placement in case ordinary Portland cement is
used.

(c) When sheathing boards are expected to become dry, they shall be watered.

7.4.13 Joints

(1) General

(a) Location and structure of joints as shown and specified in the drawings shall
be observed.

(b) Should any joint not specified in the design be made, its location, direction
and method of construction shall be determined in the plan of construction so
that it will not impair the strength and the appearance of the structure, and
this shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.

(2) Construction Joints

(a) Construction joints shall be located where the shear acting there is as small
as possible, and with their face in perpendicular, in principle, to the direction
of compression in the member.

(b) Should it be unavoidable to make a construction joint at a location where

large shear is action, it shall be reinforced by forming tenors or grooves, or
embedding suitable steel.

(3) Construction of Horizontal Construction Joints

(a) Sided of the surface of a horizontal construction joint intersecting the forms
shall be kept as horizontal and straight as possible.

(b) When new concrete is placed, the surface of the old concrete shall be
removed of all laitance, interior concrete, loosened aggregate, etc. and shall
be thoroughly wetted.

(c) Prior to the placement of new concrete, the forms shall be tightened, and
either cement paste or mortar with the same mix proportions as in concrete
shall be applied on the surface of the old concrete.

The concrete shall then be placed immediately and shall be compacted so

that is will be in tight contact with the old concrete.

(4) Construction method for Vertical Construction Joints

(a) When a vertical construction joint is to be made, the forms at the joint shall
be rigidly supported, and the concrete in the vicinity of the point shall be
thoroughly compacted by vibrators.

365
 (b) Fresh concrete shall be placed after the surface of the aged concrete at the
joint is removed of the surface film or is roughened and thoroughly wetted,
followed by the application of cement paste or mortar, or after the surface is
treated as directed by the engineer.

(c) Fresh concrete shall be thoroughly compacted at the time of placement so

that the fresh and the aged concrete is in tight contact with each other.
It is recommended that the new concrete be compacted again after a
suitable delay by applying vibration.

7.4.14 Reinforcement Works

7.4.14.1 Processing of Reinforcement

(1) Reinforcement shall be processed to the shape and the dimension as shown in the
drawings by a method which will not impair the quality of the material.

(2) Reinforcement shall be processed in ordinary temperature. When it is unavoidable

to heat for processing, the whole process shall be subject to the approval of the
engineer.

7.4.14.2 Fabrication of Reinforcement

(1) Prior to fabrication, reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned and free from loose
rust and any other material which may impair the bond between the reinforcement
and the concrete.

(2) Reinforcement shall be placed to the designated position, and shall firmly be
fabricated so that it will not be dislocated ruining the placement of concrete.
Erection bars, if required, shall be used for this purpose.

Important crossings of reinforcement shall be fastened by either annealed

wire of at least 0.9mm in diameter.

(3) Clearance between reinforcement and sheathing board shall be maintained

correctly by use of spacers.

(4) Reinforcement shall be always inspected by the engineer after the completion of
fabrication.

7.4.14.3 Joints of Reinforcement

(1) Lap joints of reinforcement shall be made by lapping the required lengths and
fastening them together at several points with annealed wire of at least 0.9mm in
diameter.

(2) Reinforcement projecting form the structure and exposed for future jointing shall
be protected from damage, corrosion, etc.

7.4.15 Forms and Timbering

366
Forms and timbering shall be so designed and constructed as to have the required
strength and rigidity, to secure correct position, shape and dimension of the structure and
to secure the satisfactory quality in concrete.

7.4.15.1 Materials

Materials to be used for the form and the timbering shall be selected based on the strength,
rigidity, durability workability, effect on the concrete to be placed.

7.4.15.2 Design of Forms

(1) Forms shall be those which can easily be fabricated and stripped; joints of
sheathing boards and panels shall be forced in parallel with or perpendicular to the
axis of the member so that it will have a structure which is tight against mortar.

(2) The structure of form shall be such that the corners of concrete can be moulded
even when it is not particularly specified.

(3) Temporary openings, if necessary, shall be made at suitable locations to facilitate

cleaning and inspection of the forms and the placing of concrete.
7.4.15.3 Design of Timbering
(1) Suitable types of timbering shall be selected and the load carried by them shall be
correctly transferred to the foundation by appropriate means.
(2) As for the timbering for important structures, design drawings shall be prepared
by they shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.
7.4.15.4 Construction of Forms
Stripping agents shall be applied on the inside of the sheathing board.

7.4.15.5 Construction of Timbering

(1) Timbering shall be constructed so as to have sufficient strength and stability.

(2) An amount of the settlement of the form words due to the weight of the placed
concrete shall be estimated and a chamber shall be introduced, if necessary, in the
shoring.

7.4.15.6 Inspection of Forms and Timbering

(1) Forms and timbering shall be inspected by the Engineer prior to the placement of
contents.
(2) Condition of forms and timbering shall be inspected during the placement of
concrete.

7.4.5.7 Removal of Forms and Timbering

(1) Forms and timbering shall not be removed until the concrete reaches a strength
required to carry the concrete weight and the load applied during the construction
work.

367
(2) Time and sequence of the removal of the removal of the forms and timbering shall
be subject to the approval of the engineer.

7.4.15.8 Loading on a Structure Immediately After Removal of Forms and

Timbering

Loading on a structure immediately after the removal of the forms and timbering shall be
subject to the approval of the engineer.

7.4.16 Finishing

7.4.16.1 General

When the uniform appearance should be obtained on the exposed surface, special
attention shall be given to place the concrete for the predetermined section continuously
without changing the materials, proportions and the method of the placement.

7.4.16.2 Surface Not Facing Sheeting Boards

(1) Surface of the concrete compacted and approximately leveled to the required level
and shape shall not be finished until the water coming out ceases or is removed.

(2) Cracks formed after finishing but before hardening shall be removed by tamping or
re-finishing.

7.4.6.3 Surface Facing Sheathing Boards

(1) Concrete which will be exposed shall be placed and compacted in such a manner
that the surface solely composed of mortar will be secured.

(2) Projections and lines formed on the surface of concrete shall be removed to ensure
surface flatness. Honeycombs and chipped places shall be removed and the surface
and the surface shall be moistened and patched with appropriately proportioned
concrete or mortar to be finished flat.

(3) Cracks formed after the removal of the forms due temperature stress, drying
shrinkage, etc. shall be repaired as directed by the Engineer.
7.4.17 Quality Control and Inspection

7.4.17.1 General

Materials of concrete, reinforcement, equipment’s and workmanship shall be controlled

produce reinforced concrete of the required quality economically.

7.4.17.2 Tests of Concrete

(1) During construction, the following tests shall be carried out as directed by the
Engineer.
(2) Air test
(3) Compression test of concrete.
(4) Others

368
7.4.17.3 Inspection of Forms and Timbering

(1) Forms and timbering shall be inspected by the Engineer Prior to the placement of
contents.

(2) Condition of forms and timbering shall be inspected during the placement of
concrete.

7.4.17.5 Removal of Forms Timbering

(1) Forms and timbering shall not be removed until the concrete reaches a strength
required to carry the concrete weight and the load applied during the construction
work.
(2) Time and sequence of the removal of the forms and timbering shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer.

7.4.17.5 Loading on All Structure Immediately after Removal of Forms and

Timbering
Loading on a structure immediately after the removal of the forms and timbering
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
7.4.18 Finishing
7.4.18.1 General

When the uniform appearance should be obtained on the exposed surface, special
attention shall be govern to place the concrete for the predetermined section continuously
without changing the materials, proportions and method of the placement.

7.4.18.2 Surface Not Facing Sheathing Boards

(1) Surface of the concrete completed and approximately leveled to the required level
and shaper shall not be finished until the water coming out ceases or is removed.

(2) In order to determine the suitability of the curing method and the time to remove
the forms, and in order to certify the safety for early loading, strength tests shall be
preformed on specimens cured under the conditions as similar as possible to those
of the concrete at the site.

Should the result of the test indicate that the obtained strength of the
specimen is much smaller than that of the specimens cured under the control
condition, the method of curing at the site shall be changed as directed by the
Engineer.

(3) For Compression test of concrete, six (6) test specimens shall be required for each
concrete. Three (3) specimens shall be tested for seven (7) or fourteen (14) days
strength, the remained three(3) specimens shall be tested for twenty- eight (28)
days strength.

The expense for the above tests shall be included is the unit prices.

(4) Should it become necessary after the completion of the work, non- destructive test
of concrete or tests on concrete specimens cut from the structure shall be carried
out.

369
7.4.18.3 Test of Reinforcement Bars

In the case where there is no test certificate of reinforcement bars (mill sheet) or
incase the Engineer deems necessary, the contractor shall carry out the characteristics test
of reinforcement bars and obtain an approval of the Engineer.

7.4.18.4 Test Method

Test method shall conform the those specified in ASTM, ACI, BNBC or equivalent,
unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.

7.4.18.5 Report
The result of the tests shall be reported to the Engineer without delay.

7.4.18.6 Control of Concrete by Compressive Strength

(1) Control of concrete by compressive strength shall generally be based on 28 days

compressive strength. Specimens, in this case, shall be taken in such a manner that
they will represent the concrete of the structure.

(2) Test results of compressive strength to be used for the control of concrete shall
generally be obtained by averaging the compressive strength specimens taken
from the same batch.

(3) Should the quality of concrete be controlled by the test results, it shall be use the
control test.

7.4.18.7 Inspection of Quality of Concrete

(1) The contractor shall submit to the Engineer the results of Inspection of Quality of
concrete obtained according to the quality control test in the preceding Paragraph
8.16.6 and obtain and approval of the Engineer.

(2) Should it be found in the inspection that the quality of the concrete is not suitable,
remedial measures such as modifying the mix proportions, performance tests of
equipment’s and facilities, improvement of the working method, etc. shall be taken.
The concrete placed in the structure shall be checked if it can perform the
designated function and the suitable measures, should it become necessary as
directed by the Engineer.

7.4.19 Inspection of Structures

Structures shall be inspected after their completion as directed by the engineer.

• Brick Masonry Work

Prior to commencing the brick masonry work, the surface of brick shall thoroughly be
cleaned and sufficiently moistened in order to ensure smooth adherence of mortar to the
brick surface.

370
7.4.20 Road Work

The Construction work of roads shall be carried out in accordance with the
Drawing.

However, demolition and restoration of the public roads (including private roads)
shall be carried out according to the specifications designated the official in charge of road
management not with standing the provisions described in the specifications and the
Drawing.

7.4.20.1 Road Work Inside The Premises

(1) Sub –grade

a) Any excavation and banking work required for sub-grade construction shall
be carried out in accordance with the respective provisions in General
Provision SECTION-2 : EARTH WORKS.
b) The material required for banking and displacement shall be so placed that
the finished thickness of one layer after compaction will become 20 cm or
less.

c) The sub-grade surface shall be finished by proof- rolling in order to obtain

the contact pressure sufficient to permit smooth traffic of vehicles of 8 tons
or over should any defects be detected as a result of proof-rooling, such
detective sub-grade surface shall be finished again to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

d) The finished sub-grade surface shall be within + 5 cm of the design elevation.

(2) Sub base Course

(a) The materials to be used for sub base course shall be in accordance with the
specification described in the Drawing. The Contractor shall submit a report
concerning the quality of materials and the methods of sampling to the
Engineer for approval.

(b) The finished surface of sub base course shall be within –10 mm and + 5mm
of the design elevation.

(3) Surface Course (Asphalt pavement)

(a) Prior to commencing pavement, the sides of concrete side walk, manhole, etc.
shall be cleaned, and molten asphalt, etc. shall be coated over the sides.
(b) The surface to be seal-coated and prime- coated shall be finished into even
level, and after perfecting removing any bloc, dust and other foreign matters,
such surface shall be cured and dried.
(c) The mixtures shall be spread uniformly, rolled and finished into the specified
thickness. Then, the finished surface shall be measured in parallel to the
center line of the load by using a 3 m straight line ruler. In this case, the depth
of any concise sections shall not exceed 5 mm.
(d) The Contractor shall submit a report on the materials to be used for
pavement of surface course and method therefore to the Engineer to the
Engineer for approval.
371
(4) Inspection
The Contractor shall receive inspection of the Engineer during the
course and after completion of sub base course and surface course works.

7.4.20.2 Public Road (Including Private Road)

(1) Demolition of Pavement

Demolition of Pavement for public roads including private roads shall be
carried out so carefully as not to cause any hazardous effect upon the surrounding
portions of cement, concrete or pavement.

(2) Road Keeping and Restoration

(a) The road keeping shall be of a construction applicable to the prevailing site
conditions and so provided as not to cause any danger or trouble against
traffic.

(b) The contractor shall submit the drawings for road keeping to the Engineer for
approval.

(c) The Contractor shall constantly patrol any spots of road keeping and exert his
utmost efforts perform maintenance and repair of such roads in order to
eliminate any trouble against smooth traffic.

(d) The Contractor shall carry out maintenance and repair of any pertinent roads
so carefully as not to cause any trouble against smooth traffic until the said
roads have been restored and taken over to the official in charge of road
management.

7.4.21 Drainage Work

(a) The drainage work shall be as described in the Drawing and carried out in
accordance with General Provision SECTION-2 : EARTH WORK AND
SECTION-3 : REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK.

(b) The water – plumbing facility for drainage shall be of such a construction as
not to cause any trouble against the surrounding area and structure. The
contractor shall submit the design and execution schedule for the water
plumbing work to the Engineer for approval.

7.4.22 Painting Work

7.4.22.1 General

This clause covers all painting applied to surface of plaster wood, and metal
indicated in the Drawing. No painting shall be applied to surfaces of stainless steel copper,
bronze, brass or any/all steel in contact with concrete. Painting work shall be performed
by skilled workmen. Selection of color shall be as determined by the Engineer, unless
otherwise specified.

7.4.23 Materials and Painting Coat

372
7.4.23.1 Materials
Materials to be used in this clause shall be as follows and shall conform PAINTS AND
VARNISHES
• Water Based Paints
Water based paints shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 500:1965 Specification for Distemper Dry (under revision);
BDS 1097:1984 Specification for Plastic Emulsion Paint.
Part I for Interior Use;
Part 2 for Exterior Use;
IS 5410-1969 Specification for Cement Paint, Colour as Required;
IS 428-1969 Specification for Distemper, Oil Emulsion, Colour as
Required
• Ready Mixed Paint and Enamels
Ready mixed paints and enamels shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 13:1960 Specification for Ready Mixed Paints, Varnish,
Lacquers and Related Products (under revision);
BDS 14:1960 Specification for Black Bituminous Paint, Brushing for
General Purposes (under revision);
BDS 397:1964 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Red
Oxide Zinc Chrome, Priming (under revision);
BDS 398:1964 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Spraying, Red
Oxide Zinc Chrome, Priming (under revision);
BDS 399:1964 Specification for Aluminum Paint, Spraying for General
Purposes, in Dual Container (under revision);
BDS 400:1964 Specification for Aluminium Paint, Brushing, for
General Purposes in Dual Container (under revision);
BDS 401:1964 Specification for Varnish, Finishing, Exterior, Type-I,
(Synthetic) (Tentative) (under revision);
BDS 402:1989 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing,
Finishing, Semigloss, for General Purposes (First
Revision);
BDS 499:1965 Specification for Ready Mixed Paints, Brushing, for
Road Marking (white, yellow and black) (under
revision);
BDS 616:1966 Specification for Enamel, Brushing, Exterior (i)
Undercoating, (ii) Finishing, Colour as Required (under
revision);
BDS 617:1966 Specification for Enamel, Brushing, Interior (i)
Undercoating, (ii) Finishing, Colour as Required (under
revision);
BDS 926:1980 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Petrol
Resisting, Air Drying, for Exterior Painting of
Containers, Colour as Required;
BDS 927:1980 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Petrol
Resisting, Air Drying, for Interior Painting of Tanks and
Containers, Red Oxide (colour unspecified);
BDS 928:1980 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Acid
Resisting, for Protection Against Acid Fumes, Colour as
Required;
BDS 973:1981 Specification for Specification and Methods of Test for
Linseed Stand Oil for Paints and Varnishes;
BDS 974:1981 Specification and Methods of Test for Raw Tung Oils for
Paints and Varnishes;
373
 BDS 1005:1981 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing,
Finishing, Stoving, Enamel, Colour as Required;
BDS 1141:1986 Specification for Ready Mixed Aluminium Priming
Paints for Woodwork;
BDS 1151:1986 Specification for Pavement Marking Paints.
7.4.24 Thinners and Solvents
These shall conform to the following standards:
IS 324-1959 Specification for Ordinary Denatured Spirit (revised);
IS 533-1973 Specification for Gum Spirit of Turpentine (Oil of
Turpentine) (First Revision);
IS 82-1973 Methods of Sampling and Test for Thinners and
Solvents for Paints (First Revision).
• Varnishes and Lacquers
These materials shall conform to the following standards:
BDS 401:1964 Specification for Varnish, Finishing, Exterior, Type-I,
(synthetic) (under revision);
BDS 1064:1983 Specification for Varnish, Staving;
BDS 1065:1983 Specification for Varnish, Acid Resisting;
BDS 1066:1983 Specification for Varnish, Finishing, Interior;
IS 197-1969 Methods of sampling and Test for Varnishes and
Lacquers (First Revision);
IS 340-1978 Specification for Varnish, Mixing (First Revision);
IS 346-1952 Specification for Varnish, Spirit, Clear, Hard;
IS 347-1975 Specification for Varnish, Shellac for general purposes
(First Revision);
IS 348-1968 Specification for French Polish (First Revision);

7.4.23.2 Painting Coat

Number of coats shall be as indicated in the table below.

Number of coats
Material to be painted Primary Secondary Finishing
Steel Outdoor 2 2 1
Indoor 2 1 1

Wood Outdoor 1 2 1
Indoor 1 1

Concrete Plaster Outdoor 1 2 1

and board Indoor 1 1 1

Acid – proof Indoor 1 3 1

Galvanized steel Outdoor 2 1 1
Indoor 1 1
Touch –up of galvanized steel 1 1 1

7.4.23.3 Workmanship

(1) Smooth Finished & soft colored Plastic paint should be used over the Plastering work
of interior wall and ceiling.

374
(2) Smooth Finished & Architectural approved colored weather coat should be used over
the Plastering work of Exterior wall. Some where should be used Ceramic Facing
brick (Strip)/ Rustic Tiles as per direction/decision of Architecture or
approved 3D view.

(3) Painting shall be applied by spraying, brushing or rolling.

(4) Surfaces to be painted shall be smooth, dry and free from dirt, loose mill scale, rust,
grease, or other deleterious material

(5) The contractor shall submit the samples and catalogue of paint of the Engineer for
approval.

7.4.23.4 Protection
Drop clothes shall be furnished and place to fully protect all parts or work during
execution of the contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for paint droppings on
cement floor and base.

Paint droppings shall be entirely removed, and damaged surfaces shall be repaired in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer.

No work shall be accepted which shows laps. Stains, flat or glossy spots or imperfections
in surface over which paint or other finish is applied.

All rubbish, waste, or surplus materials shall be removed from time to time, and all
woodwork, hardware, floors or other adjacent work shall be cleaned.

All glass throughout the building shall have all paint or varnish sports and brush marks
removed, and upon completion of the painting work, all glass that is scratched or damaged
by the painter’s work, shall be replaced at the contractor’s responsibility.

Hardware and other unpainted metal surfaces shall be cleaned.

CONTROL BUILDING

7.4.24 Temporary Work, Earth Work and Piling Work

7.4.24.1 General

The work of the above items shall be specified in clauses “TEMPORARY WORK”,
“EARTH WORK” and “PILING WORK” in Section 1 “GENERAL PROVISIONS”, unless
otherwise specified.
7.4.24.2 Materials of Pile

The pile to be used for Control Building shall be RCC.

7.4.25 Concrete Work

7.4.25.1 General

Concrete work shall be as specified in Clause “CONCRETE WORK” in SECTION 1

“GENERAL PROVISIONS”, unless otherwise specified.

375
7.4.25.2 Classification of Materials to Be Used for Buildings

7.4.25.2.1 Concrete

The classification to be used for structural concrete shall be 4 Fc= 210 kg/cm2
concrete. (class E 210-10-25)
The classification to be used for leveling concrete shall be 4 Fc = 120 kg/ cm2
concrete. (class C 120-10-40)

7.5.25.2.2 Reinforcing Bar

Reinforcement and welding of reinforcement to be placed in concrete shall

conform to the requirements of this section.
a) Deformed Reinforcement : Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform to the
following standards; BDS 1313, Steel Bars and Wires for Reinforcement of
Concrete; BDS 580, Rolled Deformed Steel Bars (intermediate grade) for
Concrete Reinforcement; Reinforcement conforming to the ASTM, Standards:
A615M, Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars; A616M, Rail-Steel Deformed and
Plain Bars; A617M, Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars; A706M, Low-Alloy
Steel Deformed Bars; A767M, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars; and A775M,
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel.
b) Deformed reinforcing bars with a specified yield strength (f y ) exceeding 410
MPa may be used, provided f y shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of
0.35 per cent and the bars otherwise conform to ASTM standards noted above.
Fabricated deformed steel bar mats conforming to ASTM A184M and deformed
steel wire complying with ASTM A496 may be used. Deformed wire for
concrete reinforcement shall not be smaller than size D4 (Nominal diameter:
5.72 mm), and for wire with a specified yield strength f y , exceeding 410 MPa f y
shall be the stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 per cent.
Welded deformed steel wire fabric conforming to ASTM A497 may be used; for
a wire with a specified yield strength (f y ) exceeding 410 MPa, f y shall be the
stress corresponding to a strain of 0.35 per cent. Welded intersections shall
not be spaced farther apart than 400 mm in direction of calculated stress,
except for wire fabric used as stirrups.
7.4.25.2.3 Form

7.4.25.2.3.1 Form Oil

Form oil shall be light colored paraffin oil or other acceptable non-staining material.
Form in contact with concrete shall be given a uniform light spray coating of the
specified form oil coating in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Form
coating shall be applied to the forms before they are set.

7.4.25.2.3.2 Form Ties

Form ties shall have sufficient strength, stiffness and rigidity to support and
maintain the form in proper position and alignment without the use of auxiliary spreaders.
The type of form ties used shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

376
7.4.26 Steel Reinforcement

7.4.26.1 Lapped Splices in Reinforcement

Splices at points of great stress shall be avoided wherever possible, and care shall
be exercised to avoid concentration of splices at one place.

a) Length of Lap

The lengths of laps in lapped splices shall be in accordance with the Drawings and
indicated below.

40 d without hook
35 d with hook

The length of lap in a lapped splice of reinforcing bars of different diameters shall
be based on the nominal diameter of smaller bar.

7.4.26.2 Anchorage of Reinforcement

The length of anchorage of reinforcement shall be determined in accordance with

the type of reinforcing bar, the grade of concrete and type of stress acting on the
reinforcement, and shall be as indicated in the table below, unless otherwise
indicated.

Length of Anchorage of Reinforcement

Length of
Strength of Concrete Floor,
Re-Bar Anchorage Lower
Ordinary Concrete Roof
Bar Beam
25 d or 15 d with 10 d and 15
SD30 210kg/mc2 35 d or 25 d with hook
hook cm or more

Note : “d” denotes nominal diameter of reinforcing bar.

7.4.26.3 Dowels
Dowels shall be installed at right angles to construction joints. Dowels shall be
accurately aligned parallel to the finished surface and shall be rigidly held in place
and supported during placing of the concrete.

7.4.26.4 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement

The thickness of concrete cover for reinforcement shall be determined to provide

necessary fire resistance, durability and bearing strength of the member. Minimum
concrete cover shall be provided in accordance with the table below.

Table : Minimum Thickness of Concrete Cover for Reinforcement

Item Structure Element Covering Thickness (cm)

Floor, Wall Covered finish 2
Uncovered 3
Interior finish 3
Part not Uncovered 3
377
 Contacting Column, Exterior, 3
Beam wall Ground covered finish
Uncovered 4
Bearing wall 4

Table : Minimum Thickness of Concrete Cover for Reinforcement (Cont’d)

Item Structure Element Covering

Thickness (cm)
Wall, Column, beam, floor 4
Part contacting ground Foundation, retaining wall 6

7.4.26.5 Concrete Test

The test of concrete shall be executed as follows :

a) The concrete tests, necessary to maintain the quality control of concrete, shall be
executed and their test results shall be submitted to the Engineer.

b) For concrete compressive tests, six (6) test specimens shall be required for each
concrete placement.

c) Three (3) specimens shall be tested for seven (7) or fourteen (14) days strength,
the remained three(3) specimens shall be test tested for twenty-eight (28) days strength.

d) The test of concrete shall be executed once for each 150m 3 or less of concrete to
be poured on the same day.

The expense for the above tests shall be included in the unit prices.

7.4.26.6 Tolerances for Concrete Construction

Concrete structure shall be constructed to the line shown in the drawings.

Any structure which does not conform to such lines within the tolerances listed below
shall be repaired, removed and made a new by the contractor.

Tolerances limits of concrete structure shall, as a standard, be in accordance with

the table below.
Tolerance Limited

Type Item Tolerances against

base line (mm)
Column, wall A. Form Architecturally 3
formed
Others 5
B, Concrete surface 7
Beam, slab A. Form 1
B. Deflection 3
C. Concrete surface 7
A. Column line 3

378
7.4.26.7 Steel Thrown Finish

After the placing of concrete has been completed, steel trowel finish shall be
applied to interior concrete floors, such as bed of vinyl asbestos tile and exposed
steel trowel finish floor as indicated in the drawings.

The finished floor surfaces shall be true plane surfaces with no deviation in excess
of 3.0mm when tested with a 300mm.
Surfaces shall be pitched to drains where indicated in the drawings.

Instead of hand finishing, the contractors may use an approved power finishing
machine provided that the finished surfaces are free of machine marks or ridges.

7.4.26.8 Concrete Surfaces to Be Exposed

Form surfaces that will be in contact shall be of material that is non-reactive with concrete
and that will produce concrete surfaces equivalent in smoothness and appearance to that
produced by new plywood panels.
Smaller size panels shall be used only where required by openings or joint details, with
each area less than 120 cm wide formed with a single panel accurately cut to the required
dimensions.

Cut surfaces shall be smooth and treated with form coating. Panel joints that will
be in contact with concrete shall be smooth and free of offset.

Form materials with defects that will impair the texture and appearance of finish
surfaces shall not be used.

Column forms shall be made with a minimum number of joints.

7.4.27 Masonry Work

7.4.27.1 Concrete Block Masonry

7.4.27.1.1 General

This clause covers walls, partitions and lintels constructed with pre-cast concrete
hollow blocks reinforced with steel bars.

7.4.27.1.2 Materials

1) Cements and aggregate

Cement and aggregates to be used in the concrete hollow block shall be as

specified in the clause “REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK”. Coarse aggregate for
blocks shall not be larger than one-fifth (1/5) of the narrowest with of hollow
block section.
2) Cement mortar and concrete

Reinforcing bars shall be as specified in the clause “ REINFORCED CONCRETE

WORK”

3) Cement mortar and concrete

379
 Standard mix proportion shall be as follows, unless otherwise shown:

Work Mix proportion (by volume)

Cement : (slaked lime) : sand
For masonry Joint 1:3
Cement mortar For Tamping 1:3
For painted joint 1:3
Concrete For Tamping 1 : (2.5) : 3.5

7.4.27.1.3 Working Drawings

Working drawings of the block laying plan including reinforcing for arrangements
and the places of anchor bolts shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.
7.4.27.1.4 Application Method
1) Reinforcing Bars

Unless otherwise specified, reinforcing bars shall be of D10, and shall be

placed at three (3) block intervals horizontally and two (2) block intervals
vertically.

Intersection of the bars shall be securely tied with wire. The extra
reinforcing bars to be used for the perimeters of the opening shall be of D 13.

2) Laying
The concrete surface to receive blocks shall be cleaned and thoroughly
wetted prior to laying the masonry units. All masonry units shall be clean and free
from surface dust before laying, and shall be laid by suing cement mortar.
Fractional parts of units will not be permitted where whole units can be
used. Joints shall be 10mm thick, and as uniform as possible.
All exposed joints shall be raked 10mm deep and tooled firmly so as to
produce a smooth, tight surface. All cell where reinforcing bars are inserted and
blocks are jointed shall be compactly filled with specified mortar (tamping mortar).

Laying of blocks shall not exceed 1.2 meters per day in height.

Pipes and conduits to be inserted in the concrete hollow block walls shall be
embedded in such a manner as not to cause any damage to the block. The
contractor shall coordinate placing of all items embedded in masonry, and shall be
responsible for any changes in positions.

7.4.28 Lintel

Lintels for opening shall be of reinforced concrete and extended to a length of at

least 20mm into the adjoining walls.

All cells of the blocks directly below the extended lintels shall be filled with mortar.
7.4.29 Bond Beam

When the height of concrete block wall exceeds 30 times the wall thickness,
reinforced pre-cast or pour in place concrete bond beam shall be provided at each 30
times exceeding the wall thickness.

380
7.4.30 Precast Concrete Block

7.4.30.1 General

Materials, such as cement, aggregate, reinforcing bars, etc. shall be as specified in

the Clause “REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK”

Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be less than 5mm. Specific gravity of
coarse aggregate shall be 2.7 or more, unless otherwise specified.

Mix proportion of cement, sand : coarse aggregate shall be 1:2:4, respectively.

7.4.30.2 Lightweight Concrete Block for Roofing

Specific gravity of coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete shall be 1.7.- 1.9.

7.4.31 Water Proofing Work

7.4.31.1 General

This clause covers all waterproofing, built up roofing and mortar waterproof.

7.4.31.1.1 Built Up Roofing

7.4.31.1.2 Materials

(1) Asphalt Primer

Asphalt primer shall be applied by spraying or brushing. The quality of material

shall be in accordance with the table below:

Drying Time Not less than 8 hours

Remainder after drying Not less than 35%
Specific Gravity Less than 1.0

Test method for the above shall comply with JIS K 5400 or equivalent BDS

(2) Asphalt Compound

The quality of materials shall conform to ASTM, and shall in accordance with the
table below.

Asphalt Compound
Penetration (25 oC,100 gr, 5 sec.) 20 – 30 (2.0 ~ 3.0 mm)
Softening Point oC Not less than 90 oC
Carbon disulfide Not less than 97%
Matteability (25 oC) Not less than 2.5mm
Volume of Evaporation Less than 0.5%
Penetration after evaporation Not less that 70%

Flashing Point (open cup method) Not less than 230 oC

Specific Gravity 1.01 - 1.04
381
(3) Asphalt Roofing

Asphalt roofing shall comply with JIS A 6006 (Asphalt Roofing Felts), or
equivalent BDS and shall be 45kg. – item (21.0m x 1.0 m per roll)

The Contractor shall submit sample of asphalt roofing to the

engineering for approval.

(i) Specific roofing shall, in principle, consist of copper mesh (#38) or glass-
fiber (#23) coated with asphalt, and the weight of standard item shall be
55kg.

(ii) Perforated Roofing

Quality of material shall comply with JIS A 6006 or equivalent BDS

The Contractor shall submit the sample to the engineer for approval.

7.4.31.1.3 Grades of Water Proofing

Working Class – A Class - B

Process
1 Asphalt Primer (0.31/m2) Asphalt Primer (0.31/
m 2)
2 Perforated roofing within Asphalt (0.1 kg/ m2)
layer of sand
3 Asphalt (1.2 kg/ m2) Asphalt Roofing
4 Special roofing Asphalt (1.0 kg/ m2)
5 Asphalt (1.0 kg/ m2) Special roofing
6 Special roofing Asphalt (1.0 kg/ m2)
7 Asphalt (1.0 kg/ m2) Asphalt roofing
8 Asphalt roofing
9 Asphalt (2.0 kg/ m2)
Class – A shall be applied for the roof.
Class – B shall be applied for the lavatory.

Inclination of the base concrete shall be, in principle, more than 1/100.

7.4.31.1.4 Application Method

Asphalt primer shall be evenly sprayed over the base concrete or roof insulation
board. Asphalt compound shall then be vinyl poured and spread over the asphalt
primer. Compound heated to a temperature exceeding 230oC shall not be used.

In the case of class – A, perforated roofing shall be laid between asphalt primer and
asphalt compound.

Asphalt felt, roofing and special roofing shall be flatly laid over each respective
asphalt compound. The sides and ends of these sheets shall be provided with an
overlap of at least 9 centimeters. The joints shall be completely water tight and not
be concentrated.

382
 Care shall be exercised for the roofing works surrounding anchor bolts, parapets
and roof drains to prevent any leakage.

7.4.32 Mortar Waterproofing

The waterproofing agent shall be used for mortar waterproofing of roof and
balcony.

Cement and sand to be used for waterproofing mortar shall be as specified in the
clause “PLASTER WORK”

The catalogue and mix proportion shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

The application method of mortar shall be as specified in the clause “PLASTER

WORK”

7.4.32.1 Caulking
7.4.32.2 General

The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor and equipment necessary to
complete the work as specified or as directed by the engineer.

The contractor shall submit the catalogues and work procedures to the engineer
for approval.

7.4.32.3 Material

(1) Oil caulking compound shall conform to JIS A 5751 (Oil Based Caulking
compounds Buildings ) or equivalent.

(2) Thiokol caulking shall conform to JIS A 5754 (Polysulfide Sealing compound for
Buildings) or equivalent.

(3) Thiokol caulking shall be used as joint for all surroundings of exterior doors,
windows and concrete panels.

7.4.32.4 Workmanship

All joint surfaces to be filled shall be sound, clean and dry. All concrete surfaces
shall be fully cured before application of caulking.

Joint surfaces to be filled shall be primed with the manufacturer’s recommended

primer, compatible with the Thiokol base sealing compound and appropriate for
the surfaces to be sealed.

Mixing and application of filling compound shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations, and shall be submitted to the engineer for
approval.

All filler work shall be done by skilled workmen.

7.4.33 Control Joint For Roof
383
 Control joint shall be provided between mortar finish and light weight concrete
block and at about 4.0mm of intervals in light weight concrete block area of roof.

Control joint shall consists of elastight and asphalt mortar.

7.4.34 Tile Work

7.4.34.1 General

This clause covers all works required for mosaic tile, ceramic tile and others applied on
floors and wall.

Working drawings shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.

Prior to starting work, the contractor shall submit samples of tile to the Engineer
for approvals.

7.4.34.2 Materials

7.4.34.2.1 Floor Finish

● To be used 600mmx600mm (24 inch x 24inch) size European standard Mirror Polished
Homogeneous tiles for 1st to 6th Floor.
● For Ground/Underground Floor finish to be used as per Transformer based design
such as use dry gravels for bottom of the Transformer and Rustic Tiles for walk way or
common space.
Materials to be used in the works shall be high quality, high grade and good
appearance.

7.4.34.2.2 Ceramic Tile for Interior Wall Finish (GWI) for Bath room’s wall

Special color and size of European standard Ceramic Tile with decorative Boarder shall be
used in Bath rooms & other necessary interior walls.
Materials to be used in the work shall be high quality, high grade and good appearance.

7.4.34.2.3 Ceramic Tile for Exterior Wall Finish

Ceramic tile for exterior wall finish shall be of 60mm x 227mm, colored, glazed and
manufactured by qualified manufacturer as approved by the engineer. (if required)

The color of tile shall be designated by the engineer.

7.4.34.2.4 Setting Materials

(1) Cement, sand to be used for mortar bed shall be as specified in the clause
“REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK”

(2) Bedding mortar shall be mixed with one part Portland Cement and three parts
sand.

7.4.34.3 Setting
384
(1) Mosaic Tile

The mortar setting bed shall be floated to a uniform plumb and level surface to
bring the finish surface to the required plane.

Thickness of mortar shall be about 10 millimeters.

Mosaic sheets shall be placed in positions on the pure coat and freshly combed into
the mortar setting bed with trowel. Sheets shall be tamped firmly into place and
made true and even with the finished surface line or plane.

Expansion joints or control joints at 6 meters on center shall continue through the
mortar bed and mosaic tile and shall be kept free from mortar and grout. Those
shall be filled with an approved caulking compound and shall be as close as
possible to the color of the grout mortar. All joints, after removal of the paper, shall
be grouted leaving then completely and uniformly filled. At no time shall sand or
any abrasive be used that will damage the natural sheen of the mosaic tile. All
excess grout and glue shall be removed from the face of the tile leaving the finished
surface clean.

(2) Ceramic Tile

Laying of ceramic tile shall comply with the specifications for “ Mosaic Tile” for
floors, tile lay out work shall begin from the center lines of areas to eliminate use of
half tiles.

For walls, tile layout work shall begin from the top of the wall and proceed
downward.

Tile shall be soaked in clean water for at least one hour prior to setting and applied
to setting beds within five minutes after soaking.

(3) Protection

The contractor shall provide and install barriers or other forms of protection and
covering to prevent damages.

(4) Cleaning

Tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned after grouting and painting has sufficiently set. A;;
traces of cement or foreign matter shall be removed from tiles. Exposed hardware
and plumbing trim shall be covered with baseline during tile setting. Base line shall
be removed and metal shall be cleaned and polished.

7.4.34.4 Gun Sprayed Tile

Gun sprayed tile shall be applied on the surface of concrete as indicated in the
drawings.

Gun sprayed tile shall conform to JIS A 6910 - C or equivalent.

385
 Sealer shall be applied on the concrete surface so as to prevent moisture from main
material and to increase adhesion of main material.

Main material shall consist of white Portland Cement, dolomite plaster and
coloring agent. The color shall be designated by the Engineer.

7.4.35 Metal Works

7.4.35.1 General
This clause covers all metal works for flooring, siding, walling, flushing, railings, roofing,
raiser, plumbing, and other pertinent fixtures. The contractor shall submit fabrication and
installation drawings to the engineer for approval.

7.4.35.2 Handrails

7.4.35.2.1 Steel Railings

For Stair case railing to be used Stainless Steel Pipe, Square Box & other decorative post
as per drawing to the engineer for approval.
Steel railings, including pipe inserts to be embedded in concrete shall conform to JIS G
3452 and shall be galvanized, unless otherwise specified.

Square pipe shall be of the size indicated in the Drawings.

Galvanizing coat damaged by bolting, welding and other field works shall be repaired and
painted with two coats of silver zinc paint.

7.4.35.2.2 Fabrication

Mitered and welded joints shall be made by fitting post to top rail and intermediate
rail to post mitering comers, groove welding joints, and grinding smooth.
Railings may be bent at comers instead of jointed, provided that the bends are
made in suitable jigs and that the pipe is not crushed or damage.
Edge of the railings shall be covered with steel plates.

7.4.35.2.3 Installation

Rails shall be installed by means of steel sleeve inserts which shall be seat and
anchored in the concrete.

Ports shall be inserted into the galvanized steel sleeves embedded in concrete or
shall be welded to the stringer, beam or toe plate made level, perpendicular and
aligned.

The space between pipe posts and pips sleeve inserts except those marked
“ Removable handrail” as indicated in the drawings shall be filled solid with molten
lead or shall be welded.

7.4.35.3 Steel Ladders

Materials to be used for steel ladders shall conform to JIS G 3101 – SS 41 or

equivalent.

386
 Steel ladders shall be fabricated of l- 65 x 6 steel angle stringers and 19mm
diameter steel bar rungs. Rungs shall be spaced 350mm apart and shall be inserted
into the stringers and welded thereto.

The ladders, including welded on bracket, shall be pointed.

7.4.35.4 Corner Guards

Comer guards for jamps, where directed by the engineer and sills of opening and
edges of concrete column and wall shall be of steel angles or steel plates,
conforming to JIS G 3101-SS 41 or equivalent, anchored into concrete with welded
steel straps or end weld stud anchors.

7.4.35.5 Stair Safety Nosing for Concrete Stair

Stair safety nosing shall be of extruded bronze or stainless steel with cross hatched nosing.

Safety nosing shall be provided with integrally cast or bent anchors for embedding into
concrete.

7.5.35.6 Divider Strips

Divider strips shall be half hard brass and shall be placed between different types
of floorings as indicated. Divider strips shall be secured to floors by strip anchors
or by flat head countersunk brass screws set in lead plugs.

7.4.35.7 Roof Drain

Roof drains shall be of cast iron baked with refined tar and shall conform to JIS A
5511, or equivalent, The size shall be in accordance with the drawings.

7.4.35.8 Corner Bead

Corner bead shall be half hard brass, and shall be placed at edges of columns and
wall where mortar or plaster is applied.

7.4.35.9 Blind Box

Blind boxes shall be provided above all windows faced to outdoor, excepting for
lavatory, storage, janitorial, kitchen and rooms which located on the first floor.

They shall be constructed of 1.6mm thick steel plate conforming to JIS G 3131, JIS
G 3141 or equivalent and shall be painted.

Hanger bracket for installation of the blind box shall be galvanized 6mm thickness
flat bar conforming to JIS G 3101 SS 41 and shall be installed at spacing of 90cm
diameter expansion blots.

Connection between blind box and hanger bracket shall be 6mm diameter bolts
and nuts.

7.4.35.10 Doorsill

387
Prior to commencement of floor finish work, doorsill shall be provided in place between
different types of flooring, unless other wise indicated, and shall be stainless steel
conforming to JIS G 4305 – SUS 304 or equivalent.

7.4.35.11 Flashing Plate

Flashing Plates shall be of 2.3mm galvanized steel plate conforming to JIS G 3131,
G 2341 or equivalent.

Flashing plates shall be provided at wall and roof opening for piping and at
surrounding areas of windows, louvers rolling doors and doors facing outdoors.

7.4.35.1 2 Embedded Plate, Hook and Sleeve

The contractor shall provide plates, hooks and sleeves to be embedded in concrete
as required.

Embedded plates, hooks and sleeves shall have sufficient thickness, diameter and
anchorage in order to fix equipment, piping and other necessary items. Painting
shall be applied on the plates and hooks after fixing the equipment and piping.

The materials to be used for plates, hooks and sleeves shall conform to JIS G 3101
SS 41 or equivalent.

7.4.35.13 Joiner

Joiners shall be provided at surrounding space of suspended ceilings and shall be

of aluminum conforming to JIS H 4000 or equivalent.

Small screws shall be of stainless steel or of high strength aluminum alloy.

7.4.35.14 Down Spout

Downspouts to be used for drains shall be steel pipe conforming to JIS G 3442 or
equivalent.

Metal bracket shall be of 50mm x 4.5mm steel plate conforming to JIS G 3101 SS
41 or equivalent and galvanized.

Downspouts shall be fixed with metal brackets at maximum of 2.0m per space.

7.4.36 Plaster Work

7.4.36.1 General

7.4.36.1.1 Treatment of Bed

(1) Concrete surfaces which are too smooth to receive plastering shall be roughened
before hand with chisels.

(2) Where wall and floors of concrete, concrete block, etc. are distorted or uneven, the
bed shall be repaired with mortar.

388
7.4.36.1.2 Cleaning and Wetting of Bed

The bed, scratch coat, and treated surface of bed shall be cleaned and suitably
wetted before application of the following coat.

Portions of the base or coated surface which are not bonded shall be immediately
repaired.

7.4.36.1.3 Curing

In order to prevent soiling and premature drying of plastered surface, window and
door work shall be completed prior to commencement of the plaster work sheet coverings
provided and sprinkling of water performed.

In order to prevent the soiling of neighboring members and other finished surface,
suitable protection shall be provided using paper, boarding, tarpauling sheet or other
suitable means.

7.4.37 Mortar Plastering

7.4.37.1 Materials

(1) Cement shall conform to JIS R 5210 ordinary Portland Cement or locally produced
equivalent.

(2) Sand shall be of good quality free of salts, mud, trash and /or organic matters. The
gradation shall be in accordance with the table below.

Table Gradation of Sand

Gradation (by weight) Type of Mortar

Plastering
Passing 5mm sieve…………..100% First coat ad second
coat
Passing 0.15mm sieve ………not more than 10%
Passing 2.5mm sieve…………100% Finish coat
Passing 0.15mm sieve………..not more than 10%

Water shall be clean and free of sales, iron, sulfur and/ or organic matter, as
specified in he clause “ CONCRETE WORK”.

7.4.37.2 Mixing
The mix proportions of mortar shall be of standard type in accordance with the
table below.

Table Mix Proportion (by Volume)

Portion to be First Second Finish

Base
Plastered Coat Coat Coat
C:S C:S C:S Slaked Lime
Floor 1:2
Interior Wall 1:2 1:3 1 : 3 : 0.3
Concrete Ceiling 1:2 1 : 3 : 0.3
389
 Concrete Block Exterior Wall and 1:2 1:3 1:3
others
Wire lath Interior Wall 1:3 1:3 1 : 3 : 0.3
Metal Lath Ceiling 1:2 1:3 1 : 3 : 0.3
Exterior wall and 1:3 1:3 1:3
others
In the above table, abbreviated C and S mean cement and sand, respectively.

7.4.37.3 Plastering Thickness

The thickness of application shall be in accordance with the standards indicated in

the table below.

Table Plastering Thickness

Plastering Thickness (mm)

Bed Portion to be First Dubbing Second Finish Coat Total
plastered coat Coat Coat
Floor - - - 30 30
Concrete Interior wall 6 5 6 3 20
Concrete Exterior wall 6 7 6 6 25
Block
Ceiling, others 4.5 - 4.5 3 12
Interior wall 7.5 - 7.5 3 18
Wire Lath Exterior wall 6 - 7.5 3 18
Metal Lath Ceiling, waves 4.5 - 4.5 3 12

7.4.37.5 Application Method

(1) First Coat and Dubbing Out

Mortar shall be trawled on adequately to leave on conspicuous hollow. The

surface of the first coat shall be roughened with tools such as metal combs.

The first coat shall be left standing for not less then 10 days allowing cracks
to be fully developed before applying the next coat.

Dubbing out for concrete and concrete block shall be performed by

roughening with tools such as metal combs and shall be left standing for not less then 5
days.

(2) Second Coat

For the second coat, a ruler shall be provided at external corners, internal
corners and edges applied on order to attain an even finish.

(3) Finish Coat

The finish coat shall be applied in a manner so as to be blemish free by

watching the degree of drying of the brown coat and by paying special attention to the
surface, angles and edges.

390
 The finish shall be either steel toweled, wood troweled or brushed as
directed by the engineer.

For the exterior wall, the mortar shall first be troweled on with a wood
travel, then furnished with a steel trowel and finally brushed avoiding use of water as
much as possible.

(4) Floor Mortaring

In the case of concrete which is several days old, concrete paste shall be
buttered on in adequate quantity and spread out with brooms and the like after which
application of mortar shall be started.

Application of mortar shall be performed using stiff mortar containing a

minimum of water and the mortar shall be tamped to bring moisture to the surface. The
mortar shall be screened while paying attention to the grade upon and then shall be
troweled smooth.

The crack control joint should be provided at intervals of approximately

3.0m. The joints shall be tooled.

(5) Base for Tile Fixing

In the case of using adhesives of wall tile or mosaic tile, mortar application
shall be to the second coat.

7.4.38 Plastering

7.4.38.1 Materials

Plaster shall comply with JIS A6904 (Gypsum Plaster) or equivalent. Cement which
is more than six (6) months aged shall not be used.

7.4.38.2 Mix Proportion

The mix proportions shall be as follows :

Applied
Plaster
Thickness
White
For For
Bed Layer Sand Fiber Ceiling Wall
Finish Bed
(g)/25kg
Concrete
and
2nd coat - 1 2.0 250 6.0 7.5
concrete
block
Finish
1 - - - 1.5 1.5
coat

391
7.4.38.3 Application Method

The surface to receive gypsum plastering shall be leveled with a coat of cement
mortar of which the mix proportion of cement and sand is 1:2 prior to the application of
plaster and the leveled surface shall be scratched to insure satisfactory adhesion of the
plaster.
Before applying plaster, the receiving surface shall be pre pared by removing all
foreign substances and shall be dampened.

7.4.39 Doors, Windows and Louvers

7.4.39.1 Wooden Doors and Frames

7.4.39.1.1 General

This clause covers wooden doors and wooden frames, including finish hardware,
such as butts, hinges, locks, knobs, stops, strikes, holders, door chains and closures.

7.4.39.1.2 Materials

All doors shall be flush type, of sizes as shown in the drawings. Materials shall be,
in principle, locally principle, locally produced. Standard flush doors be double paneled
door of 6mm thick plywood and shall have stiffening ribs spaced at intervals of 15cm.
Plywood shall be bended to the frames with a suitable adhesives which shall conform JIS
K 6801 and 6803 or equivalent.

Waterproofed plywood shall be used for wooden doors for the lavatory.

The waterproofed plywood shall be of 6mm thickness five (5) play and the weight
shall be 4.79 kg/m2.

The each layer shall be completely pressed and adhered by using phonetic resin
adhesives and the plywood shall be passed a boiling test and a dry and wet repeating test.

All wooden doors and frames shall be painted as specified in clause “PAINTING”
unless otherwise specified.

7.4.39.1.3 Shop Drawings

The contractor shall submit stop drawings of fabricated items to the engineer for
approval. The shop drawings shall clearly show the details of fabrication, installation, sizes,
operation, methods of anchoring and any other pertinent details required for the
installation thereof.

7.4.39.1.4 Wooden Door Frames

All frames shall be accurately set, plumb, level and shall be securely nailed to the wooden
blocks embedded in the concrete or mortar.
Door Frame and Shutter should be made by solid wood such as Burma Teak as per
direction/decision of the employer

392
7.4.39.1.5 Installation

Each door shall be accurately cut, trimmed and fitted to its frame and hardware
with allowance for paint finish and possible swelling or shrinkage.
The clearance at the top shall not exceed 6mm.
7.4.39.1.6 Hardware for Wooden Doors

Hardware for wooden doors shall in principle be stainless steel conforming to The
applicable standards are listed below :
BDS 113:1986 Specification for Latches and Locks for Doors in
Buildings;
IS 204-78 Specification for Tower Bolts;
Part I Ferrous Metals (Fourth Revision);
Part II Nonferrous metals (Fourth Revision);
IS 205-1978 Specification for Nonferrous Metal Butt Hinges (Third
Revision);
IS 206-1981 Specification for Tee and Strap Hinges (Third Revision);
IS 208-1979 Specification for Door Handles (Third Revision);
IS 281-1973 Specification for Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts for Use
with Padlock (Second Revision);
IS 362-1982 Specification for Parliament Hinges (Fourth Revision);
IS 363-1976 Specification for Hasps and Staples (Third Revision);
IS 364-1970 Specification for Fanlight Catch (Second Revision);
IS 452-1973 Specification for Door Springs, Rat-tail Type (Second
Revision);
IS 453-1973 Specification for Double Acting Spring Hinges (Second
Revision);
IS 729-1979 Specification for Drawer Locks, Cupboard Locks and
Box Locks (Third Revision);
IS 1019-1974 Specification for Rim Latches (Second Revision);
IS 1341-1981 Specification for Steel Butt Hinges (Fourth Revision);
IS 1823-1980 Specification for Floor Door Stoppers (Third Revision);
IS 1837-1966 Specification for Fanlight Pivots (First Revision);
IS 2209-1976 Specification for Mortice Locks (vertical type) (Third
Revision);
IS 2681-1979 Specification for Nonferrous Metal Sliding Door Bolts
for Use with Padlocks (Second Revision);
IS 3564-1975 Specification for Door Closers (hydraulically regulated)
(Second Revision);
IS 3818-1971 Specification for Continuous (piano) Hinges (First
Revision);
IS 3828-1966 Specification for Ventilator Chains;
IS 3843-1966 Specification for Steel Backflap Hinges;
IS 3847-1966 Specification for Mortice Night Latches;
IS 4621-1975 Specification for Indicating Bolts for use in Public Baths
and Lavatories (First Revision);
IS 4948-1974 Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for General
Use (First Revision);
IS 4992-1975 Specification for Door Handles for Mortice Locks
(vertical type) (First Revision);
IS 5187-1972 Specification for Flush Bolts (First Revision);
IS 5899-1970 Specification for Bathroom Latches;
IS 5930-1970 Specification for Mortice Latch (vertical type);
393
 IS 6315-1971 Specification for Floor Springs (hydraulically regulated)
for Heavy Doors;
IS 6318-1971 Specification for Plastic Window Stays and Fasteners;
IS 6343-1982 Specification for Door Closers (pneumatically regulated)
for Light Doors Weighing up to 40 kg (First Revision);
IS 6602-1972 Specification for Ventilator Poles;
IS 6607-1972 Specification for Rebated Mortice Locks (vertical type);
IS 7196-1974 Specification for Hold Fast;
IS 7197-1974 Specification for Double Action Floor Springs (without
oil check) for Heavy Doors;
IS 7534-1974 Specification for Mild Steel Locking Bolts with Holes for
Padlocks;
IS 7540-1974 Specification for Mortice Dead Locks;
IS 8756-1978 Specification for Ball Catches for use in Wooden
Almirah;
IS 8760-1978 Specification for Mortice Sliding Door Locks, with Lever
Mechanism;
IS 9106-1979 Specification for Rising Butt Hinges;
IS 9131-1979 Specification for Rim Locks;
IS 9460-1980 Specification Flush Drop Handle for Drawer;
IS 9899-1981 Specification for Hat, Coat and Wardrobe Hooks;
IS 10019-1981 Specification for Steel Window Stays and Fasteners;
IS 10090-1982 Specification for Numericals;
IS 10342-1982 Specification for Curtain Rail System
or equivalent.
7.4.40 Steel Fittings
7.4.40.1 General

This clause covers steel fittings, including finish hardware, such as butts, hinges,
locks, knobs, stops, strikes, holders, door chains and closures.

7.4.40.2 Materials

Steel sheet shall conform to JIS G 3131, G 3141 or equivalent.

The thickness of steel plates shall be as designated below, unless otherwise

specified.

Door Frame 1.6 mm

Architrave
1.2 mm
Threshold 2.3
mm
Door Leaf Frame and flush plate 1.6 mm
Stiffener and anchor plate 2.3 mm

Machine screws and rivets shall conform to JIS B 1101-1106, JIS B 1201-1205 and
JIS B 1131-1133 or equivalent.

394
7.4.40.3 Steel Doors

Steel doors shall be single or double hollow core, single or double swig type or
sliding type and with dimension and location as indicated in the drawings. All doors shall
be complete with door frames, hard wares and any / all necessary accessories.

Shop fabricated frames without threshold shall be provided with temporary

spreads at bottom to preserve proper shape during transportation and erection.

All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and given two costs or rust
inhibitive paint after being zinc plated in shop.

Field paint for finish shall be provided as specified in the clause “ PAINTING”

7.4.40.4 Steel Louver

Steel louvers shall be of 45o slits and 100mm thick louvers and frame assembly.

The sizes shall be indicated in the drawings.

7.4.40.5 Shop Drawings

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of fabricated items to the engineer for
approval. The shop drawings shall clearly show the details of fabrication, installations,
dimensions, sizes, operation, methods of anchoring and any other pertinent details
required for satisfactory installation.

7.4.40.6 Installation

All frames shall be erected plumb, square and true to line and level, with secure
fattening to structures and anchors.

Doorframes shall be installed by authorized representatives of the manufacturer,

but before all plastering works are completed.

7.4.41 Aluminum Fitting

7.4.41.1 General

This clause covers all types of aluminum door, window, casements, and swing,
sliding, pivoted, projected, fired and combination doors and windows, including operation
hardware.

7.4.41.2 Materials

Extruded aluminum shape and sheet shall conform to JIS H 4100 and H 4000 respectively
or equivalent.
Reinforcing strips, reinforcing struts anchors, etc. shall be of zinc plated steel plate
conform G 310-SS41.

Small screws shall be of stainless steel conforming to JIS G 5121 SUS 304or of high
strength aluminum alloy conforming to JIS H 4040 or equivalent.

395
7.4.41.3 Shop Drawings

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of fabricated items to the engineer for
approval.

The shop drawings shall clearly show the details of fabrication, installation,
dimensions, sizes, operation, methods of anchoring and any other pertinent details
required for satisfactory installation.

7.4.41.4 Installation

All aluminum windows shall be installed by the manufacturer or his authorized

representative and shall be set plumb, square, level and true to line.

Frames shall be set and securely anchored to the structure.

Aluminum surface in contact or other masonry materials shall be provided one

heavy brush coat of bituminous paint. Upon completion of the work the contractor shall
remove and clean all surplus materials from these areas.

7.4.42 Glass And Glazing

7.4.42.1 General
The contractor shall furnish and install all glass required in doors and windows in
accordance with the drawings and any direction of the engineer.
The applicable standards for glass and glazing are listed below :
ASTM C1036-90 Specification for Flat Glass;
ASTM C1044-90 Specification of Heat-Treated Flast Glass Kind HS, Kind
FT Coated and Uncoated Glass;
ANSI Z 97.1 Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of
Tests for Transport Safety Glazing Materials Used in
Building;
CPSC 16 CFR Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
7.4.42.2 Materials
(1) Ordinary sheet glass shall conform to JIS R 3201 (Sheet Glass) or equivalent.

(2) Polished plate glass shall conform to JIS R 3202 (Polished plate Glass) or equivalent.

(3) Figured glass shall conform to JIS R 3203 ( Figured Glass) or equivalent.

(4) Wired glass shall meet conform to JIS R 3204 (Wired Glass) or equivalent.

(5) Laminated glass shall conform to JIS R 3205 (Laminated Glass) or equivalent.

(6) Tempered glass shall conform to JIS R 3026 (Tempered Glass) or equivalent.

(7) Multiple glass shall conform to JIS R 3209 (Multiple Glass) or equivalent.

(8) Putty shall conform to JIS A 5752 (Putty for Metal Sash Glazing) and JIS A 5753
(Putty for wooden Fittings).

396
 Putty for steel fittings, the quality shall be class 1, for aluminum fittings, class 2 as
specified in JIS A 5752.

(9) The thickness of sheet glass and polished plate glass shall be 3.0mm for figured glass
4.0mm and for wired glass 6.8mm unless other wise specified in the drawings.

7.4.42.3 Workmanship

No glazing work shall be carried out during rain or when the frames or glass is wet.

Frames shall be thoroughly cleaned before application of glazing compound.

All glass in windows and doors, except wooden doors, shall be set in full beds of
glazing compound and pressed to a firm and even bearing without springing or forcing.
Glass in windows shall be held firmly in place with snap type glazing beads and in doors
with glazing channels or beads. Upon completion of construction work, all dirt, stains and
mis-applied glazing compound shall be removed, and all glass shall be thoroughly cleaned
on both faces.

7.4.43 Painting Work

7.4.43.1 General

Painting work shall be specified in clause “PAINTING WORK” in SECTION 1

“GENERAL PROVISIONS”, unless otherwise specified.

7.4.44 Interior Finish Work

7.4.44.1 General

This clause covers the performance of all works in connection with the following.

1) Vinyl asbestos tile

2) Acid proof vinyl tile
3) Vinyl base
4) Asbestos cement board
5) Acoustic board
6) Suspended ceiling
7) Ceiling Access
8) Insulation
9) Nameplate for rooms
10) Accordion partition
11) Toilet Partition

Prior to starting work, samples of interior finish materials and shop drawings shall
be submitted to the engineer for approval.

Types and sizes of nails, screws, bolts and quality of adhesives for fixing of interior
finish shall correspond and match to characteristics of the interior finish materials
and shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.

7.4.44.2 Fixing

397
 Fixing shall not commence until after drying and cleaning of the base.

Fixing method of specified materials shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer’s specification and shall be submitted to the engineer for approval.

In performing fixing, adequate precautions shall be provided to avoid off set, gap
and/or unevenness.

Suitable protection measures shall be provided on the interior finish until all
finishing works are completed.

7.4.44.3 Vinyl Asbestos Tile For Floor Finish

Sizes of vinyl asbestos tile shall be 300mm x 300mm x 3mm thick conforming to JIS
A 5705 or equivalent.

- The tiles shall be resistant to alkali, grease or oils.

- The vinyl tiles shall be bonded with asphalt adhesives.

7.4.44.4 Acid-Proof Vinyl Tile

The tiles shall be of acid proof type vinyl tile. The shape and dimensions shall be
the same as those of vinyl asbestos tile.

7.4.44.5 Vinyl Base

Vinyl base shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendation of vinyl asbestos

tile for flooring unless otherwise indicated, the height of the base shall be 100mm.

7.4.44.6 Asbestos Cement Board

Materials shall conform to “ Flexible Board” in JIS A 5403 (Asbestos Cement Sheets)
or equivalent.

When necessary, chamfering shall be carried out so as to facilitate the making of

joints and prevent their irregularity.

Hardware fixings shall be countersunk screws of stainless steel.

7.4.44.7 Acoustic Board For Ceiling

(1) The material shall be of incombustible rock wool and perforated . The thickness of
board shall be 12mm.

Acoustic boards shall be fixed on the base board with suitable adhesives or
nails so as to facilitate the making of joints and prevent their irregularity.

(2) Base Board for Ceiling

Base Board shall be plaster boards conforming to JIS A 6901 (Gypsum

Board) Grade 2 or equivalent.

398
 The thickness of board shall be 9mm.

7.4.44.8 Suspended Ceiling

The Contractor shall provide a light weight suspension system.

The system shall have the means to properly support the entire ceiling when it is in
place.

7.4.44.8.1 Main Runner

Main runners for all suspension system, unless otherwise specified, shall be of cold
rolled zinc bonded light channel steel (-38mm x 15mm x 1.6mm) conforming to JIS
G 3350.

The channel runner shall be installed 90cm on centers and suspended by steel bars
of 6mm dia. Hangers with level adjustable nuts at 90cm intervals.

The grid shall be leveled to within 1/500.

7.4.44.8.2 Cross Furring

Cross furring for ceiling shall be of cold rolled zinc bonded steel (M-23-mm
x23mm).

The M-furring shall be installed 30cm on centers and at right angles to the main
runner by wire clips. All M-furring shall be straight in alignment and hold so as to
enable level placement of plaster board on the suspension system.

7.4.44.8.3 Workmanship

The installation and workmanship shall be in strict accordance with the

manufacturer’s specifications and shall be made by skilled workmen.

7.4.44.8.4 Insulation

The contractor shall provide insulation boards under the roof slab.

The insulation boards shall be of 25mm thickness cemented excelsior boards

conforming to JIS A 5404 or equivalent.

The insulation boards shall be fixed to forms of slab concrete by using nail.

7.4.44.9 Ceiling Access

Ceiling accesses shall be located at suitable places for maintenance of the lighting
system and air conditioning ducts and shall be the size of 600m x 600mm.

The materials of the frame for reinforcement of access board shall be made of the
same materials as the ceiling, shall be of aluminum conforming to JIS G 4100.

7.4.44.10 Nameplate For Rooms

399
 Name plates shall be provided on all doors of rooms facing out doors, corridors and
other rooms.

The size, materials and name on the plates shall be designated by the engineer.

7.4.44.11 Accordion Partition

Accordion partition shall be provided as indicated in the drawings.

Accordion partition shall be of vinyl chloride leather, runner, hinge plate (JIS G
3141 Spec. 1.2mm galvanized), wire rods (JIS G 3505 or equivalent ) hanger rail
(JIS H 4100-6063, T5 or equivalent) frames, (HIS H 4100-6063, T5 or equivalent)
magnet, cushion rubbers and frame holder weight of partition 1m2 shall be 7 Kg or
less.

Panel shall be of plastic laminated board or steel and paper honeycomb.

Doors shall be of the same materials as panels and door frames shall be of
Aluminum Alloy Extruded shapes.

7.4.44.12 Toilet Partitions

In Case of common toilet:
Melamine coated plywood toilet partitions shall be furnished and installed at the
locations indicated in the drawings and as described herein.

Toilet partitions shall supported by stainless standing supporters anchored into

the floor and y head connection (galvanized square tubing).

Partitions shall be flush type, consisting of two sheets of waterproof plywood. The
plywood shall be coated with melamine. All partitions and screen shall be erected
plumb, level and in perfect alignment, with hardware fully equipped for proper
operation.

7.4.45 Sodding And Planting

7.4.45.1 Sodding

7.4.45.1.1 General

The Contractor shall furnish all work including labor equipment, materials,
construction, etc., in connection with sodding work.

7.4.45.1.2 Top Soil with Fertilizer

Stones, leaves, pieces of wood and all foreign matter shall be cleared away before
placement of the top soil.

Top soil shall be approved by the engineer. The soil shall be hauled and placed
when it is sufficiently dry for spreading.

Manure fertilizer shall be well rotted, unleashed, and free from sawdust, shaving,
refuse and / or harmful chemicals.

400
 All manure delivered shall be free from any degree of fly manifestation. All manure
fertilizer shall be spread and mixed with the top soil within 48 hours after arrival
on the site. Fly breeding prevention shall be by the use of insecticides and / or
larvaecides as approved by the engineer.

Areas to be sodded shall be prepared by placing top soil in the areas to the
required thickness.

The central part of such areas shall be made higher in comparison to the
surroundings to ensure proper drained.

7.4.45.1.3 Sod Planting

Sod planting shall be carried out where indicated in the drawings. Sod shall be
planted in firm contact with the bed, and planting work shall be carried out by
skilled workmen.

Density of sod planting shall be 70% or more of the area. After fixing the sheets of
turf, sandy soil shall be spread at the rate of 0.01-0.02m3 per square meter by
using a sieve.

7.4.45.1.4 Leveling of Ground

Before planting the sod, the contractor shall remove all foreign matter, such as
weeds, stones and pieces of wood and level the ground. The cost of the leveling of
the ground shall be included in the price of the grass planting.

7.4.45.1.5 Watering

Watering equipment of the type which prevents damage to finished surfaces shall
be used.

Should the sod become dry, it shall be watered so as to wet the transplanted sod
through to t he bottom and through to at least 5cm of the sod bed as well.

Additional watering shall be made as directed by the engineer.

7.4.45.1.6 Protection

Protection of seeded beds against traffic, human or otherwise, shall be provided by

erecting barricades immediately after work is completed and by placing warring
signs, markers etc. as directed by the engineer.

7.4.45.1.7 Maintenance

Sodden areas shall be maintained (watering, cutting, etc.) by the contractor until
taking over.

7.4.45.1.8 Clean Up

After the turning operation has been completed, the surface shall be cleared of all
tones larger than 2cm in diameter and of all roots, brush, trash or other matter that
may interfere with maintenance operations.
401
 Any paved area over which hauling operation is conducted shall be kept clean and
any top soil or other materials which may lie upon the paved surface shall be
promptly removed.

7.4.45.2 Planting

7.4.45.2.1 General

The Contractor shall furnish all work including labor, equipment, materials,
construction etc. in connection with planting work.

The Contractor shall submit colored pictures of all varieties of trees and flowers to
be planted to the engineer for approval.

7.4.45.2.2 Planting Concept

The number of plantings and specie of trees and shrubbery shall be as follows.

Trees : 25 trees
Shuddery : 38m2

Notes : Tree………………around 4.0m

Shrubbery…………less than 1.0m

Trees shall be planted so as to provide suitable shade.

The contractor shall survey the soil condition of the site for planting of the trees
and shrubbery stated above and shall then carry in soil suitable for the said plants.

7.4.45.2.3 Workmanship

Before plants are carried to the site, the contractor shall prune one-fifth of the
trees leaf areas but shall retain the natural form. Spray shall not cause wilting of
the leaves. Planting details are shown in the next sheets.

Ground Line to be the

Same as at the nursery Drawings Surveyor’s Flagging
Tape (white)

Fixing wire

Spread 120o Apart

50 x 100 x 900 Stake

Construct Earth Saucer with

100mm high

Backfill with Fertilizer

SHRUB PLANTING DETAILS

402
7.4.46 Plumbing Equipment Work

7.4.46.1 General

This clause covers the performance of all water supply, sewage and sanitary
equipment works to be executed according to the drawings and these
specifications.
(1) Water Supply Equipment
(2) Sewage and Air Vent Equipment
(3) Sanitary Equipment
(4) Clarification Tank Equipment

The contractor shall submit shop drawings of the fabricated items to the engineer
for approval. The shop drawings shall clearly show the details of fabrication,
installations, dimensions, sizes, operation, methods of anchoring and any other
pertinent details required for satisfactory installation and the contractor shall
submit the result of tests at designated date specified here-in-after.
The contractor shall provide the spare parts for three years normal operation,
unless otherwise specified.

7.4.46.2 Equipment and Material

The equipment, materials and accessories as specified herein shall be furnished

together with spare parts for three (3) years normal operation except as indicated
otherwise.

7.4.46.2.1 Drinking Water Tank

(1) Type of Drinking Water Tank

Drinking water tanks shall be of earthquake proof construction and consist of a

sandwich construction panel with facing materials comprising fiberglass
reinforced polyester (F.R.P.) mad from unsaturated polyester resin and glass fiber
of which the core shall be formed plastic.

(2) Materials

The unsaturated polyester resin to be used for the facing material shall be
waterproof and weather proof and harmless to humane health.

The fiberglass shall be made from non alkali fiberglass as stipulated in JIS R
346~3417.

The foamed plastic materials to be used form the core shall be rigid and
closed cell.

Any fillers and coloring agents shall be harmless to human heath.

(3) Accessories

The drinking water tank shall be provided with the following accessories.

403
 (a) Water inlet pipe connections ( F.R.P.) 1 set

(b) Water outlet pile connections (F.R.P) 1 set

(c) Drainage pipe connections (F.R.P) 1 set

(d) Connections for overflow hole and overflow

With insecticide nets (The insecticide nets shall
be made of plastic and the connections shall be
made of F.R.P) 1 set

(e) Air passage and air vent with insecticide nets

(The insecticide nets shall be make of plastic and
the passage ad vent shall be made of F.R.P) 1 set

(f) Locking type manhole ( Plastic Diameter : more

than 500mm) 1 set

(g) Reinforcing materials, support metals and stands

for elevated water tank. 1 set
(Rolled steel having properties in accordance with
JIS G3101 and with dimensions and shapes in
accordance with JIS G3192)

(h) Steel ladder 1 set

(i) Electrode mount

(j) Breakwater cover 1 set

(4) Shapes, Dimensions and Performance

The shapes and dimensions of the elevated water thank shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer’s specifications, and the performance shall be as specified in
“ List of Equipment” in the Design Drawing.

7.4.46.2.3 Pressure Pump Unit

(1) Type

Pressure pump unit shall be factory built and factory tested product.

The unit is consist of two pumps, small pressure tank, control panel, necessary
pipes, cable and pressure gauge these components are arranged on the common
steel frame.

(2) System Operations

(a) In initial operation, one pump starts by push button provided on control
panel and starts to supply water in the pressure tank. The pump stops
when the pressure rise of the pressure tank.

404
 (b) When by consumed water in the pressure tank the pressure in the
pressure tank fall the other pump starts to run and supply water to
pressure tank.

(c) All the signal of pumps START-STOP are controlled by a pressure switch
provided on pressure tank.

(d) Specifications

Quantity 1 set
Discharge bore 40 mm
Tank Capacity 30 liters
Pump Quantity 2 set/ unit
Type End section centrifugal motor closed coupled
type
End section centrifugal motor closed coupled type
Pump Speed 3,000rpm.
Materials Casing Cast Iron
Shaft Stainless Steel
Impeller Bronze
Motor Type Drip-proof, squirrel cage raptor
Voltage 400V
Frequency 50Hz.
Insulation Class E

(4) Accessories

Check Valve JIS 10kg/cm2 50-2 pieces

Gate Valve JS 10kg /cm2 50 – 4 pieces

7.4.46.2.4 Water Supply Pump

(1) Type

Water supply pump shall be submergible pump, using of submerged motor and
multistage centrifugal pump.

(2) Specifications

Liquid Fresh water or equivalent

Temperature 0-40 oC
Impeller Multi stage centrifugal
Shaft Seal Oil Seal
Bearing Sleeve bearing
Cashing Cast Iron.
Impeller Bronze
Shaft Stainless Steel
Flange Standard 10kg/ cm2 thin type
Motor Submerged canned type
Motor Insulation Class E

(3) Accessories
405
 10 meters water proof cable

7.4.46.2.5 Sterilizing Equipment

(1) Type

The sterilizing equipment shall be chlorine sterilizing type, including of

sterilizing chemical tank chemical feed pump, flow sensor, necessary pipes and
cables.

(2) Operation

The equipment shall be designed to inject the chemical in proportion to the flow
rate of drinking water, using a diaphragm pump.

(3) Specification

(a) Sterilizing Chemical Tank

Material : Polyethylene
Volume : 50 liter

(b) Chemical Feed Pump

Type Discharge variable diaphragm type

Output : 0.025KW
Phase : 1ø
Frequency : 50 Hz
Voltage : AC 220V

(c) Flow Sensor

Flow sensor shall distribute electric pulse in proportion to the flow rate.

(4) Accessories

(a) Chemical feed pipe; high pressure blade hose 6mmø ; 3 m length
(b) Chemical suction pipe; vinyl pipe 5 mmø ;1 m length
(c) Pump base ; 1 set (including anchor bolts)
(d) Injection valve ; made of PVC ; 1 set
(e) Cable ; CVV 2 mm2 – 2C ; 3 m
(d) Sterilizing Chemical ; 1 set

7.4.46.2.6 Water Filter

(1) Type

Up-light casing, cartridge filtering element type

(2) Materials and Specification

406
 Casing –stainless steel
Normal use maximum pressure – stainless steel
Filtering element – exchangeable plastic cartridge (reusable by water
washing type)

(3) Accessories

Spare filtering element - 1 set

Drain Cock - 1 set
Air Cock - 1 set
Hole- in-anchor - 1 set

7.4.46.2.7 Sanitary Equipment and Accessories

7.4.46.2.7.1 General

(1) All sanitary wares shall be of European standard high quality or equivalent to JIS
A 5207.

(2) All fittings for sanitary wares shall be in accordance with European standard
high quality JIS A 5514 or equivalent

(3) All accessories and visible sanitary wares such as faucets, flush valves and
flushing pipes shall be nickel chromium plated.

7.4.46.2.7.2 Water Closet (Western/European Style)

● All Sanitary Fittings & Fixtures should be European Made as well as approved
sample and design.

7.4.46.2.7.5 Wash Basing (For Lavatory)

(1) Wash Basin

V.C., 6.5 & wall hanging type

(2) Accessories

(a) Pillar cock (13mm)

(b) Angle type stop cock (13mm)
(c) Washer basin trap
(d) Back hanger
(e) Liquid soap holder (Vertical type 350 cc)

7.4.46.2.7.5 Wash Basin (For Battery Room)

(1) Wash Basin

V.C., 9.5 &

(2) Accessories
407
 (a) Pillar cock (13mm)
(b) Eye bath
(Vertical flexible type, 13mm)
(c) Angle type stop cock (13mm)
with water supply pipe
(d) Wash basing trap
(e) Back hanger
(f) Liquid soap holder (push button type, 360cc)

7.4.46.2.7.6 Service Sink

(1) V.C. with Back

(2) Accessories

(a) Sink faucet (20mm with feed seat) :

(b) Trap (S type) :
(c) Trap connection fixtures :
(d) Chain and stopper :
(e) Back hanger :
(f) Rim cover :

7.4.46.2.7.7 Mirror

The mirror shall be frame-less and moisture proof, and the glass for mirror shall be 5mm
thick and 360x455 mm in size, and in accordance with JISD 3202 (Float, Polished Plate
Glass) or equivalent BDS standard.

7.4.46.2.7.5 Water Cock and Similar Items

The main structures constituting the septic tank shall be made of FRP (fiberglass
reinforced plastic) having appropriate shape, dimensions and capacity. The structures
shall have sufficient strength against soil pressure, water pressure, load etc. and shall be of
a construction permitting easy inspection and cleaning. The functional requirements shall
be as follows.

(1) Treatment Capacity

(a) Accommodation treatment for : 5 persons

(b) Estimated daily average volume of waste : 1 m 3 / day
(c) BOD concentration in discharge water : 90 ppm.

(2) Tank Equipment

The septic tank shall consists of blower unit, pre treatment tank and main tank and the
equipment required for the tank shall be of the following specifications.

Blower Motor : 0.04 m3 / min, 0.2 KW, three Phase, 415V, 50 Hz x 1 set

408
Accessories : Distribution board and cable, air piping and required
pertinent.

(3) Accessories

Sterilization Chemical : 1 set

Sanitary appliances shall conform to the following standards:

BDS 1162: 1987 Specification for Ceramic Wash Basins and Pedestals;
BDS 1163 : 1987 Specification for Vitreous Sanitary Appliances,
Part-1, General Requirements;
Part-2, Specific Requirements for Water Closets;
Part-3, Specification Requirements for Urinal (Bowl
type);
Part-4, Specific Requirements for Foot Rest;
Part-5, Specific Requirements for Integrated Squatting
Pans.
ASHRA E90A-80 Energy Conservation in New Building Design;
ASHRA E 90B-75 Energy Conservation in New Building Design;
AWWA C700-77 Cold Water Meter Displacement Type;
AWWA C701-78 Cold Water Meter Turbine Type Class-I;
AWWA C702-78 Cold Water Meter Turbine Type Class-II;
AWWA C702-78 Cold Water Meter Compound Type,
BS 1125: 1987 Specification for WC Flushing Cisterns (Including Dual
Flash Cisterns and Flush Pipes);
BS 1244 Metal Sink for Domestic Purposes;
BS 1254:1981 Specification for C Seats (Plastics);
BS 1329:1974 Specification for Metal Hand Rinse Basins;
BS 1876: 1992 (1977) Specification for Automatic Flushing Cistern for Urinals

TREATMENT PROCESS
OF
SEPTIC TANK

7.4.46.2.8 Piping Materials and Pipe Fittings

7.4.46.2.8.1 Pipe

(1) Water Supply Pipes

The water supply pipe shall be the steel pipe lined with rigid PVC in
accordance with JWWA-K66.

(2) Drainage and Air Vent Pipes

The drainage and air vent pipes shall be the galvanized steel pipe in
accordance with JIS G 3442, tar-epoxy coating steel pipe in accordance with JIS
G3443 and HASS-210, and / or the centrifugal reinforced concrete pipe as
specified in JIS A 5303.

7.4.46.2.8.2 Pipe Joint

(1) Water Supply Pipe Joints

409
 The water supply pipe joints shall comprise screwed type and flange type.
Screwed type pipe joints shall be malleable cast iron pipe joints coated with plastic
in `accordance with JIS B2301. The flange type pipe joints shall be mad by welding
the flange to the end surface of the steel made joints as stipulated in JIS B 2211 or
JIS B2212, and further by lining the internal surface with rigid PVC of the same
specification as that used for lining for lining of the steel pipe.

(2) Drainage and Air Vent Pipe Joints

The drainage and air vent pipe joints shall be malleable cast iron pipe joint
in accordance with JIS B2301, screwed type drainage pipe joint in accordance with
JIS B23.3 and rigid PVC pipe joint accordance with JIS K6739.

7.4.46.2.8.3 Gate Valves

The gate valve shall be the 10 kg. Cm2 bronze screwed or flanged type gate valve as
stipulated in JIS B2023, and B2044.

7.4.46.2.8.4 Check Valves

The check valve shall be the 10 kg /cm2 bronze screwed or flanged swing check valve as
stipulated.

7.4.46.2.8.5 Flexible Joints

The flexible joint shall be of a bellows type and shall have sufficient flexibility and
resistance against pressure. The bellows and protective steel band shall be make of cold
rolled stainless steel plate / sheet (SUS – 304) as stipulated in JIS G4305.
The length of one flexible section shall be 400mm.

7.4.46.2.8.6 Strainers

The strainer shall be of a Y type. The case the nominal diameter is 50mmm or less, the
strainer shall be of a screwed type made of bronze, but in case the diameter is 65mm or
over, the strainer shall be of a flanged type made of cast iron.

The clean out plug shall be make of brass, and the strainer element shall be made of
stainless steel, one spare strainer element shall be furnished.

7.4.46.2.8.7 Drainage Pipe Fitting

(1) General

(a) The water sealing depth of trap shall be 50mm or more, and the effective area
of the drainage hole for strainer shall not be less than the sectional area of the
drainage pipe.

b) The nickel chromium plated section of the drainage pipe fittings shall be
equivalent to or higher than Class 1 or Grade 2 in JIS H 8617 (Electroplated
coating of Nickel and Chromium).

410
(2) Floor Drain Trap

The floor drain trap shall be made of cast iron and the strainer shall be nickel
chromium plated brass. The floor drain trap for asphalt waterproofed floor shall be
of a waterproofing type, but that for other floors shall be of an ordinary type.

(3) Floor Clean out

The floor clean out shall be of a screwed type made of brass having a nickel
chromium plating finish. The floor clean out for asphalt waterproofed floor shall be
of a waterproofing type, but that for other types of floors shall be of an ordinary
type.

(4) Under floor Clean out

The under floor clean out shall be of a screwed type made of bras.
(5) Drainage Pipe Fittings
The drainage pipe fittings shall be make of brass having a nickel chromium plating
finish and the chain and stopper shall be made of stainless steel.

7.4.46.2.8.8 Pipe Washers

The pipe washer shall be made of nickel chromium coated brass or stainless
steel.

7.4.46.2.8.9 Pipe Sleeves

The pipe sleeve shall be made of steel pipe or steel plate with a thickness of 0.4mm
or over (0.7mm or over in case the nominal diameter exceeds 200mm). However,
the non-water proofed floor pope sleeve to be used indoors shall be made of
laminated cardboard.

7.4.46.2.8.10 Pipe Support Fittings

(a) The pipe support fittings shall resistant to contraction and expansion, rolling etc. of
pipe and be of a construction having sufficient bearing strength against load of pipe
when liquid is contained inside. The materials to be used shall be in accordance
with JIS G 3101 (Roll Steel for General Structure).

All steel fittings shall be finished by galvanizing.

(b) The inserts shall have sufficient strength for supporting the pipe and shall have a
construction having suitable for connecting hangers etc. All inserts shall be made
of cast iron, press formed malleable cast iron or steel plate.

7.4.46.2.8.11 Cementing /Bonding Materials

(1) Thread Sealing Materials

(a) The threat sealing tapes shall be in accordance with JIS K6885 (unsintered
polytetrafluoroethylene tapes for thread sealing (raw tapes) , and shall

411
 neither be hazardous to human health nor cause adverse effects upon
drinking water.

b) The paste sealing agent shall not be affected by the liquid in pipe and shall
consist of contents applicable to the purpose of use. In case the agent is used
for sealing of piping for drinking water, it shall not be hazardous to health nor
cause any adverse effect upon drinking water.

(2) Packing(s)
The packing shall be in accordance with JIS K6353 (Rubber Goods for Water
Works Service) JIS R3453 (Compressed Asbestos Sheets) etc. and have sufficient
durability applicable to the respective quality of water, water pressure,
temperature etc.
(3) Caulking Lead

The caulking lead shall, in principle be the 5th Class of those

stipulated in JIS H2110 (Pig Lead).

(4) Caulking Hemp

The caulking hemp shall in principle be the jute of #130 single

thread which, tied in a bundle has a diameter or about 25mm.

7.4.46.2.8.12 Basin and Basin Cover

(1) General
(a) The materials for iron castings shall be equivalent to of higher than Grade 3
as stipulated in JIS G5501 (Gray Iron Castings)

b) The iron castings shall be baked with refined tars in accordance with JIS K
2473 (Processed Tars) to which more than 2% of linseed oil or drying oil is
mixed, or shall be cold painted with refined bituminous materials to which
synthetic resin finishes added.

(2) Invert Basin

(a) The invert basing shall be of a concrete construction and all visible portions
shall be finished by mortar, the basin shall be furnished with a cover and an
invert applicable to the piper diameter shall be provided on the bottom of the
basin.

(b) The cover shall be make of cast iron with chain, and shall be of an door proof
type able to withstand the weight of 2,500kg.

(3) Drainage Basin

(a) The drainage basin shall be a concrete construction and all visible portions
shall be finished by mortar coating. Moreover, the basin shall be furnished
with a cover.

(b) The cover shall be made of cast iron with chain and shall be of an door proof
type able to withstand the weight of 2,500kg.

412
7.4.46.3 Execution

7.4.46.3.1 Foundation Works

(1) The foundation shall be of reinforced concrete construction able to withstand the
weight of equipment and external forces and having sufficient bearing surface for
installation of equipment. The foundation shall be built on the floor or ground
having sufficient bearing capacity.
(2) Cement to be used shall be the ordinary Portland cement in accordance with JIS
R5210 (Portland Cement).

(3) Regarding the sizes of aggregate, the size of gravel shall be 25mm or less that of
crushed stone shall be 20mm or less and that of sand shall be 2.5mm or less.

7.4.46.3.2 Erection Works

7.4.46.3.2.1 Drinking Water Tank
(1) The drinking water tank shall be firmly fixed with anchor bolts shaving sufficient
strength so that the tank will not slide laterally nor move in any way due to
horizontal seismic force.

(2) The drinking water tank shall be installed on a horizontal plane on the foundation
having a steel made base and the foundation shall have an even bearing surface
against the load. The tank and the steel base shall be fixed firmly with anchor bolts.

(3) After installation, the tank shall be cleaned and washed with water. Then, the tank
shall be sterilized by using solution of hypochlorous acid, etc.

(4) The piping related to the tank shall be so supported that weight of the pipes not be
applied to the tank.

Flexible joints shall be provided for all respective connecting pipes to the water tank
except for the drain pipe and air vent pipe.

7.4.46.3.2.2 Wall Hanging Type Electric Water Heater

The wall hanging type electric water heater shall be set firmly on the wall by using
expansion joints.

7.4.46.3.2.3 Sanitary Ware, Accessories and Fittings

(1) General

(a) In case wall hanging fittings are fixed on a concrete wall or brick wall,
expansion bolts shall, in principle be used.

(b) In case a metal panel or lightweight steel framed board wall is set, steel plate
and worked angle materials or hard wood patch shall be fixed to the sanitary
ware in advance.

(c) In case a part of the sanitary ware is embedded in concrete, the portion of the
sanitary ware that comes into contact with concrete or mortar shall be

413
 covered with asphalt having a thickness of 3mm or over. However, the
bottom contact surface of sanitary ware, shall be filled with sand.

(2) Water Closet (Western/European Style)

(a) The upper end of the stool shall be set horizontally in place after deciding the
precise setting positions.

(b) Prior to connecting the stool to the drain lead pipe the connecting end of the
lead pipe shall be flared up to the diameter of the flange, and after inserting
the non drink sealing materials between the external surface of the flange
and connecting end the stool shall be connected to the drain lead pipe by nuts
fastened from above by flange fittings and bolts. The plate thickness of the
external end of the flared lead pipe shall not be less than 2mm.

Moreover, the end of the flange for the lead pipe to be connected to the stool shall
be supported sufficiently with hangers etc. so that no load of drain pipe, etc, will
act directly on the stool.

(3) Wash Basin

(a) The bracket or back hanger/s shall be firmly set in place, and the sash basins
shall be fixed carefully so that the upper surface of the basing will be kept
horizontal without exhibiting looseness. In order to eliminate leakage of
water, heat resistant non drying sealing materials shall be filled around drain
holes of the basins and around openings between the drain pipe fittings.

b) The setting height of the basins shall be 800mm (approximate) from the floor
surface to the upper front end of the basins.

(4) Service Sink

The trap shall be set in place without any misalignment, and the connection of the
sink to the drain pipe shall be carried out in accordance with the procedures for
connection of stool in (2). Setting of back hanger(s) and connection between drain
holes of the SINK and drain pipe fittings shall carried out I accordance with the
procedures for the above wash basins in (4).

(5) Water Cock

The water cock shall be fixed firmly after precise centering by fully taking into
account the convenience of use and harmony witty the surrounding facilities.

A sufficient space for the spout shall be provided between the end of the spout of
water cock and the flood level rim of the drain receptacle.

(6) Mirror

The setting height of the upper end of the mirror shall 1,800 mm form the floor
surface.

7.4.46.3.2.4 Septic Tank

414
 Reinforced concrete foundation shall be provided and the tank shall be firmly fixed
to the foundation so as to withstand upward water pressure.

7.4.46.3.3 Piping

7.4.46.3.3.1 Water Supply And Water Hydrant Piping

(1) General

(a) Prior to execution of piping work, detailed study shall be made on the
relationship between other piping and equipment, and all positions for pipe
laying shall be decided by taking into account the precise slope of the
respective piping.

In the case where piping is laid inside a building, setting of the pipe support
fittings and embedding of pipe sleeves shall be carried out without any delay
and in accordance with progress of the work.

(b) The flange joints shall be inserted for all main piping at appropriate intervals
in order to ensure easy removal of such piping.

(c) In the case where any piping is branched from the main piping, T-joints shall
be used.

(d) As air release valve shall be provided at the dead air space portion in piping,
and a mud discharge valve shall be provided at the portion where mud is
collected. The size of the mud discharge valve shall be the diameter of the
related pipe, provided that the size of the valve shall be 25mm in case the
nominal diameter of the pipe exceeds 25mm.

(e) In case any anti-sweat covering is not provided for piping, pipe washers shall
be fixed to all portions of piping that penetrate through ceiling, floors, walls
etc and is visible from the outside.

(f) Any openings between the piping that penetrates through fire service areas
etc. shall be filled with rock-wool heat insulation or other non-combustible
materials.

(g) In case where a pipe sleeve is used at a place requiring water tightness, lead
caulking shall be provided in the opening between the sleeve and pipe.

(h) In the case where any steel pipe and similar materials are laid under the
ground, such pipe shall be protected against corrosion by either a double
coating of coat tart or a double winding of corrosion proof vinyl tapes (JIS Z
1901 “Protective Polyvinyl Chloride Tapes).

(i) Any repair of steel pipe, cast iron pipe and lead pipe with caulking shall be
prohibited.

(j) After completion of piping work, the inside of the piping shall be cleaned by
water pressure on the occasion of hydrostatic test of the piping. In the case of

415
 piping for drinking water. The piping shall be sterilized until free residual
chlorine of 1.2ppm or over has been detected at the end of the piping.

(2) Gradient
In the case of horizontally running pipe, the up feed pipe shall have an upward
slope and the down feed pipe shall have a downward slope. In principle, the
gradient shall be 1/250.

(3) Support Pitch

(a) The support pitch of the horizontally running pipes shall, in principle, be in
accordance with the values in the following table and, wherever necessary ,
all bent sections and branching sections shall be supported. In the case where
steel pipes or similar pipes are supported with hangers, a steady rest shall be
provided for each horizontally running pipe in order to avoid looseness of the
pipe due to movement at the time of earthquake.

(b) A steady rest shall be provided for indoor vertical pipe at least at one spot on
every floor.

Table-12.1 : Maximum Support Pitch of Water Supply Pipe

Nominal pipe 20 or less 25 – 40 50 – 80 100 – 150 200 or more

diameter
Support pitch 1.8 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.0

7.4.46.3.3.2 Drainage and Air Vent Pipe

(1) General
(a) All horizontally branched drainage pipes, etc. shall be combined nearly
horizontally at an acute angel of less than 45o.

(b) In case bent lead pipe is used, the pipe shall be carefully fabricated so as not
to impair its roundness, and no branch drainage pipe shall be taken for
protection.

(c) No waste water shall be discharged directly form the form the following
equipment.

- Air conditioners
- Drinking water tank
- Pumps

(d) Indirect drainage pipe shall be opened while maintaining a space of over
twice the diameter of the pipe from the drain receptacle and flood level rim.
In case an obstacle is foreseen in providing the above opening, appropriate
measures shall be taken for protection.
(e) The lowest portion of the vertical drainage pipe shall be fixed with a support
stand where necessary.
(f) Any air vent pipe shall be run out vertically or at an angle of less than 45o
from the horizontally branched drainage pipe and in no case shall the pipe be
run out horizontally.

416
 (g) In the case where air vent pipes on floors are connected to vertical air vent
pipes, the said pipes shall be connected at the place over 150mm from the
flood level rim of the related equipment. Vertical air vent valves shall be
connected to the stack vents in accordance with the above procedures.

(h) In case a hump pipe is buried, a pit shall be excavated from the lower ad of
the pipe to depth of about 100mm in case the nominal diameter of the pipe is
300mm. After unscrewed crushed stone, unscreened gravel or pike sand has
been laid and compacted, the pipe shall be laid. However, the portions where
joints are provided shall be excavated further if necessary.

Initial back filling of pipe shall be carried out up to the center line of the
pipe to ensure immovability, and after sufficient compaction, the pipe shall
finally be buried.

Provisions other than those described in this paragraph shall be in

accordance with the general provisions in 12.3.4.1.

(2) Gradient
The gradient of horizontally running drainage pipes said inside a building shall be
1/ 100. All air vent pipes shall have an upward slope facing the vertical pipes and
shall be free from reverse slope and unevenness.

(3) Support Pitch

(a) The support pitch of steel pipes shall be in accordance with the applicable
provisions in Table 12.1.

(b) Horizontally running cast iron pipes shall be supported at a pitch of less
than 1.6m, and the deformed fittings to be connected shall be supported at
a pit of less tan 0.6m, respectively.

7.4.46.3.3.3

(1) Connection of Pipes

(a) All pipes shall be carefully cut at a right angle against the axial center of the
pipes so as to avoid any deformation of the sections, and the cut end shall be
finished smoothly.

(b) All pipes shall be connected after removing any chips, dust and other foreign
matter and after confirming that all such foreign matter has been completely
removed form inside the pipes.
(c) In case piping work is temporarily suspended, all pipes shall be sufficiently
protected to avoid entry of any foreign matter.

(2) Water Supply Piping

(a) No water supply piping shall in principle, be connected according to an

insertion system unless specified otherwise.
(b) Epoxy resin or synthetic rubber rust inhibitors shall be sufficiently coated
over the end face of threaded portions and the bottom of threaded portions of
joints. All rust inhibitors to be applied for any drinking water piping shall be

417
 applied for any drinking water piping shall be harmless to human health and
shall cause no harmful effect to the quality of drinking water.

(3) Drainage and Air Vent Piping

(a) Prior to connecting the galvanized steel pipes, the pipes shall be correctly
threaded so that a slight clearance is provided between the end face of pipes
and the recess of joints in order to obtain the tapered threaded pipe portion.
Then, the steel pipes shall be screwed tightly into the joints.

(b) All case iron pipes shall be connected by using rubber rings. In this case, the
pipes shall be inserted into the rubber rings until the end of spigot comes into
contact with the bottom of socket. Then, the rubber rings that have been
inserted into a position near the end of spigot in advance shall be inserted
into the pipes carefully so that no twisting will occur in the opening between
the socket and spigot. Then, the rubber rings shall be set in close contact with
the pipes while uniformly fastening the tap bolts and nuts using a junk ring.

(c) Al rigid PVC pipe shall be carefully connected by a cold working method so
that no step will occur between the connected pipes. The flow of water in the
piping shall be smooth and uninterrupted.

(d) All centrifugal reinforced concrete pipes shall be connected by using collars.

After both ends of the pipes have achieved tight contact with each other at
the central part of the collar and carefully set in place to ensure proper
alignment in the surrounding opening, stiff consistency mortar shall be
placed into the opening. In this case, all cement and water inside the pipes
shall be thoroughly removed. In case one end of a pipe is made into a socket
form after connecting a collar to the end with mortar, mortar shall be placed
about 10mm away from the pipe end.

7.4.46.3.4 Antisweat Covering

7.4.46.3.4.1 Materials

The anti sweat covering materials, exterior and auxiliary materials shall be as specified in
Table below.

Table - 12.2.1 : Antisweat Covering Materials, Exterior and Auxiliary Materials (1/2)

Classification of materials : Specifications

Heat insulation materials

Glass wool heat materials : The glass wool heat insulation tubes shall be in
accordance with JIS A9505 (Glass wool heat
insulation materials) or equivalent

Exterior Materials
Galvanized Sheets : The galvanized sheets shall be in accordance with
grade 2 in JIS G3302 (Galvanized Sheets.) The
standard thickness of original sheet shall be 0.3mm
when the sheet is used for insulating pipes, valves,

418
 etc. with an outside diameter of 250mm or less, but
in other cases, the thickness shall be 0.4mm.

Cotton Cloth : The weight of cotton cloth shall be 115g or more

per 1m2 In case, the cloth is used for pipe, etc. it
shall be cut into appropriate widths of a tape form.

Glass Cloth : The glass cloth shall be non-alkali plain glass sloth
obtained by processing EP211C into a non-fraying
type as stipulated in JIS R3414 (Glass Cloth).

PVC Type (Vinyl Tape) : The PVC tape shall be non-tacky tape of medium
gloss with a thickness of 1.2mm in accordance with
JIS Z1901 (Protective Polyvinyl Chloride Tapes).

Waterproofing Temp cloth (Linen) : The waterproofing linen shall be Hossian cloth No.
7 as stipulated in JIS L 2405, over one side of
which blown asphalt, as stimulated in JIS K2207
(Petroleum Asphalt), has been coated. The linen
shall be cut into a tape form of an appropriate
width in case it is used for waterproofing of pipes
etc.

Table -12.2.2 : Antisweat Covering Materials, Exterior and Auxiliary Materials (2/2)

Classification of materials : Specifications

Auxiliary Materials
Molding base paper : The base paper shall be molding base paper of 370g
more per m2.

Asphalt roofing : The asphalt roofing shall be the one manufactured

in accordance with JIS A6006 (Asphalt Roofing
Felts) (Fiber Base) (Self-Finished Bitumen Felts),
and more than 17kg per roll (21 m2).

Iron Wire : The iron wire shall be the one as stipulated in JIS
G3532 (Barbed Wires) which has been galvanized.

Steel Frame : In principle, the steel frame shall be the one made
of steel sheet with a standard thickness of the
original sheet of 0.4mm or more as stipulated in JIS
G 3302 (Galvanized Sheets)

Adhesive PVC Tape : The adhesive PVC tape shall be in accordance with
JIS Z1525 (Pressure Sensitive Adhesive
Polyvinyl Chloride Tapes) with a thickness of
0.2mm.

Band and toothed lock washer : The band toothed lock washer shall have a
thickness of 1.2mm or more, and shall be made
from the materials in accordance with JIS G4305
(Cold Rolled Stainless Steel Strips), or JIS H3201
419
 (Brass Plates). However, the ones made from brass
shall be finished by nickel chromium Plating.

The width of band shall be 20mm.

Adhesive : In principle, acrylic emulsion adhesive shall be used

for adhesion of glass cloth, glass filament mat
and aluminum glands cloth. Vinyl acetate adhesive
shall be used for adhesion of formed polystyrene
heat insulation materials, and the chloroprene
rubber adhesive for adhesion of rivets.
7.4.46.3.4.2 Execution

(1) General

(a) The thickness of insulation shall be that of the main insulation material and
shall not include the thickness of exterior materials and auxiliary materials.

(b) The clearance between mutual insulation materials shall be as small as possible,
and in no case shall joints for overlapping sections be provided on the same
line.

(c) Band and tube shaped covering shall be tightly bound with galvanized wire.
Bands shall be bound at a 50mm pitch and tubes shall have two windings at
least three places per tube. All overlapping portions and joints of tubes shall be
joined together by using adhesive tapes.

(d) In principle, the width of tape winding shall be 15mm or more, and taint of
other overlapping portions shall be 35mm or more. In the case of water-proof
linen wrapping, galvanized wire shall be wound twice over the wrapping at an
interval of 2m, then asphalt primer shall be coated twice of the windings.

(e) Tapes shall be wounded starting form the lower part and then proceed to the
upper part of piping. Should there be any possibility of deviation in case of
polyvinyl chloride tape, etc., such deviation shall be eliminated by using
adhesive tapes etc.

(f) The lagging plate over the insulation of the pipe shall e carried out in abed over
form, and that of the vent section shall be carried out into a fan form.

(g) Shake-proof washers shall be attached to the ends of heat insulation sections
for indoor piping, and bands shall be attached to branch and bent sections of
the piping.

(h) The ends of heat insulation sections shall be protected as required depending
upon the types and purposes of heat insulation materials to be used.

(2) Materials and Sequence of Works according to the types of heat insulation

The materials and the sequence of work according to the types of heat
insulation are as indicated in Table 12.3.

420
 Table - 12.3

Type of Covering Work Materials and Sequence of work Remarks

(I) Glass wool heat insulation materials

A 1. Heat Insulation tube Outdoor

exposed piping
2. Galvanized Wire
3. Rough Paper
4. Cotton Cloth

B 1. Heat Insulation Tube Inside Ceiling

and
pipe Shaft
2. Galvanized Wire
3. PVC Tape
(3) Thickness of the Heat Insulation (Coverings)

The thickness of the insulation shall be as indication in Table 12.4.

Table - 12.4 : Thickness of Insulation

(Unit: mm)

Nominal dia. Type 10 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100

Remarks

I water supply drainage piping 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 Glass

Wool

(4) Heat Insulation (Coverings) for water supply pipes (including joints and valves)

(a) The materials and sequence of works according to the types of work shall be
in accordance with Table 12.3.

(b) The thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with Table -12.4.

Table 12.5

Place of application Materials and sequence of Thickness of

work Insulation
Indoor exposed piping a I
Piping inside ceiling and pipe a I
shaft

(5) Anti sweat Covering

(a) The materials and the sequence of work according to the types of work shall
be in accordance with Table 12.3.

(b) The thickness of the insulation (Covering ) shall be in accordance with Table
12.4.
421
 Table - 12.6

Place of application Materials and sequence of Thickness of

work insulation
Indoor exposed piping a I
Piping inside ceiling and pipe b I
shaft

(6) No insulation shall be provided for the following pipes, valves and flanges.

(a) Devices and piping 9including drainage pipe on the floor below sink) which
are considered accessories for sanitary wares.

(b) Piping for water supply and drainage underground or inside concrete.

(c) Water supply piping laid indoors (excluding the piping to be laid inside
ceilings and highly humid areas).

(d) Hot water supply piping valves and flanges .

(e) Out door exposed drainage piping.

(f) Air vent piping (excluding the portion of 100mm from the branch point of
drainage pipe).

(g) Overflow pipes and drain pipes for various tanks and similar equipment.

7.4.46.3.5 Painting Work

(1) General

All respective equipment and materials, except the following, shall be painted.
Equipment and materials, except those requiring corrosion proof painting to be
buried.

(2) Painting
The types of paints and frequency of painting of portions to be painted shall, in
principle, be as specified in Table 12.7.

7.4.46.3.6 Civil Works

Items other than those specified in the following shall be in accordance with the
specification/s for “Reinforced Concrete Works”

(1) The pit for piping under the ground shall be so excavated that the required
gradient can be kept precisely and the piping can be connected easily.

(2) The foundation and pit for tanks, etc. shall be excavated sufficiently taking
into account the space for assembly and removal of forms.

422
Table - 12.7.1 : Types of Paints and Frequency of Painting of Respective
Portions (1/2)

Portions to be painted Frequency of painting Remarks

Equipment Conditions Primer Inter Face
and Painting Coating Coating
members
Supports, Exposed Ready- 2 1 1 The primer
racks and mixed coating shall be
similar paint or anti-corrosive
fittings aluminum pain
(Other than paint
galvanized
materials
Canceled Anti- 1 - 1
corrosive
Heat- Exposed Ready- 1 1 1 The primer
insulate mixed coating shall be
exterior paint sealer coating
(cotton and
cloth)
Canceled Sealer 1 - 1
coat
Hear- Canceled Synthetic 1 1 1 After the glass
insulated resin cloth has been
exterior emulsion precisely bonded
(Glass paint and made
cloth) sufficiently dry,
synthetic resin
emulsion paint as
stipulated in JIS K
5663 shall be
used.
Exposed Polyvinyl 1 1 1 After the glass
chloride cloth has been
resin precisely bonded
enamel and made
sufficiently dry,
emulsion putty
shall be applied
twice and after
surface finish
with paper file,
resin enamel
shall be applied.

423
Table - 12.7.2 : Types of Paints and Frequency of Painting of Respective Portions
(2/2)

Portions to be painted Frequency of painting Remarks

Types of paints
Equipment and Conditions Primer Inter Face
members painting canting Coating
Heat-insulate Exposed Ready- 1 1 1 The primer
exterior(Galvanized mixed coating
iron plate/board) paint shall be
anti-
corrosive
paint
2nd
Coating
Lined steel pipes Exposed Ready- 2 1 1 The primer
and coated steel mixed coating
pipes including shall anti-
joints corrosive
paint.
Canceled Anti- 1 - 1 Excluding
corrosive resin-
paint coating
joints.

7.4.46.4 Test

7.4.46.4.1 Hot Water Storage Tank

The hydrostatic test shall be carried out for the instantaneous type electric water heater.

The hydrostatic test pressure shall be 17.5 kg/cm2 (shortest)

7.4.46.4.2 Water Supply Pipes

The hydrostatic test of water supply pipes shall be carried out prior to coating
work during piping work or prior to shielding and backfilling or after completion
of piping. The minimum pressure retention time shall be 60 minutes.

The test pressure of piping below elevated water tanks shall be twice the pressure
equivalent to the static head.

7.4.46.4.3 Drainage Pipes

The water filling test of the drainage pipes shall be carried out prior to coating
work during piping work or prior shielding and back filling or after completion of
piping. The water passage test of sanitary drain pipes shall be carried out after
sanitary wares etc. have been attached. The minimum water retention time in case
of water filling test shall be 30minutes or more and that in case of the water
passage test shall e 15 minutes or more.

7.4.46.4.4 Test of Raw Water

424
 After the completion of the water receiving tank and water suction pump, the
contractor shall test the quantity and quality of the raw water collected form the
well.

The test shall be in accordance with article 4 (Water Quality Standard) of water
service law of Japan.

The test items shall be as follows :

- Cyanide
- Mercury
- Organism Mercury
- Organism Phosphorus
- Lead
- Chromium
- Arsenic
- Fluorine
- Cadmium
- Nitrogen of nitric acid
- Colon bacilli’s

The results of the tests shall be submitted to the Engineer.

7.4.46.4.5 Test of Treated Water

After the completion of drinking water system, the contractor shall test the quality
of the treated water collected from the cocks. The test shall be in accordance with
article 4 (Water Quality Standard) of water Service Law of Japan.

The test items shall be as follows :

- Turgidity
- Chromatizitat
- Stench
- Taste
- Potential of hydrogen
- Organic matter
- Nitrogen of ammonia
- Chlorine Iron
- Evaporation
- Solvable material
- Total hardness
- Iron
- Manganese
- Copper
- Zinc

The result of the test shall be submitted to the Engineer.

7.4.47 Air Conditioning and Ventilation Equipment Work

7.4.47.1 General
425
7.4.47.1.1 Scope

This clause covers the performance of all air conditioning and ventilation
equipment works in accordance with the drawings and these specifications.

(1) Air Conditioning Equipment

(2) Ventilation Equipment

The contractor shall submit shop drawings of fabricated items to the engineer for
approval. The shop drawings shall clearly show the details of fabrication,
installations, dimensions, sizes, operation, methods of anchoring and any other
pertinent details required for satisfactory installation. The contractor shall submit
the result of tests at designated date specified.

7.4.47.1.2 Design Basis of Air Conditioning and Ventilation System

(1) Outdoor

Maximum Temperature 36o C Dry Bulb

Minimum Temperature 28o C Wet bulb
Minimum Temperature 12o C Dry bulb

(2) Indoor
Temperature
25o C Dry bulb Control room
27o C Dry bulb Otherm rooms
(summer)
22o C Dry bulb Other rooms
(winter)

Humidity 60% Control room

(Relative humidity) Other rooms

7.4.47.2 Equipment And Materials

The equipment, materials and accessories as specified herein shall be furnished

together with spare parts for three (3) years normal operation except as indicate
otherwise.

7.4.47.2.1 Package Air Conditioning Units

(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install the package air conditioning units as
shown in the drawings. Package air conditioning units shall be factory built and
factory tested products.

(2) In this work, tow types of package air conditioning units shall be installed.

(3) Air heat source heat pump package air conditioner.

(a) Type Light weight, up right floor standing type.

(b) Cabinet Synthetic resin paint baked on finished plates.
426
 (c)Insulation Insulation shall be installed to prevent sweating and to muffle
sound, using glass wool on polywreten form.

(d) Condenser Air source heat pump condenser.

(e) Compressor Compressor (s) shall be serviceable hermetic type equipped

with suitable rubber vibration isolators crank case heaters,
liquid line strainer and suction and discharge shut off values.

(f) Air Filter Permanent washable polyvinyl chloride.

(g) Heat Exchanger Multi pass cross fined tube.

(h) Connections With flare nut or companion flange for field piping.

(i) Outdoor Fan Propeller Fan.

(j) Evaporator Multi pass cross finned tube

(k) Evaporator Fan

Multi-brade centrifugal Fan
AC- 1 (see drawings) direct drive
AC- 2 (see drawings) belt drive

(l) Applicable power supplies

AC 3-phase 400V 50Hz.

(m) Operation switch

3-position push button types and cooling heating selection switch

(Ventilating operation, cooling operation or heating operation.

(n) High Pressure Switch

This switch cuts out the operation of compressor when the discharge
pressure exceeds the setting.

(o) Accessories

Spare Parts

Refrigerant - for 1 change

V. belt - 1 each

7.4.47.2.2 Fans

(1) The Contractor shall furnish and install the fans as shown in the drawings. Fans
shall be factory tested products.

427
(2) The capacities of the fans shall be in accordance with fan schedules as shown.
Unless otherwise directed, the fans shall conform to the layouts as shown the
drawings.

(3) All fans shall be statistically and dynamically balanced to avoid vibration and shall
have blades to secure quiet efficient operation.

7.4.47.2.3 Ducts

Duct materials shall conform to the followings:

Galvanized steel iron sheet

Shape Steel
Bolt
Nut
Gasket for flange

7.4.47.2.4 Refrigerant Pipe Materials and Accessories

(1) The pipes shall be of copper. The material shall be as specified in JIS H3603
(Phosphorus deoxidized copper seamless pipes and tubes) and the dimensions
shall be as specified in ASTM B8858L (Hard materials).

(2) The joints shall be molded products made from the above materials and they shall
pass the manufacturer’s standards. In locations where removal is required, flair or
flanged joints shall be provided.

7.4.47.3 Installation Work

7.4.47.3.1 Foundation Work

(a) Foundation shall be of reinforced concrete construction and shall be able to

withstand the weight of equipment and external forces by having sufficient bearing
face. Moreover, the foundation shall be constructed on floor or ground having
sufficient bearing capacity.
(b) Cement to be used for foundation shall be the standard Portland Portland cement
in accordance with BDS 232 ( Portland Cement).

(c) In principle, the size of aggregate shall be the following values

Gravel : 25mm or less

Groused Stone : 20mm or less
Sand : 2.5mm or less

Provisions other than those specified above shall be in accordance with the
specifications for “Reinforced Concrete Work”

7.4.47.3.2 Installation Work for Equipment(S)

All equipment’s shall be firmly secured to the floor so that the equipment will o
move or be damaged due to earthquakes, etc.

7.4.47.3.3 Duct Work

428
 (1) The Contractor shall furnish and install all sheet metal ducts for supply, return,
fresh air and exhaust systems as shown in the drawings.

(2) Ducts shall be constructed to standards outlined in the latest HASS Guide. Ducts
shall be constructed of galvanized steel gauges as shown Table 13.1.

Table - 13.1

Duct Size Metal Gauge Thickness

Less than 450 #26 0.5mm
455 ~ 750 #24 0.6mm
755 ~ 1500 #22 0.8mm
1501 ~ 2250 #20 1.0mm
More than 2260 #18 1.2mm

(3) The contractor shall clean all dirt and rubbish from the interior and exterior of all
ducts and other accessories prior to erection.

(4) A flexible connection shall be made between the fan discharge and the adjoining
duct work.

(5) Low-velocity ducts shall be installed as follows :

Table - 13.2 : Duct Flanges

Bolt Rivet
Thickness Shape Max. Pitch Dia. Pitch Dia. Pitch
Steel
0.5mm 25x25x3 3.6m 8.0mm 100mm 4.5mm 65mm
0.6 25x25x3 3.6 8.0 100 4.5 65
0.8 30x30x3 2.7 8.0 100 4.5 65
1.0 40x40x3 1.8 8.0 100 4.5 65
1.2 40x40x5 1.8 8.0 100 4.5 65
Table - 13.4 : Duct Hangers

Thickness Shape Steel Steel Rod Dia. Max. Pitch

0.5mm 25 x 25 x 3 9mm 3.0m
0.6 25 x 25 x 3 9 3.0
0.8 30 x 30 x 3 9 3.0
1.0 40 x 40 x 3 9 3.0
1.2 40 x 40 x 5 9 3.0

(6) Spiral Duct

(a) The straight portion of the spiral duct shall be fabricated, using a strip of
the galvanized steel sheet. The nominal size of the spiral duct shall be based
on the inside diameter. The tolerance in inside diameter shall be +0 ~ +2
mm in reference to the nominal size. The thickness of the iron strips to be
used shall be as indicated in Table 13.5.

Table - 13.5 : Thickness of Spiral Duct

429
 Air Duct Diameter (mm) Thickness (Gauge No.) of iron strips
Below 200 0.5mm (#26)
Over 200, but below 600 0.6mm (#24)
Over 600, but below 800 0.8mm (#22)
Over 800, but below 1,000 1.0mm (#20)

The pitch of the side seaming at the straight portion of the spiral duct shall
be as indicated in Table 13.6 and the folding width shall be over 6mm.

Table - 13.6 : Side Seaming pitch of spiral Ducts

Air Duct diameter (mm) Seam Pitch (mm)

Below 100 Below 100
Below 1,000 Below 150

(b) The jointing of one spiral duct to another shall be preformed by applying as
many side seaming as required, using galvanized steel strips or welding as
many steel strips arranged properly between spiral joints.
The galvanized steel strips shall be applied, in advance, with rust preventive
paint on both inner and outer sides.

The nominal size of spiral duct joints shall be based on the outside diameter
of the spiral duct joints, and the tolerance in nominal size shall be as
indicated in Table 13.7.

Table - 13.7 : Tolerance in spiral duct Joint Diameter

Nominal Size (mm) Tolerance (mm)

Below 600 - 1.5 - 2.5
Over 600, but below 1,00 - 2.0 - 4.0

The thickness of the galvanized steel strips to be used for the joint between
spiral air ducts shall be as indicated in Table 13.8.

Table - 13.8 : Thickness of Galvanized iron Strips and Steel Strips

Nominal Size (mm) Thickness (Gauge No)

Below 200 0.6mm (#24)
Over 200, but below 600 0.8mm (#22)
Over 600, but below 800 1.0mm (#20)
Over 800, but below 1,000 1.2mm (#18)

The overlapping width between steel strips used for the spiral duct joint
shall be as indicate in Table 13.9.

Table : 13.9 : Overlapping width between iron strips or steel strips

Nominal Size (mm) Overlapping Width (mm)

Below 125 60
Over 125, but below 300 80
Over 300, but below 1,000 100

430
 (c) Spiral duct reinforcement

The reinforcement for spiral ducts shall be as per Table 13.10.

Table : 13.10 : Reinforcement for Spiral ducts

Rivet

Air Duct Diameter Reinforcing Mounting Dia. Pitch

(mm) angle steel Interval (mm) (mm) (mm)
Over 600, but below 30 x 30 x 3 Below 2,400 4.5 65
750
Over 750, but below 30 x 30 x 3 Below 1,800 4.5 65
1.200
Over 1,210 40 x 40 x 3 Below 1,200 4.5 65

(7) Air duct support

(a) The hangers and supports for the rectangular air duct shall be made of shape
steel or gar steel. The shapes and dimensions of the hangers and supports
shall be as per Table 13.4

(b) The hangers and the supports for the circulars hanger shall be as per Table
13.12.

Table - 13.12 : Shape and dimensions of the hangers and supports for the circular
air duct

Hanger Support

Dia. Of Flat Max. Flat Max.

circular air steel mounting Steel mounting
duct (mm) interval (mm) Interval (mm)
Below 1,500 25x3 Bar steel with a 2,700 25 x 3 2,700
size of 25x3 or
9mmø bar steel
Over 1,500 30x3 Bar steel with a 2,700 30 x 3 2.700
size of 30x3 or
12mmø bar steel

(8) A canvas sheet shall be used for the connection between the air duct and the air
blower or between the air duct and the air exhauster so that the vibrations from
the air blower or the air exhauster may not propagate to others.

(9) Where the air duct is install penetrating through a wall, a through part both on the
was side and the duct side shall be finished to a good appearance.

(10) The checking access port shall be such as will allow the case of opening and closing
and as will permit air leakage. The access port cover shall be made of the
galvanized sheet iron having the same thickness as that of the sheet iron for the air
431
 duct. Particularly, the access port cover at a location where the air from the air
conditioner flows shall have insulating material to the thickness of more than
25mm.

(11) After, the installation, the interior of the air duct shall be cleaned thoroughly and
check if there is no interference in the air flow.

(12) Outdoor air intake and exhaust louver

The outdoor intake louver and exhaust louver shall be made of the stainless steel
sheet having the thickness of more than no. 20 gauge.

The effective area of the louvers shall be over 40%, and those louvers, which are
installed at such locations where they are exposed to weathers, shall be designed
and manufactured to be of such a construction as will prevent rain water from
getting inside.

(13) Diffusers

(a) The diffusers to be used shall have a good appearance, and they shall by no
means be allowed to generate noises during system operation. In addition,
the diffusers shall be designed to be capable of providing normal
performance.

(b) Universal Type diffuser

The mounting frame of the diffusers of this type shall be fabricated with
steel or iron plate having a thickness of more than 1.0mm, and it shall have
such a construction as the frame can be mounted to the air duct by means of
bolts.

The diffuser blades shall permit the case of adjustment.

The shutter to be employed to the universal type diffuser shall be of the

double access door type.

Unless otherwise specified, the diffuser of any type shall be made of

galvanized steel sheet and shall be finished with melamine resin baked on the
surface of each diffuser unit.

(c) The anemodiffusers to be used shall be used shall have sufficient air diffusing
performance and they shall be provide with a damper and an air flow
informing device.

7.4.47.3.4 Piping

(1) Cooling medium piping

(a) The insides of the pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried before use.

After cleaning the ends of the pipes shall be sealed by an appropriate

method to prevent an foreign matter from entering during the piping work.

432
 (b) The pipes shall be normally cut perpendicular to the pipe center. The cutting
shall be such that the pipe diameter is not decreased. The outer surfaces of
connecting pipes and the inner surfaces of joints shall be polished sufficiently
with a flux brush, etc. After the outer surface of the pipes is coated with flux,
they shall be carefully inserted in the joints and fit perfectly while heating.

(c) The discharge and intake gas tubes shall have a minimum downward
gradient of at least 1.200.

(d) The piping shall be performed in consideration of expansion and contraction.

(e) In flanged joints, a packing of a thickness within 1.5 mm as specified in JIS

R3453 (Compressed asbestos sheet) shall be used.

(f) A by- pass between the pipe diameter and the same diameter shall be
provided in cooling medium filters, automatic expansion valves, cooling
medium solenoid valves, etc.

(g) The pitch for hoist and support fixture’s shall be as shown in table 13.3.4.

Table - 13.13 : Copper Pipe support pitch

Pipe support pitch

Nominal
Diameter 6 8 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 65 75
100
B

Max. 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.5 3.0
3.0
Pitch
(m)

(h) To prevent the transmission of vibrations, anti-vibration joints, and anti

vibration hoist and support fixtures shall be used.

7.4.47.3.5 Insulation Work

7.4.47.3.5.1 Materials

(a) The contractor shall furnish and install all insulation materials required for
ductwork as shown in the Drawings.

(b) Specifications for heat insulation coverings.

Table - 13.14

Classification of heat Specifications

insulation covering
Heat insulation Glass wool heat The glass wool heat insulation board shall
materials insulation be shall be No. 2 40K stipulated in JIS A
433
 9505 ( Glass Wool Heat Insulation
Material ).
Exterior materials Glass cloth The glass clothes shall be the non-alkali
plain weave clothes stipulated in EP 21C in
JIS R3414 (Glass clothes) which have been
made free from fraying.
Aluminum The glass clothes shall be the flat weave
clothes made of aluminum foil with a
thickness of 0.02 mm or over stipulated in
JIS H 4160 (Aluminum and aluminum Alloy
foils), to which the plain weave clothes
made of 13 micron glass yarn and 200
single filament yarns according to JIS
R3414 with a unit acrylic resin adhesive.

Table - 13.15

Classification of Specifications
heat insulation
coverings
Auxiliary Glass filament The glass filament mat shall be made of glass
Rivet yarn of materials 18 micron of less according to
JIS R 3413 and have a unit mat weight of 45 g of
over per m2. The rivet shall be made of the
washer made of galvanized steel plate to which a
nail with a length to be changed depending upon
the thickness of heat insulation materials is built
in, or the copper plated nail for spot welding,
and have a strength sufficient to bear the
insulation materials.
Steel frame In principle, the steel frame shall be made of
steel plate with a standard plate thickness of 0.4
mm or over as stipulated in JIS G 3302
(Galvanized sheets)
Adhesive In principle, the acrylic emulsion adhesive shall
be used for bonding of glass clothes, glass
filament mat and

aluminum glass clothes, and the chloroprene

rubber adhesive shall be used for bonding of
rivet.
(3) Materials and procedures depending upon the types of heat insulation work.

Classification of insulation work Order of insulation work

Insulation of exposed interior 1. Rivetting
2. Heat insulation board with a thickness of
50mm
3. Corner patch and seal-up
4. Adhesive

434
 5. Glass clothes
Indoor concealing 1. Rivet
2. Heat insulation board with a thickness of
25 mm
3. Corner patch and seal-up
4. Adhesive
5. Aluminum Glass clothes

Note : The galvanized steel plate with a thickness of 0.2 mm or over shall be used
for corner patch, and the glass filament mat shall be used for seal- up.

7.5.47.3.5.2 Execution

(1) The mutual clearance between the respective insulation shall not include the
thickness of exterior materials or auxiliary materials.

(2) The mutual clearance between the respective insulation shall as small possible,
and no overlapping joints shall be provided on the same line.

(3) In principle, two rivets shall be driven into the lower and side surfaces and one
rivet into the upper surface of the air duct at intervals of 300mm each.

(4) The portion or air duct penetrating through the floor shall be covered with
stainless steel from the floor surface to height of up to 150mm in order to protect
the insulation

(5) The outermost ends of the insulation shall be protected as required depending
upon the materials and purpose of heat insulation.

(6) Heat insulation work for inspection doors, etc. of equipment requiring such
insulation shall be carried out so as not to cause hindrance during opening and
closing of such doors, etc. nor deterioration of the said heat insulation.

7.4.47.3.6 Painting Work

7.4.47.3.6.1 General

(1) All equipment and materials, except for the following , shall be painted.

(a) Surfaces other than galvanized surfaces

(b) Galvanized portions which are normally concealed

(2) All equipment and materials requiring inspection shall be painted after inspection.

7.4.47.3.6.2 Painting

The types of paints and frequency of painting of the respective portions

shall, in principle, be as specified in Clause 11.3.5 Unless specified in this table, such
painting shall be carried out according to similar items taking into account the work
purposes, materials and other conditions.

7.4.47.5 Tests
435
7.4.47.5.1 Piping
(1) The refrigerator shall pass the air-tightness and pressure withstand tests.

(2) The refrigerators shall be test operated in the factory and careful investigations
concerning performance, noise, vibrations, etc. shall be performed. After it is
confirmed that the tests have been passed, the refrigerator shall be shipped after
applying rust-proof paint.

(3) After installation, the refrigerators shall be test operated.

(4) After completing of the refrigerant piping, an air-tightness test shall be performed
using carbon dioxide, nitrogen, dry air, etc. After the air-tightness test, the entire
system shall under-go high vacuum evaporation to remove all water. After this
dehydration treatment, a cooling medium leak test shall be performed according to
the inspection of the Engineer.

7.4.47.5.2 Duct

After completing the air duct installation, the air duct system shall have and air blow test
in the presence of the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, all of equipment, materials
and execution shall be as stipulated in “Indoor Lighting System”.

7.4.48 Secondary-Electrical Wiring

7.4.48.1 General

(1) The contractor shall furnish and install the control panels, switches, receptacles,
electrical conduit pipes, wires, outlet box for secondary wiring equipment as
shown in the Drawings.

(2) Motors used in cooling equipment, blowers pumps, etc. shall all be included in this
equipment work.

(3) Unless otherwise specified, the wire conduit and wiring work in the primary side
shall all be performed as separate electrical equipment work. However :

(a) Secondary side wire conduit and wiring work for cooling equipment
operating panels and below shall all be part of the work of the equipment
concerned.

(b) Wire conduit and wiring work related to the automatic control of air
conditioning equipment shall all be part of the work of the equipment
concerned.

(c) Insufficient water level alarm equipment for water supply tanks, etc. shall
be a part of the work of the equipment concerned.

(4) Unless otherwise indicated in this clause, all of equipment, materials and execution
shall be as stipulated in “Indoor Lightening Plug and Telephone Piping System”

7.4.48.2 Equipment And Materials

436
(1) Cables shall be as shown in Table - 14.1.

Table - 14.1(1)

Items Code No Type Letter

Control cable JIS C3401 Polyvinyl Chloride

CVV

Insulated and Sheathed control

Cables

Cross-linked JIS C3606 Cross-linked

Polyethylene CV
Polyethylene Insulated
Cable
Cable

(2) The electrical equipment and materials shall meet the standards of the Japanese
Electrical manufacturers Association (JEM) in addition to these specifications.

(3) Motors

(a) Unless otherwise specified, AC motors shall meet the specifications in Table
14.2.

Motor Specifications JIS 4201 Low-Voltage

Three Phase Induction
Motor
Voltage 400 G
Insulation class E

(b) Three-phase induction motors shall be those using the starting equipment in
Table 14.3. as standard.

Table 14.3

Area Refrigerating Blowers

Capacity(kw) equipment
Motor Starting system Motor Starting system
37 or more High voltage Resister High voltage Resister
wound type wound type
15 ~ 37 Low voltage Y-A Low voltage Y-A
special special squirrel
11 ~ 15 Low voltage Y-A Low voltage Y-A
special squirrel special squirrel
5.5 ~ 7.5 Low voltage Direct starting Low voltage Direct starting
special squirrel special squirrel

37 or less Low voltage Direct starting Low voltage Direct starting

normal type normal type
437
7.4.48.3 Test

Upon completion of the work, the whole system shall be proved acceptable by
inspections carried out by the Engineer.

7.4.49 Lighting, Plug and Telephone Piping System

Principle of Lighting
The essential features of an efficient lighting system are :
- visual comfort through adequate illumination of the working surface,
prevention of glare, and avoidance of shadows,
- ease of maintenance.
The design of a lighting system shall involve :
a) careful planning of the brightness and colour pattern within both the working
areas and the surroundings so that attention is drawn naturally to the
important areas, detail is seen quickly and accurately, and the room is free from
any sense of gloom or monotony,
b) use of directional lighting to assist perception of task detail,
c) controlling direct and reflected glare from light sources to eliminate visual
discomfort,
d) minimizing flicker from certain types of lamps and paying attention to the
colour rendering properties of the light,
e) the correlation of lighting throughout the building to prevent excessive
differences between adjacent areas, so as to reduce the risk of accidents, and
f) the installation of emergency lighting systems, where necessary.

7.4.49.1 Scope of Work

Concealed Electrical wiring by Eastern/BRB cable or equivalent
• European Made MK type Gang switch, socket MCB etc
• Provision for Internet facilities system, Telephone & Intercom wiring.
• Sufficient Earthlings facilities.
• To be used LED Light.
The scope of work under the contract includes supply and installation of lighting fixtures,
lighting panel, switches, receptacles, electrical conduit pipes, wires, outlet boxes for
telephones, internet, dish cable and other necessary accessories for the indoor lighting
system.

7.4.49.2 Design Conditions

7.4.49.2.1 Illumination Level

1) The illumination levels for each room shall be as shown in Table - 15.2.1.

Table - 15.2.1

Name of Room Normal condition Emergency condition

Control 500 lx 50 lx
Office 300 lx 10 lx
Relay 300 lx 10 lx
PLC/ SCADA 500 lx 50 lx
Conference 300 lx 10 lx
Battery 100 lx 5 lx
Rectifier Set 100 lx 5 lx

438
 Corridor 100 lx 5 lx
Pump Control 100 lx 5 lx
Cable Control 50 lx 5 lx
B/G 200 lx 5 lx
Lavatory 100 lx -
Kettle 100 lx -

(2) Setting Height

(a) Lighting fixtures
Refer to Design Drawings.
(b) Switches
1.25 meters above the floor level, unless otherwise specified.
(c) Receptacles
0.3 meters above the floor level, unless otherwise specified.

(3) Power source voltage

(a) For lighting panel
AC 3 phase 4 wires 415/230 V 50 Hz
DC 2 Wires 110 V
(b) For normal lighting, convenient outlet and ventilation equipment.
AC 1 phase 2 wires 220 V 50 Hz
(c) For emergency lighting
DC 2 Wires 110 V

7.4.49.3 System Description

(1) AC, DC Source and earthling shall be supplied from the primary side.
(2) Standard LED Lamps shall be provided for the control room and all miscellaneous
rooms, and shall be designed to be manually activated by means of the switches at
the entrance of each room. The lamps in the corridor, Toilet room, office and all
electrical rooms shall be sensor based which will automatically switched “ON” and
off.
(3) LED Lamp/Incandescent lamps shall be provided in all parts of the control building
to serve as emergency lighting. The lamps in the control room, corridor, office and
all electrical rooms shall be automatically switched “ON” in case of AC failure.

(4) Outlet boxes for telephones shall be provided for the control room, together with
piping from the outlet boxes to the cable tray in the cable control room. The sitting
of the telephones and wiring shall be included in the electrical scope of work of Lot
IV.

(5) Exit sign light

The exit sign lights shall be mounted above the all exits of the control
building.

(6) Spare parts, as indicated below, will be supplied for three (3) years normal
operation.

7.4.49.4 Equipment’s and Materials

7.4.49.4.1 Wires
Wires shall be as shown in the Table 15.4.1

439
 Table - 15.4.1
ItemCode No. Type Letter
Vinyl wire JIS C3307 600 Grade Polyvinyl
IV
Chloride Insulated Wires
Heat- resistant JIS C3317 Heat- resistant vinyl
HIV
Insulated wire

HIV wires shall be used in the DC circuit.

7.4.49.4.2 Wire Connectors

Wire connectors for indoor wiring shall be in accordance with JIS C2810 or equivalent
BDS

7.4.49.4.3 Metal Conduit and Fittings

Metal conduit and fittings shall be in accordance with the Table 15.4.3, and the conduit
shall be of heavy gauge type.

Table 15.4.3

Item Code No. Designation

Conduit JIS C8305 Rigid

metal Conduit

( heavy gauge)
Coupling JIS C8330 Coupling
for Rigid Metal Conduit
Normal Bend JIS C8330
Elbows for Rigid Metal conduit
Bushing JIS C8331 Bushing
for Rigid metal Conduit
Locknut JIS C8333
Locknuts for Rigid Metal Conduit
Saddle JIS C8334
Saddles for Rigid Metal Conduit
Universal JIS C8335 Universal Fittings for Rigid
metal

Conduit
Outlet Box JIS C8337 Out
Boxes for Rigid metal Conduit
Switch Box JIS C8337 Switch
Boxes for Rigid Metal Conduit
Concrete Box JIS C8338 Concrete
Boxes for Rigid Metal Conduit
Box Cover JIS C8339 Box
covers for Rigid Metal Conduit

440
Insulated Bushing JIS C8347 Insulated
Bushing for rigid Metal
Conduit

7.4.49.4.4 Pull Boxes

Pull boxes shall be made of steel and coated with protective paint, and wherever exposed
to view, shall be coated with a finish paint of a color approval by the Engineer.

7.4.49.4.5 Wiring Devices

Wiring devices shall be in accordance with the Table-15.4.5

Table-15.4.6

Items Code No.

Designation

Fluorescent Lamp JIS C7601 Fluorescent Lamps for

General Lighting Service

Rapid Start JIS C7602 Instantaneous Start Hot cathode

Discharge Fluorescent
Lamps (40 W type)

Glow Starter JIS C7607 Glow starters for fluorescent Lamps (Less
than 40 W type

Fluorescent fixture JIS C8106 Lighting Fitting for

Fluorescent Lamps

ballasts for Fluorescent lamps

Incandescent lamp JIS C7501 Double Filament Lamps

for General Use

7.4.49.4.6 Lighting Fixtures

(a) In Principle shapes and dimensions shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
Catalogs and shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

(b) Lighting fixtures for emergency use shall be as specified by BCJ (Articles rated by
the Building Center of Japan), or approved equal.

7.4.49.4.7 Lighting Panel

Shapes, electrical characteristics, types capacities of circuit breakers, and the

system of operation shall be in accordance with the Drawings.

The panel shall made of steel plate with a thickness of more than 1.6mm (body)
and 2.3 mm (door) respectively.

441
 The finish shall be painted with a color approved by the Engineer. Catalogs and
shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

7.4.49.4.8 Over Current Protectors

Molded case circuit breakers and residual current protective devices shall be of European
Standard used in the lighting panel

7.4.49.5 Indoor Wiring

7.4.49.5.1 Rigid Metal Conduit

(1) Installation

(a) Imbedding or conduit laying shall be so made that the strength and
structure of the building is not affected.

(b) Cut ends of conduit shall be neatly and smoothly finished by instrument
such as a reamer.

(c) Conduit shall be bent at a radius of more than six (6) times the internal
diameter of the conduit conduit running between outlets and pulling boxes
shall not have more than the equivalent of four 90o bends.

(d) A pull box or junction box shall be installed to protect conduit exceeding 30
meters in length and at the points required.

(e) In general, a switch or outlet box shall be used at all points where a switch,
receptacle (socket) or lighting fixture is to be provided.

(f) Where low voltage metal conduit is enclose in proximity to or crosses

communication wiring, metallic water pipe or gas pipe, the work shall be so
done that direct contact is avoided.

(2) Connection of conduits

Conduit and fittings shall be perfectly connected, both physically and electrically,
and the conductor resistance shall be preferably dept within 2 ohms between
grounding conductor and the end metal conduit.

(3) Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes

(a) Shape and type of these boxes shall suit the place of installation and a steel
plate or more than 1.2mm in thickness shall be used.
(b) Boxes shall have adequate dimensions well matching the number or
conduits connected and the condition of connecting or pulling wires.
(c) Where the box is covered or concealed in structural material, access to the
box shall be made possible to facilitate inspection.

(4) Installation of feeder conduits

(a) Exposed main conduit shall, in principle, run parallel with wall or ceiling.

442
 (b) Metals supports for conduit in concrete building shall have a proper fixing
insert or bolt previously embedded in the concrete.
(c) Spacing between metal inserts or bolts to support conduit shall in principle,
be approximately 2 meters.

(5) Painting, Protection and cleaning of Conduit

(a) Where the plated or painted surface of conduit, metal support or box has
peeled off, it shall be touched up with protective paint.
(b) Conduit shall be sufficiently protected against entry of moisture, water,
dust etc. and the cut end of conduit shall be bush be capped, wood plugged
or covered with rag, etc. Whenever concrete work is in progress.
(c) Conduit and boxes shall be well cleaned and the conductivity checked after
removal of the forms.

(6) Wire Pulling

(a) Connection of wire shall not be made inside metal conduit. Connection shall
be made in metal box, junction box or distribution board.
(b) Wire shall be pulled through conduit after the inside of conduit has been
cleaned and when each of conduit has been capped with bushing. Cleaning
shall be performed in such a manner that walls, ceilings, etc. around the
conduit are not stained or spoiled in any way.
(c) In all cases, all wires stemming from one circuit shall be accommodated in
the same conduit for A.C circuit work, except where a balanced condition is
electro-magnetically attained by accommodating both lines of the same
polarity within the same conduit.

7.4.49.6 Installations

7.4.49.6.1 Installation of Lighting Fixtures

(a) Heavy lighting fixtures shall be firmly supported using inserts, studs or bolts,
attachments and if necessary shall be provided with a means to prevent swinging
by using wood screw, etc.
(b) Lighting fixtures shall be installed horizontally or vertically in a workmanlike
manner and shall be so located as to not interfere with inspection of related
equipment.

7.4.49.6.2 Installation of Lighting Panel

Lighting panel shall be installed firmly on walls or other surfaces in a workmanlike

manner, and shall be so located as to not interfere with inspection of related equipment.

7.4.49.6.3 Test

A performance test shall be made be made after installation of equipment has been
completed.

7.4.49.7 Grounding

7.4.49.7.1 Grounding Resistance

Grounding resistance shall be 10 ohms on less, unless otherwise specified.

443
7.4.49.7.2 Electrical Works to Be Grounded

Except for specific instances, all electrical that the respective grounding resistance values
are kept at specified values throughout the year despite seasonal changes.

(a) No grounding is required for steel base; metal box and steel frame of equipment is
operated on less than AC150 V (Voltage to ground) and is installed at a dry location.
(b) Metal conduit and metal accessories
(c) Metal enclosure accommodating the discharge lamp ballast and the metal parts or
a discharge lamp lighting fixture, except where grounding is required and/or when
so directed by Engineer, shall be grounded.

7.4.49.7.3 Sign, Signal & Annotation:

● Integrated Design of Different kind of Indicators like- Acrylic Sign Board, LED Sign
Board, Neon Sign Board, Reception Sign Board, Safety Sign, PVC Letters, Glow Sign
Board, Customized Display Boards, Overhead Signage, Metal Nameplates, Commercial Sign
Boards, Outdoor Signs, Electronic Sign Boards etc. should be provided in the design &
construction.
● Digital LED Signboard with the features of excellent visibility (even in daylight); Good
quality at reasonable price and light weight; Simple installation, Safe to touch and clean;
Changing color for attracting attention; Extremely low power consumption.
● Should be provided the Accessories like Adaptor and chains etc.
LED display screen shall be minimum 1.0 square meter. Shall be Compatible with IP65.
Shall be installed at the front side wall of the building
Environmentally friendly display it ensures lower power consumption and longer lifetime.

444
7.5.1 Scope of Supply
This specification covers the design, manufacture, inspection, testing at the manufacturer’s
works and erection and commissioning of a Substation Automation System described in the
following sections, to control and operate the 33/11 kV AIS substation.
This describes the facilities required to provide the control of plant and system within a
substation and outlines the facilities to be provided on site, interface requirements and
performance criteria.
The Substation Automation System (SA) shall comprise full station and bay protection,
control, monitoring and communication functions. It shall enable local station control via
PC by means of a human machine interface (HMI) and control software package and
perform the necessary system control and data acquisition functions. It shall include
communication gateway to inter- bay-bus, intelligent electronic devices (IED) for bay
control and protection as shown in the enclosed general system architecture drawing.
The communication gateway shall secure control from and information flow to remote
network control centres. The inter-bay bus, configured as a star connection (via star
couplers) shall provide independent station-to-bay and bay-to-bay data exchange. The bay
level intelligent electronic devices (IED) for protection and control shall be directly
connected to the instrument transformer without any interposing equipment and perform
control, protection, and monitoring functions subject to a detail proposal approved by the
Engineer.
The IED’s for protection and control functions shall maintain high availability and
reliability together with bay independence through extensive self-supervision and state-of-
the-art technology.
The system shall be capable of having its computing power increased in the future by the
addition of additional computing systems.
The system design life shall be not less than 20 years. The Automation system shall be from
USA/UK/EU/Canada/Japan.
The bidder shall provide (i) IEC 61850 compliance report for the offered system with IEDs
and
(ii) interoperability test report for the offered system with ABB, Siemens, Alstom and SEL
IEDs with IEC 61850 protocol from any UCA approved system verification and validation
center along with the bid document.
The capacity of the SA system shall be sufficient for the ultimate development of the
substation as set out in the project requirements.
The SA supplier shall demonstrate that the system proposed has been designed, installed
and commissioned in accordance with relevant international standards and the specification
shall provide evidence of satisfactory service experience during the past 5 years.
The contractor shall provide the installation software of the substation automation system.
Installation, testing and commissioning of substation automation system shall be done by
the automation Engineer(s) of the substation automation manufacturer(s).
The software architecture and the database structure shall be finalized with the Purchaser.
The facitlities shall be incorporated in order to access the database from the backend by the
authorised user of the Purchaser. Object oriented technology shall be used in the software
development.

445
The Source Codes of the software standard documentation shall be handed over to the
Purchaser. The standard database like Oracle, MySQL, SQL shall be used.
Cyber Security of this system shall be built in with the system. The objective of cyber
security is to protect information and physical assets from damages caused by theft ,
corruption or natural disasters while allowing the information and assets to remain
accessible and productive to employer. All potential causes of cyber attacks need to be
considered when employing a defense in depth approach.
7.5.2 Compliance with standards
For design and type testing of the protection and control equipment, the following standards
shall be applicable:
General List of Specifications
IEC255: Electrical Relays
IEC60038: IEC Standard voltages
IEC68068: Environmental testing
IEC60664: Insulation co-ordination for equipment within low-voltage systems
IEC61850: Standard for Substation integrated protection and control data
communication
Detailed List of Specifications
IEC255-6: Measuring relays and protection equipment
IEC255-7: Test and measurement procedures for electro mechanicalall-or-
nothing relays
IEC68-2-3: Test Ca: Damp heat steady state
IEC68-2-30: Test D band guidance; Damp heat, cyclic
IEC255-5: Insulation tests for electrical relays
IEC255-22: Electrical disturbance tests for measuring relays and
protection equipment:
IEC255-22-1: 1 MHz burst disturbance test
IEC255-22-2: Electrostatic discharge test
IEC255-22-3: Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance test
IEC255-22-4: Fast transient disturbance test
IEC255-11: Interruptions to and alternating component(ripple)in D.C. auxiliary
energizing quantity to measuring relays
IEC255-6: Measuring relays and protection equipment
IEC255-21: Vibration, shock, bump and seismic tests on measuring relays and
protection equipment:
IEC255-21-1: Vibration tests (sinusoidal)
IEC255-21-2: Shock and bump tests
IEC255-21-3: Seismic tests
IEC255-0-20: Contact performance of electrical relays
IEC870-3class2: Digital I/O, Analogue I/O dielectric tests
IEC801-5/class3: Digital I/O Surge withstand test
IEC870-3/class2: Radio interference test
IEC801-4/4: Transient fast burst test
IEC801-2/4: Static discharge
IEC801-3/3: Electromagnetic fields

446
7.5.3 Design and Operating Requirements

7.5.3.1 General
The SA shall be suitable for operation and monitoring of the complete substation including
future extensions. The offered products shall be suitable for efficient and reliable operation
and maintenance support of the substations.
The SA system shall be state-of-the art design suitable for operation in high voltage
substation environment, follow the latest engineering practice, ensure long term
compatibility requirements and continuity of equipment supply and the safety of the
operating staff.
Protection is an integral part of the SA system and protective relays shall be directly
connected to the interbay bus in order to provide unrestricted access to all data and
information stored in the relays and for changing protection parameters from the remote
control location.
Failure behaviour of the hardware and software functions shall be addressed and related
diagnostic and rectification working instructions shall be provided. The system performance,
if failure of communication to main and redundant computer base workstations, central
functions, data model, control and protection IED’s, station and bay level communication
shall also be clearly addressed (shall be provided by the manufacturer).
The substation can also be controlled from Local Control Panel. The following
modes of operation shall be possible
(a) Emergency operation of breaker, disconnector, earthing switch etc. from the Local
Panel.
(b) Emergency operation of breaker, disconnector, earthing switch etc. from the backup
mimic panel located in the control room on the 1st floor/Ground floor. Both bay
controller guided and unguided operation shall be possible from this panel.
(c) Normal operation of breaker, disconnector, earthing switch etc. from the Station
Automation System HMI located in the1st floor/Ground floor.

SAS Architecture
DotMatrix Master/Backup GPS Master/Backup LaserColor Engineering
Event workstation Master workstation Printer workstation
UPS
Printer Clock 447
7.5.3.2 Modes of Operation
The operator stations and specified remote users shall have following operational modes,
each password protected. Monitoring Ability to select graphic displays and lists for
viewing only. No capability to acknowledge alarms, complete controls or select items
for inclusion in program functions.
Control: Selection of graphic display and lists. Able to acknowledge station and
SA alarms, complete controls, dressing etc. associate with normal real
time of the control of the substation.

SA Engineering: Provides all the SA monitoring functions, together with online

facilities for program/database/format modifications and checking
without the possibility o f executing power system controls.

System Manager: Provides access to all system functions, including assignment

of passwords and system maintenance activities.

448
In addition a facility to provide access to the numerical Protection relays, change /
modify relay settings & AVR parameters and Fault Recorder data shall be provided
A series of passwords shall be personally assigned to operators in each of the above
categories.
It shall be possible for substation operators to log on either of the substation workstation
and to be allocated the appropriate mode of operation relevant to the
password. SA System Engineering work and access to the protection relay and
disturbance reorder information shall generally be carried out at the Engineering
workstation or remote master station.
All the workstation and the system database shall function as a system. It shall not be
necessary for example to acknowledge an alarm at more than one workstation.
Similarly, an operator manual entry applied at a workstation shall be immediately
displayed at other workstations where this data is presented.
7.5.3.3 Project Specifications
Specific functions required and boundary conditions of the SA are detailed elsewhere in this
specification. The project specific drawings are attached:
• Overall singleline diagram
• General system architecture
• Location of substation buildings
• Control and operation principles
• Protection schemes
7.5.3.4 Vendor’s Experience and Local Support
Only experienced and technically capable manufacturers with minimum 5 years experience
in design and supply of control and protection systems for electricity transmission and
distribution applications will be accepted. Preferred manufactures will be those who have
experience in deliveries of the full scope of station automation systems and services. This
experience has to be substantiated by means of reference installations being in service under
similar environmental conditions for at least 5 years. In order to assess the vendor’s
experience with similar projects, the vendor is required to submit the following with his Bid:
• Technical design specifications and description of SA
• Catalogues and brochures of equipment and devices offered
• Reference list
The vendor shall assure for long-term maintenance and availability of spares. Moreover, a
guarantee shall be submitted for the availability of spares during the lifetime of the SA
equipment (not less than 10 years).
7.5.4 General System Design
The system shall be so designed that personnel without any background in microprocessor-
based technology can operate the system easily after they have been provided with some
basic training.
System control from the substation control room will be with the help of an Industrial
Computer (PC) operated by a mouse. The following HMI (Human Machine Interface)
functions shall be provided:

449
 • Acquisition and plausibility checkof switchgear status
• Control of switchgear
• Remote checking of device parameters and activation of alternative parameter sets
in the connected protective relays
• Display of actual measured values(U,I, P, Q, f, PF)
• Display of Energy (kWh and kVarh export and import)
• Display of events
• Display of alarms
• Display of trends
• Sequence control functions
• Disturbance records and fault location
• System self-supervision
• Hard copy printing
Maintenance, modification or extension of components shall not require a shutdown of the
whole station automation system. Self-monitoring of single components, modules and
communication shall be incorporated to increase the availability of the equipment while
minimising maintenance time to repair.
The data exchange between the electronic devices shall take place via an inter-bay bus
using IEC
61850 protocol. The high speed bus shall permit peer-to-peer communication
between the connected devices with democratic access. The entire station shall be
controlled and supervised from the station level PC. It shall also be possible to control,
monitor and protect each individual bay from the respective bay level equipment for
maintenance purposes or if the communication to a particular bay should fail. Clear
control priorities shall prevent initiation of operation of a single switch at the same
time from more than one of the various control levels viz., station level, bay level
or switchgear (apparatus) level. The priority shall always be with the lowest
enabled control level.

Each bay control and protection unit shall be independent of each other and its
functioning shall not be affected by any fault occurring in any of the other bay control
and protection units of the station.
The SA shall contain the following main functional parts:

• Human Machine Interface (HMI) with process database

• Gateway function for remote control via an industrial grade hardware
• Dial in facility/laptop workstation for protection relay parameterization, disturbance
analysis and SA system fault analysis.
• Data exchange between the different system components via high-speed bus
• Bay level devices for control, monitoring and protection
• Bay oriented local control and protection panels with mimic inserts
• Facility for emergency operation of all the switchgear, i f bay controller fails.
(Key/ master key system.)

The main process information of the station shall be stored in distributed databases. The
system shall be based on a de-centralized concept with bay oriented distributed

450
intelligence for safety and availability reasons. Functions shall be decentralized, object
oriented and located as close as possible to the process.
The substation monitoring/protection system shall supply data for maintenance, repair and
remote parameter setting of protection and control devices in the switchyard.
In the event of a fault in the electrical network, the substation monitoring shall provide a
quick means for collecting the relevant and critical data of the fault.
The monitoring system shall be suitable for the supervision and monitoring of all the
secondary (lED) and primary devices in a substation including future extensions.
Maintenance, modification or extension of components shall not cause a shut-off of the
whole station monitoring system. Self-monitoring of single components, modules and
communication shall be incorporated to increase the availability and the reliability of the
equipment and minimize maintenance.
It shall be possible to access all protection and control devices for reading the terminal
parameters (settings). The setting of parameters or activation of parameter sets shall be
restricted by password to the protection engineer.

Flexibility and Scalability

The offered SA system concept shall be flexible and shall permit future extensions to be
realised easily. Preference will be given to those suppliers who are in a position to
provide protection and control devices which can be freely adapted to the application
functions required.
7.5.6 System Hardware

7.5.6.1 Operator Station

The main operator station shall be based on an industrial PC hardware and high-resolution
full- graphics screen with manufacturers standard type tested software operating under
Windows NT environment. An Event printer and a Hard Copy printer shall be
connected via a printer server and LAN to the operator station. The CPU shall be
installed in the automation panel.
Dual station computers shall control the SA system and drive the work stations and other
peripherals. One of the station computers shall operate the system in the “on line” state
while the other acts as a “redundant hot standby”. The standby computer shall be
continuously updated and shall immediately take over the SA system duties without
interruption or transfer mechanism should the on line operator workstation fail.
Disturbance Records shall be analysed using the installed Disturbance Record
Analysis programmes. The Disturbance Records will be collected, over the
interbay bus, from the connected IED’s by the system software. All necessary
facilities shall be provided to allow the system to perform spontaneous upload of
Disturbance data or upload them in a pre- programmed manner. The Event
printer shall print events spontaneously as they arrive in the main operator station.
Each uploaded data report file shall be reported on one line that shall contain:
• The event date and time
• The name of the event object
• A descriptive text
451
 • The state or value of the object
The information fields above shall be structured in columns for maximum readability.
The hard copy printer shall permit printing of any picture (or part thereof) from the station
level PC’s using easily accessible commands from the window menus.
The main Station PC`s shall be supplied by the station DC battery and a UPS system with a
supply duration of not less than 30 minutes shall be provided to supply the monitor and the
printers.
7.5.6.2 Station Inter-bay Bus:
The LAN connecting the industrial computer based operator workstations, printers shall be
Ethernet 802.3 LAN, Protocol TCP/IP (10 M.bits/ sec or higher) and the physical medium
shall be thin Ethernet or fiber optic bus, provided this LAN is kept within the confines of
the control room.
The bay control and protection units shall be connected via glass fiber optic cables to a
station inter-bay bus, operating on high speed bus, via star couplers. The star coupler shall
permit the data exchange between the different system components. Glass Fiber optic
connections are used in order to avoid EMI in the switchgear and substation environment.
All protection and control units with serial communication facilities are connected in a star
topology via glass fiber optics to the star coupler. Under no circumstances shall events from
the protections be taken into the system via bay control unit hardware i.e., each protection
device should have its own independent fiber optic communication channel to the star
coupler. The star couplers shall be mounted in a separate communication cubicle.
7.5.6.3 Protection and Control IED’s on 33kV Level and 11KVLevel:
The control IED’s, based on microprocessor technology, shall use numerical techniques for
the calculation and evaluation of externally input analogue signals. They shall incorporate
select- before-operate control principles as safety measures for operation via the HMI. They
shall perform all bay related functions, such as protection, commands, bay interlocking, data
acquisition, data storage and event recording and shall provide inputs for status indication
and outputs for commands. They shall be mounted in the LV compartment of the
switchgear and shall be directly connected to it without any need for separate interposing
equipment or transducers.
The 33 kV bay control & protection IED shall have the following features depending on the
requirement:
• Minimum of 8analoguechannels
• At least 15 binary inputs, 5 signal relays and 2 command relays
• 8 nos. programmable LED’s on the front of the unit for indication
• Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent Protection
• Instantaneous Earth Fault Protection
• Inverse Time Phase Over Current Protection
• Inverse Time Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection
• Overvoltage/ under voltage Protection
• Synchro check function
• Built-in mimic display with controls for operating the switchgear. In the event of
failure of the bay unit a backup system for emergency operation should be
provided.
• High speed bus serial communication port

452
 • Sequence of Events Recorder with a buffer for 256 events and a resolution of
1msec.The events that are to be recorded should be freely programmable. These
could be alarm/trip signals, external signals connected to optocoupler inputs,
internal signals, etc. Once events are defined, they are recorded in chronological
order as they occur.
• Disturbance Recorder function which can record 9 analogue values, 16 Binary
signals and 12 analogue channels for internal measurement values. It shall be
possible for the Disturbance Recorder function to be triggered by any internal or
external binary signal or internal protective function.
• Comprehensive self-supervision
• Battery-free memory back-up of Event and Disturbance Records
• Logic functions (AND, OR, bistable flip flop, etc.)
• Delay/Integrator function
The numerical bay control IED’s shall be mounted together with all the relevant bay
protective relays in cubicles of Protection Class IP54 or better. Distributed back-up control
mimics with associated switches meters and Indicating LED’s shall also be provided on
these cubicles. These cubicles shall be installed in an air-conditioned room in the substation.
The distributed backup mimic for Local Control shall be installed next to the bay controller
IED, which can be used in case of maintenance or emergency or if bay control IED fails.
Local bay control via the back-up control mimic on the Control & Protection cubicles shall
incorporate the same user safety measures e.g. bay interlocking, synchrocheck, interlock
override user guidance etc. as the station HMI. Local bay control shall be key-locked and
the control either from GIS local control panel or station HMI or from remote shall be
disabled if the local/remote selector switch on the back-up control mimic is in the ‘local’
position.

The electronic system has to be provided with functions for self-supervision and testing.
Each circuit board shall contain circuits for automatic testing of its own function.
Faults in the bay control IED shall be indicated on a front HMI and a message shall be sent
to the station level HMI. The time for fault tracing and replacement of a faulty unit shall be
reduced to a minimum. The supervision shall also cover the power supply system, the
internal system bus and the ability of the central processing module to communicate with
different printed circuit boards.
Failure of any single component within the equipment shall neither cause unwanted
operation nor lead to a complete system breakdown. The n-1 criteria must be maintained in
worst case scenarios also. Further, a single failure must not have any affect on the primary
system, which is monitored and controlled.
Only the backup protection can be incorporated in the bay control unit and not the main
protections. Main protection shall be provided separately.
All IED`s shall have at least 5 years of successful proven experience in HV applications and
the MTBF for the offered units shall be provided.
7.5.7 Software Structure
The software package shall be structured according to the SA architecture and strictly
divided in various levels. It shall be possible to extend the station with the minimum
possible effort. Maintenance, modification or extension of components of any feeder may

453
not force a shut-down of the parts of the system which are not affected by the system
adaptation.
Confirmation that the software programs will be supported for a minimum of 20 years is
required to be submitted with the Bid.
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to obtain any license required for the operation
software. The contractor shall indemnify the client against all claims of infringement of any
patent, registered design, copyright, trademark or trade name or other intellectual property
right.
7.5.7.1 Station Level Software
7.5.7.1.1 Human Machine Interface (HMI)
The base HMI software package for the operator station shall include the main SA
functions and it shall be independent of project specific hardware version and
operating system. It shall further include tools for picture editing, engineering and
system configuration. The system shall be easy to use, to maintain, and to adapt
according to specific user requirements. The System shall contain a library with standard
functions and applications.
7.5.7.1.2 Operating System
Windows operating system shall be used for the operator station as it supports several
standard system features, e.g support for several Windows office applications, multitasking,
security levels, data exchange mechanisms (DDE, OLE), open data base communication
standards (ODBC) and a standardised, user-friendly look & feel HMI. The licensed copy of
the operating system backup software shall be provided.
7.5.7.2 Bay Level Software
7.5.7.2.1 System Software
The system software shall be structured in various levels. This software shall be placed in a
non- volatile memory. Its lowest level shall assure system performance and contain basic
functions, which shall not be accessible by the application and maintenance engineer for
modifications. The system shall support the generation of typical control macros and a
process database for user specific data storage.

7.5.7.2.2 Application Softwar

In order to ensure robust quality and reliable software functions, the main part of the
application software shall consist of standard software modules built as functional block
elements. The functional blocks shall be documented and thoroughly tested. They shall
form part of a library.
The application software within the control/protective devices shall be programmed in a
functional block language.

7.5.8 System Testing

The supplier shall submit a test specification for factory acceptance test
(FAT) and commissioning tests of the station automation system for approval. For the
individual bay level IED’s, applicable Type Test certificates shall be submitted.
The manufacturing phase of the SA shall be concluded by a Factory Acceptance Test
(FAT). The purpose is to ensure that the Contractor has interpreted the specified
454
requirements correctly. The general philosophy shall be to deliver a system to site
only after it has been thoroughly tested and its specified performance has been
verified with site conditions simulated to the extent possible in a test lab. If the FAT
involves only a certain portion of the system for practical reasons, it has to be assured
that this test configuration contains at least one unit of each and every type of
equipment incorporated in the delivered system.
If the complete system consists of parts from various suppliers, the supplier shall arrange
interoperability test at factory during stage inspection or FAT. The complete system
test shall also be performed at site in the Site Acceptance Test (SAT).
7.5.9 System functions

7.5.9.1 Control Unit Functions

7.5.9.1.1 Control
The different high voltage apparatuses within the station shall either be operated manually
by the operator or automatically by programmed switching sequences.
The control function shall comprise:
Commands from different operator places, e.g. from the station HMI, or local
control panel according to the operating principle
Select-before execute commands
Operation from only one operator place at a time.
Operation depending on conditions from other functions, such as interlocking,
synchrocheck, operator mode, or external status conditions.
The control function shall also include:
Prevention of double operation
• Command supervision
• Selection of operator place
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Manual setting of position indications
• Overriding of the interlocking function ( Second key switch. )
• Switchgear run time supervision
7.5.9.1.2 Status Supervision
The position of each switchgear, e.g. circuit breaker, isolator, earthing switch, etc., shall be
permanently supervised. Every detected change of position shall be immediately visible on
the screen in the single-line diagram, recorded in the event list, and a hard copy printout
shall be produced. Alarms shall be initiated in cases when spontaneous position changes
have taken place.
Each position of an apparatus shall be indicated using two binary auxiliary normally closed
(NC) and normally open (NO) contacts. An alarm shall be initiated if these position
indications are inconsistent or indicate an excessive running time of the operating
mechanism to change position.
7.5.9.1.3 Interlocking
455
The interlocking function prevents unsafe operation of apparatuses such as
isolators and earthing switches within a bay or station wide. The operation of the
switchgear shall only be possible when certain conditions are fulfilled. The interlocking
function is required to be decentralised so that it does not depend on a central control
device. Communication between the various bays for the station interlocking shall take
place via bay communication system. An override function shall be provided, which
can be enabled to by-pass the interlocking function via a key/password, in cases of
maintenance or emergency situations.
7.5.9.1.4 Measurements:
Analogue inputs for voltage and current measurements shall be connected
directly to the voltage transformers (VT) and the current transformers (CT) without
intermediate transducers
The correlated values of active power (W), reactive power (VAr), frequency (Hz), and
the rms values for voltage (U) and current (I) shall be calculated
7.5.9.1.5 Event and Alarm Handling:
Events and alarms shall be generated either by the switchgear, by the control devices and
by the station level unit. They shall be recorded in an event list in the station HMI.
Alarms shall be recorded in a separate alarm list and appear on the screen. All or a
freely selectable group of events and alarms shall also be printed out on an event printer.
The alarms and events shall be time tagged with a time resolution of 1 ms. The time
tagging shall be done at the lowest level where the event occurs and the information shall
be distributed with the time tagging.
7.5.9.1.6 Time Synchronization:
The time within the SA shall be set via a GPS Clock Receiver connected directly to the
Bay Level LAN. The time shall then be distributed to the control/protective devices
via the high speed optic fibre bus. An accuracy of ±1 ms within the station is required.
7.5.9.1.7 Synchronism and Energizing Check
The synchronism and energizing check functions shall be distributed to the control and/or
protective devices and shall have the following features:
• Adjustable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference.
• Energizing for dead line - live bus, or live line - dead bus
• Settings for manual close command and auto-reclose command shall be
adaptable to the operating times of the specific switchgear.
7.5.9.1.8 Voltage Selection
The voltages, which are relevant for the synchro check functions, depend on the station
topology i.e. on the positions of the circuit breakers and/or the isolators. The
co rre ct voltage for synchronizing a n d energizing i s derived from the auxiliary
switches of the circuit breakers, isolator, and earthing switch and shall be selected
automatically by the control and protection IED.
7.5.9.2 HMI Functions

7.2.9.2.1 General

456
The operator st at i on HMI shall provide basi c functions f o r supervision a n d
control of the substation. The operator shall give commands to the switchgear via the
station monitor with the help of mouse clicks on soft-keys.
The HMI shall provide the operator with access to alarms and events displayed on the
screen. Besides these lists on the screen, there shall be a print out of hard copies of
alarms or events in an event log. The Alarm List shall indicate persisting and fleeting
alarms separately.
An acoustic alarm shall indicate abnormalities and all unacknowledged alarms
shall be accessible from any screen selected by the operator.
Following standard pictures shall be available from the HMI:
• Single line diagram showing the switching status and measured values
• Control dialogues
• Measurement dialogues
• Blocking dialogues
• Alarm list, station / bay oriented
• Event list, station / bay oriented
• System status
• Checking of parameter settin
7.5.9.1.2 HMI Design Principles
Consistent design principles shall be provided with the HMI concerning labels, colours,
dialogues and fonts. Non-valid selections shall be dimmed out.
Object status shall be indicated using different status colours for:
Selected object under command
Selected on the screen
Not updated, obsolete value, not in use or not sampled
Alarm or faulty state
Warning or blocked
Update blocked or manually updated
Control blocked
Normal state
Busbar colouring to show live & dead bus
Process Status Displays and Command Procedures
The process status of the substation in terms of actual values of currents, voltages,
frequency, active and reactive powers as well as the positions of circuit breakers,
isolators and transformer tap changers are displayed in the station single line diagram.
In order to ensure a high degree of security against unwanted operation, a special
"select – before - execute" command procedure shall be provided. After the
"selection" of a switch, the operator shall be able to recognise the selected device on
the screen and all other switchgear shall be blocked. After the “execution” of the

457
command, the operated switch symbol shall blink until the switch has reached its final
new position.
The system shall permit the operator to execute a command only if the selected
object is not blocked and if no interlocking condition is going to be violated The
interlocking conditions shall be checked by the interlocking scheme which is
implemented on bay level.
After command execution, the operator shall receive a confirmation that the new
switching position is reached or an indication that the switching procedure was
unsuccessful with the indication of the reason for non-functioning.
System Supervision Display
The SA system shall feature comprehensive self-supervision such that faults are
immediately indicated to the operator before they possibly develop into serious
situations. Such faults are recorded as faulty status in a system supervision display.
This display shall cover the status of the entire substation including all switchgear,
IED’s, communication links, and printers at the station level etc.
Reports
The SA shall generate reports that provide time related information on measured
values and calculated values. The data displayed shall comprise:
Trend reports:
• Day (mean, peak)
• Month (mean, peak)
• Semi-annual (mean, peak)
• Year (mean, peak)
Historical reports:
• Day
• Week
• Month
• Year
It shall be possible to select displayed values from the database on-line in the process
display. Scrolling between e.g. days shall be possible. Unsure values shall be
indicated. It shall be possible to select the time period for which the specific data are
kept in the memory.
This report shall be printed automatically at pre-selected times. It shall also be possible
to print this report on request.
Trend Display (Historical Data)
A trend is a time-related follow-up of process data. The analogue channels of all the
connected bay level devices on the 33 kV level shall be illustrated as trends. The trends
shall be displayed in graphical form as columns or curve diagrams with 10 trends per
screen as maximum.
It shall be possible to change the type of value logging (direct, mean, sum, or difference)
on-line in the window. It shall also be possible to change the update intervals on-line in
the picture as well as the selection of threshold values for alarming purposes.
458
Event List
The event list shall contain events, which are important for the control and monitoring
of the substation. The time has to be displayed for each event.
The operator shall be able to call up the chronological event list on the monitor at any
time for the whole substation or sections of it.
A printout of each display shall be possible on the hard copy printer.
The events shall be registered in a chronological event list in which the type of event
and its time of occurrence are specified. It shall be possible to store all events in the
computer. The information shall be obtainable also from printed event log.
The chronological event list shall contain:
• Position changes of circuit breakers, isolators and earthing devices.
• Indication of protective relay operations
• Fault signals from the switchgear
• Violation of upper and lower limits of analogue measured value.
• Loss of communication
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of events shall be available. The filters
shall be designed to enable viewing of events grouped per:
• Date and time
• Bay
• Device
• Function
• Alarm class
Alarm List
Faults and errors occurring in the substation shall be listed in an alarm list and
shall be immediately transmitted to the control centre. The alarm list shall
substitute a conventional alarm tableau, and shall constitute an evaluation of
all station alarms. It shall contain unacknowledged alarms and persisting faults.
Date and time of occurrence shall be indicated. The alarm list consists of a summary
display of the present alarm situation. Each alarm shall be reported on one line that
contains:
• The alarm date and time
• The name of the alarming object
• A descriptive text
• The acknowledgement state
The operator shall be able to acknowledge alarms, which shall be either audible
or only displayed on the monitor. Acknowledged alarms shall be marked at the list.
Faults that appear and disappear without being acknowledged shall be specially
presented in a separate list for fleeting alarms. For example due to bad contacts or
intermittent operation.
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of alarms shall be available as for events
459
Object Picture
When selecting an object such as a circuit breaker or isolator in the single line diagram,
first the associated bay picture shall be presented. In the selected object picture, all
attributes such as-
• type of blocking,
• authority
• local / remote control
• SA control
• errors,
• etc.,
shall be displayed.
Control Dialogues
The operator shall give commands to the system by means of soft keys located on the
single line diagram. It shall also be possible to use the keyboard for soft key
activation. Data entry is performed with the keyboard.
User Authority Levels
It shall be possible to restrict the activation of the process pictures of each object (bays,
apparatus, etc.) to a certain user authorization group. Each user shall then be given access
rights to each group of objects, e.g.:
• Display only
• Normal operation (e.g. open/close apparatus)
• Restricted operation (e.g. by-passed interlock)
• System administrator
For maintenance and engineering purposes of the station HMI, the following authorization
levels shall be available:
• No engineering allowed
• Engineering/configuration allowed
• Entire system management allowed
The access rights shall be defined by passwords assigned during the log-in procedure. Only
the system administrator shall be able to add/remove users and change access rights.
7.5.9.3 System Performance
The refresh/ update times on the operator station PC under normal and calm conditions in
the substation shall be according to the levels specified below:
Functions Typical values
Exchange of display (first reaction) < 1s
Presentation of a binary change in the process display < 0.5 s
Presentation of an analogue change in the process display < 1s
From order to process output < 0.5 s
From order to update of display < 1.5 s

7.5.9.4 System Reliability

The SA system shall be designed to satisfy very high demands for reliability and
availability concerning:
• Solid mechanical and electrical design
• Security against electrical interference (EMI)
• High quality components and boards
• Modular, well-tested hardware
460
 • Thoroughly developed and tested modular software
• Easy-to-understand programming language for application programming
• Detailed graphical documentation, according toIEC1131-3, of the application
software
• Built-in supervision and diagnostic functions
• After sales service
• Security
• Experience of security requirements
• Process know-how
• Select before execute at operation
• Processst at usre presentation as double indications
• Distributed solution
• Independent units connected to the local area network
• Back-up functions
• Panel design appropriate to the harsh electrical environment and ambient conditions
• Panel grounding to provide immunity against transient ground potential rise

7.5.9.5 Configuration Tools:

The configuration of the station HMI shall be made using the operator station
working in Windows environment. The various functions shall be customized by
easy to use interactive configuration tools. Configuration shall include the visual
presentation of the object, adaptations needed in process database and adaptations of the
communication configuration data.
A portable Personal Computer (PC) as a service unit shall be foreseen for on-site
modifications of the control and protection devices. The service unit shall be used for
documentation, test and commissioning.
The PC based service & support system shall be used for the following purposes:
• System configuration

• System testing
• Help functions
• Program documentation
• Down-and up-loading of programs
• System commissioning
• Data base management
• Changing peripheral parameters
The service & support system shall be able to monitor data in the running substation control
system and to present changing variables on the display screen in graphic representation.
7.5.9.6 Information Required
The following documentation shall be provided for the system during the course of the
project and they shall be consistent, CAD supported, and of similar look/feel:
• List of Drawings
• Control Room Lay-out
• Assembly Drawing
461
 • Single Line Diagram
• Block Diagram
• Circuit Diagram
• List of Apparatus
• List of Labels
• Functional Design Specification (FDS)
• Test Specification for Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
• Logic Diagram
• List of Signals
• Operator’s Manual
• Product Manuals
• Calculation for uninterrupted power supply (UPS) dimensioning
• Licensed Copyof all software
• Third Party cyber security certification

7.5.9.7 Documentation required

The following documents shall be submitted with the offer otherwise bid will be
rejected
a) Letter of authorization from the Manufacturers, in case, the bidder is not the
manufacturer.
b) Manufacturer's authorization Letter for ralay and other protection equipment
as mentioned in the technical specification.
c) Manufacturer's supply record for at least 3 years within the last 7 years
specifically mentioning purchaser's name, address, telephone number, fax number,
contract number with date, supply quantity with ratings, date of commencement
& completion of supply, in format below . Supply record will be equipped wit the
same offered type SAS.
Sl. Name, address, Contract Contract Description of Date of
No. phone & Fax No. No. & Date value materials with completion of
of the Consumer quantity supply

d) Satisfactory Performance certificates (SPC) issued within the last 7 years from at
least 2 End users depicting that the offered type automation system.
e) Submission of Type Test Reports/ Certificate as stated in per relevant IEC from
recognized independent laboratories.

7.6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CCTV SYSTEM

7.6.1 GENERAL
1. The work under this system shall consist of designing, supply, installation,
testing, training & handing over of all materials, equipment, appliances
and labour necessary to Commission the said system, complete with fixed

462
 Dome cameras, outdoor fixed mount cameras, Monitors and Digital Video
Recorder.
2. It shall also include laying of cables necessary for installation of the
system as indicated in the specifications and Bill of Quantities. Any
openings/chasing in the wall/ceiling required for the installation shall be
made good in appropriate manner.
3. In the bid, the Vendor shall also submit detailed catalogs, data sheets etc., for
each of the Products quoted.
4. The Bidder necessarily shall submit in the technical bid their detailed
point-by-point compliance/deviation to this tender document.
5. The Bidder shall submit copy of certification of all equipment i.e. UL / CE /
FCC.
6. The Bidder shall submit document of authorization from Manufacturer to
7. Bangladesh Dealer and/or Bangladesh Dealer to the Bidder.
8. The bidder shall provide authorization from the manufacturer for providing
test reports complying the specifications at the time of inspection
9. Provide authorization from the manufacturer that the items quoted by the
tenderer are in production and would be serviceable for at least 3 years from
the date of tender. No obsolete products should be quoted.
10. Letter from manufacturer for supporting the system for at least 3 years, for
this an MOU between the manufacturer and Tenderer should clearly
state support for products and systems for next 3 years.
11. The system shall be so set that it provides minimum 45 days recording for
the cameras installed in the substations.

463
7.6.2 1/3” COLOR CCD FIXED DOME / CS MOUNTED CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS
1. The camera unit shall be 1/3” CCD type Color and shall provide a
minimum of 480 TV Lines resolution. It shall be possible to use lenses of 3.6
mm focal length. It shall be possible to adjust the camera head in both the
planes so that it can be wall or ceiling mounted. The camera shall operate on 12
volts D.C.
2. The Camera shall comply with the following parameters :-
EFFECTIVE PIXELS PAL: 752(H)*582(V) (MINIMUM)
SYNC. SYSTEM: INTERNAL.
RESOLUTION: 480 TV LINE MINIMUM.
MINIMUM ILLUMINATION: 0.002 Lux / F2.0 / 50IRE.
S/N RATIO : (AGC OFF) MORE THAN 48 db.
GAMMA CORRECTION: 0.45
GAIN CONTROL: AUTO
WHITE BALANCE: AUTO (2500°K ~ 9500°K)
EXPOSURE AUTO E. SHUTTER : 1/60(1/50) ~ 1/100000 SEC
VIDEO OUTPUT : 1.0 Vp-p COMPOSITE (75Ω LOAD)
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: DC 12V +/- 10%
POWER CONSUMPTION :100mA
OPERATION TEMP.: -10°C ~ 50°C
LENS TYPE : 3.6 mm (Focal length)

7.6.3 1/3” COLOUR CCD CS MOUNT IR CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS

1. The camera shall be of 1/3” format CCD type, compact of rugged design and
shall employ solid state circuitry. The camera shall deliver clear, high resolution
colour picture without geometric distortion.

2. The Camera shall comply with the following parameters.

Pick up Element: 1/3 inch Color CCD image Sensor (interline)
Power supply: 12VDC/24VAC Auto Detectable
Scanning System: 2:1 interlace
Resolution: 540 TV lines
Sensitivity: 0.03 lux
S/N Ratio: less than 50 db
Electronic shutter: Auto: 1/50 (60) to 1/1, 00,000sec
Output: 1Vp-p Composite video output, 75 Ohm
Lens mount: CS Mount
Lens Type : 1/3” 3.5-8mm Auto Iris and IR corrected
Day/Night : Digital
Auto White Balance : Auto
Back Light Compensation : Dedicated Dip Switch
Automatic Gain Control : Dedicated Dip Switch

464
 Flicker less Mode : Dedicated Dip Switch
IP rating for Housing: IP 67
Operating Temperature: - 10 to 50° C / 30 – 90% RH
7.6.4 12-CHANNEL STAND ALONE DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER SPECIFICATIONS
1) The DVR shall be a digital image recording device with the functionality of 12
cameras video inputs.
2) The digital video recorder shall be fully multitasking – capable o f
simultaneously recording whilst playing back.
3) The digital video recorder shall incorporate 3 internal hard disk drives of 500 GB
capacity each.
4) The digital video recorder shall have an integral CD/DVD-Writer for archiving
purposes.
5) The digital video recorder should have mouse or keyboard control options
through USB ports.
6) The Digital Video Recorder shall operate on an embedded Linux Operating
System.
7) The digital video recorder shall auto-detect connected cameras and be configured to
record at the touch of a button. PTZ cameras must be configured manually.
8) The digital video recorder shall have composite BNC inputs for up to 8 color or
monochrome cameras.
9) The digital video recorder shall have loop-through connectors with automatic
software controlled termination to connect to other equipment.
10) The digital video recorder shall have software-controlled contrast and
brightness adjustment settings for each camera.
11) The digital video recorder shall have Automatic and Static Gain Control
settings for each camera.
12) The firmware of the digital video recorder shall be upgradeable remotely
across a computer network and through USB port.
13) Operation of the digital video recorder shall be from the front panel or via an
infrared remote control.
14) The digital video recorder shall have an easy to follow, logical menu system. The
digital video recorder shall have the option to change the menus to different
languages.
15) The Digital Video Recorder shall feature dual monitor outputs: a primary or main
monitor output and a secondary or spot monitor output. The primary monitor
output screen must have connections for BNC, or SVHS monitors, any of which can
be used simultaneously.
16) The main monitor shall be able to provide any camera full screen,
sequencing full screen, and 4, 6, 9, 16 ways multi-screen displays whilst full
frame recording is taking place.
17) The main monitor shall display a true live picture without digitization, on full
screen or any of the multi-screens, up to and including 16 way camera displays. An

465
 on screen colored indicator shall show whether all individual cameras are recording.
18) The secondary monitor shall display live, analogue full screen video from either a
selected camera, sequencing cameras and / or be used to display alarm / motion
events.
19) The Digital Video Recorder shall provide a digital freeze frame and x2 digital
zoom in full screen live and playback modes, including the ability to move around a
zoomed image.
20) The Digital Video Recorder shall be capable of displaying user definable cameras
in any of the multi-screen modes available. When sequencing, the Digital
Video Recorder shall have the option to display specified multi-screen display as
per the operator’s requirements so that specific cameras can be programmed to
remain on view even though other cameras around it may be sequencing.
21) The Digital Video Recorder shall have the option to remove cameras from normal
viewing on the monitor, so that they are recorded but not viewed.
22) The Digital Video Recorder shall record the camera video signals as a full screen
image from each of the cameras.
23) The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to record a single camera at up to 25
frames per second (PAL).
24) The Digital Video Recorder shall have a maximum record rate of up to 200 frames
per second (PAL).
25) The Digital Video Recorder incorporates quality settings and record rates per
camera, which allows the user to individually program each camera’s record
priority. An adjustable global resolution of up to 720x576 (PAL) (maximum) shall
be available.
26) The Digital Video Recorder shall have the ability to alert the operator via an on
board buzzer should there be an error whilst writing images to hard disk.
27) Connected cameras shall be able to be removed from the recording sequence
without affecting the ability to display that camera on the main or spot monitor.
28) The Digital Video Recorder shall provide a user-programmable character title for
each camera and shall record time, date and title with each video image.
29) The Digital Video Recorder shall be capable of playing back one camera full
screen.
30) The Digital Video Recorder shall have the ability to go to a particular time and date.
31) The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to playback, pause, frame advance / rewind
and multi speed fast forward or rewind either using front panel buttons, IR remote
control or mouse or keyboard.
32) The Digital Video Recorder shall have a History log feature displaying system
events. This shall include power failures & recovery, menu access, network access
(including user name), motion detection, sensor activation and video loss.
33) The Digital Video Recorder shall have a pre-set menu option which will determine
whether the internal HDD will overwrite or stop recording once full. The
current status of the HDD space remaining will be displayed on a status bar on the
main monitor.

466
34) The Digital Video Recorder shall apply a digital signature to recordings
contained on the internal hard disks, without affecting performance.
35) The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to copy a specified image sequence to its
internal CD Writer. The digital multiplexer must continue to record when writing
to the CD-RW. The back up CD will auto-run on a PC and will not require the
user to install any additional software to play back the video images
contained on the CD. The back up CD will also be able to be played back on the
digital multiplexer itself via the internal CD-RW and the main monitor.
36) The digital multiplexer will allow the operator to preview the images selected for
archiving before starting the archive process to CD.
37) The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to provide a relay trigger on video loss,
motion detection and sensor activation.
38) The Digital Video Recorder shall have the ability to sound a buzzer on alarm,
motion detection, video loss, disk full or writing to HDD error.
39) The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to switch to a full screen image on both
the main and / or spot monitors when an alarm / motion event happens, in addition
to alerting a network operator.
40) The operator shall be able to set the polarity of each individual alarm contact to
either normally open or normally closed.
41) The Digital Video Recorder shall provide a history log for all the
alarms/activity on the internal hard disk with time, date and camera name and/or
number. The history log shall have a filter to be able to show the operator alarm,
motion, video or other events only, as required.
42) The Digital Video Recorder shall have 16 internal programmable alarm inputs.
43) The Digital Video Recorder shall have a user definable schedule to allow multiple
schedules to be set for each individual hour of the day for each camera. This shall
include the ability to select different hours of the day for normal recording,
motion recording, sensor recording, motion & sensor recording, and off.
44) Recording schedules shall be able to be copied and pasted to other
individual cameras, or copied and pasted to all cameras to assist the operator
with the configuration of the unit.
45) The Digital Video Recorder shall feature individually programmable activity
detection on all video channels, with an on screen 16 x 12 set up grid, and 5
sensitivity level selectable on all channels.
46) The Digital Video Recorder shall have 3 different layers of Password for
better authenticity and flexible level of control.
47) The Digital Video Recorder shall have both manual and automatic lock functions
that will not affect the recording operation of the unit. This shall either be done
manually or by using a pre-set menu option to automatically lock the unit after 30
seconds of no buttons being pressed on either the front panel or IR remote control.
This will prevent unauthorized use and shall require an operator to input a
password to unlock the unit.
48) The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to control telemetry cameras and should
support multiple telemetry protocols.

467
 49) Cameras with telemetry shall be controllable using the Enterprise Viewing
Software across an Ethernet network.
50) The Digital Video Recorder shall have the ability to connect to LAN / ETHERNET
a. Each remote unit will have varying levels of password protection for
remote access.
b. Users logging on via the network will have their user names logged locally in
the digital video recorder history log with their log on / off dates and times.
c. The operator will have the option to be alerted via on-screen symbols and
audible alarm for video loss, motion and sensor events as they happen.
d. Optimum bandwidth settings shall be a v a i l a b l e for Et he rn et
network transmissions.
e. License free Enterprise Viewing Software for Windows® shall be included
with each unit.
51) The DVR shall comply with the following parameters:-
Display Speed 120 / 100 fps
(NTSC / PAL)
Recording Speed Max. CIF 120/ 100 fps
(352*240)
Max. 2CIF 60 / 50 fps
(704*240)
Video In Signal Level 1.0Vpp Composite (+-10%) / 75Ohm
Balanced
Channel 8 Channel (BNC)
Video Out Main Display 1 VGA (1024 x 768 @ 60Hz )
Loop-Out 8 Channel (BNC)-Loop Out / 1ch(BNC) Out
/ 1 S-Video
Spot out 2 Channel Digital(BNC)
Audio Input / output 4 Line in (RCA) / 1 Line out (RCA) ,
Codec:G.711(64Kbps)
Alarm DI / DO 8 input / 8 digital out ( 5Vpp)
Panic Alarm Input Yes
Control Device Keypad/PTZ keyboard Controller
Remote Controller
USB mouse controller
USB Keyboard
Screen Display Split 1, 4, 6, 8, 9
Interface Graphic User Interface
Video Format NTSC / PAL Auto detection
Codec Modified MPEG-4
Image Quality Highest/ High/ Standard/ Low
Recording type Continuous/ Motion/ Event /Panic

468
 Multi-Language
Support English compulsary
System Reliability Functions Water Mark
Watch Dog
Shut Down Detection
Auto Recovery
Factory Default
firmware Update by USB or Network
Interface type PATA, SATA (option)
Hard Disk 4 X HDD, No Limit on HDD size
Capacity
Recording HDD Write once / Overwriting
mode
Back Up File AVI, JPG, BMP
Format
Storage
File Export USB Flash, Internal CD/DVD + RW burner
Playback Search Time/Date, Event (Alarm/Motion), Event
Function motion (Smart search)

Remote Access TCP/IP, View, Search, Recording and

Control (Client Software or browser)
Power Source / 120 to 240 VAC / 60 watt Max.
Consumption
Connectors USB port USB port * 4 (Ver 2.0, Front:2,
Rear:2)
RS-232 1-D type female connector ( for PTZ,
GPS )
RS-485 2 pin ( for Keyboard, PTZ, GPS or POS
connection )

7.6.5 TFT / LCD Colour Monitor Specifications

1. The Color display shall be suitable with the standards of the selected cameras.
It shall be solid state and modular in design. It shall provide a bright, clear
and well-defined picture display on the screen.
2. All controls for brightness, contrast etc. shall be provided on the front
panel for readily adjusting the levels of the video signal. The rear panel shall
be provided with input and output connectors for coupling the video output
to other Monitors.
3. The video monitor installed shall be of 17’’ size.
4. The Monitor shall comply with the following parameters :-
• Video: PAL / NTSC color composite 1.0Vp-p
• LCD: 17 diagonal, 0.66 mm Stripe pitch
• Resolution: 1280 / 1024 pixels

469
 • Contrast Ration: 500: 1
• Viewing angle : 140 degree horizontal,130 degree vertical
• Power Input: 90 – 260 VAC, 50/60 Hz
• Consumption: 40 Watts
7.6.6 Video Cable Specifications
Video Cable RG-59 of the following minimum specifications shall be used for
connecting cameras installed at various locations to the DVR :-
• Centre conductor size: Solid Bare Copper 63mm
• Di - electric material : Polyethylene (PE), 7.1mm dia white colour
• DC resistance inner conductor: 8.5 Ohms/Km
• Capacitance : 53 +/- 3 Ohms
• Di-electric strength : 10 KVA AC mains
• Insulation resistance : 50 M Ohm/km
• Nominal impedance : 75 Ohms
• Min Bending radius : 55 mm
7.6.7 Power Cable Specifications
Power cables used for extending power supply to various cameras and other
devices shall have the following minimum specifications:-
• No. of Cores - 03 (three)
• Conductor size - 1.5 sq mm, 7/0.68 multi strand with standard annealed
electrolytic copper conductor.
• Primary Insulation - PVC Insulated
• Armouring - Galvanized Steel Wire
7.6.8 PVC Conduit Specifications
PVC Conduit of medium grade (ISI mark) with 20 mm dia will be used for laying
Video Cables / Power cables.
7.10.9 LIST OF RECOMMENDED MAKES FOR CCTV SYSTEM
1. Cameras: Pelco / CBC / Bosch / Sony / GE / Siemens / Honeywell / Samsung
/ Panasonic
2. Digital Video Recorder: Pelco / CBC / Bosch / Sony / GE / Honeywell /
Bosch / Siemens / Samsung / Panasonic
3. Monitor: LG / SAMSUNG / Sony / NEC / Panasonic
4. Video Cable: Finolex / Ocean / Polycab / RR Kabel / Poliplast
5. Power Cable: Finolex / Ocean / Polycab
6. PVC Conduit: BEC / AKG / Precision / Circle Arc / Pressfit

470
7.7 T-TYPE CONNECTOR

Drawing of T-TYPE CONNECTOR (36/25 mm) has been provided. Few other
connectors are - 33 KV FLAT I-TYPE CONNECTOR (25 mm), 33 KV Double I-
TYPE CONNECTOR (25/25 mm), 33 KV Double I-TYPE CONNECTOR (36/25
mm), PG Clamp (ACSR Grosbeak) etc. If any other type connectors are to be
used, then GTP & Drawing of the same items must be provided. Dimensions of all
the connectors have to be similar to the attached drawing here. Dimensions of
connectors are subject to approval from NESCO.

DRAWING OF 33 KV T-TYPE CONNECTOR (36/25 mm)

471
 SECTION 7.5

Inspection, Testing of the Equipment

472
7.5.1 INSPECTION AND TESTING of 33 KV OUTDOOR TYPE VCB AND PCM PANEL& 11 KV
AIS SWITCHGEAR

Inspection and testing before and after shipment/ supply shall be in accordance with the
relevant IEC standard.

7.5.1.1 Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness (Acceptance test)

The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their
conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time during
manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the manufacturers’ premises,
workmanship and performance.
The following tests (not limited to) shall be carried out for outdoor type VCB and PCM Panel
as per latest version of IEC Standard or unless otherwise mentioned at the manufacturer
premises or other places where the test facilities are available:-
a) Dielectric test on the main circuit
b) Tests on auxiliary and control circuits
c) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
d) Tightness test
f) Design and visual (physical) checks
g) Electrical and mechanical operation test
h) Verification of Protection system
7.5.2.1 Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness (Acceptance test)
The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their
conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time during
manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the manufacturers’ premises,
workmanship and performance.
The following tests (not limited to) shall be carried out for 11 KV AIS SWITCHGEAR as per
latest version of IEC Standard or unless otherwise mentioned at the manufacturer premises or
other places where the test facilities are available:-

a) Dielectric test on the main circuit

b) Tests on auxiliary and control circuits
c) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
d) Tightness test
f) Design and visual (physical) checks
g) Electrical and mechanical operation test
h) Verification of Protection system

The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give notice to the Purchaser in writing of the
date and the place where the material or equipment will be ready for quality witness testing.

473
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier accordingly
in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier timely notice in
writing of his intention to attend the test.
Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer of
the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance,
labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as
may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test efficiently. These tests shall be performed
as per latest version of relevant IEC/ BS or equivalent international standards as mentioned in
the contract and only routine tests as agreed upon will be performed.
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/ equipments shall have passes the
tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect.
Should any inspected/ tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall have
the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case Supplier has to
replace the equipment and to make good of them and the supplier shall conduct similar pre-
delivery Inspection and factory tests without any financial involvement to the purchaser. In
case any of the Equipment found not conforming to the specification at the time of post
landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relieved from the responsibility of replacing
them on making them good at their own cost, despite the Equipment were found good at the
time of Factory Acceptance Test. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier
from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.

NESCO’s 01 (one) Inspection Team of 03 Engineers (each team) shall have to conduct
Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness at the manufacturer’s factory premises. The
cost incurred for this purpose shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed the cost in
this regard is included in the offered price.
The cost of Air Tickets (both way) from Bangladesh to Manufacturer’s Country (place of
Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness), Hotel Accommodation, fooding and lodging
etc. will be borne by the contractor. Other than this the contractor will pay a standard amount
of pocket money (USD 200) per day (including journey period). The period for this purpose is
07 (Seven) working days (Excluding Journey time). All the cost of this purpose shall be
deemed is included in the offered price.
No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved and
written instruction have been received by the Purchaser.
The bidder has to mention the place of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness in the
following table:-
Period of Technical Place & Country of
Sl. No. Item Orientation and Technical Orientation and
Quality Test Witness Quality Test Witness

7.5.1.2 Post Landing Inspection:

Post landing inspection shall be done immediately after arrival of the goods/materials at the
designated store of NESCO/project office/ site; the quality witness team along with the
engineers shall conduct Post Landing Inspection in presence of the representative of Supplier.
The inspection team shall conduct the following test
i) Design and visual (physical) inspection and quantity checks

474
 The program of such inspection shall be intimated to the representative of Supplier by NESCO
upon arrival of the materials at NESCO store/project office of the Inspector(s) to be selected
for test witnessing. Any defect or damage have been found at post-delivery inspection, the
defective or damaged panels/ materials/ goods to be repaired/ replaced by the Bidder/ supplier
at his own cost. The goods/materials shall be under the custody of the contractor for installation.
Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and security of the equipment.

7.5.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING of 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMER, 33 KV POTENTIAL

TRANSFORMER, 33 KV & 11 KV ISOLATOR,33 KV & 11 KV LIGHTENING ARRESTER,
BATTERY, BATTERY CHARGER.

Inspection and testing before and after shipment/ supply shall be in accordance with the
relevant IEC standard.

7.5.2.1 Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness (Acceptance test)

The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect examine and test the goods/materials to confirm
their conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time
during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the manufacturers’
premises, workmanship and performance.
The Routine test shall be carried out as per latest version of relevant IEC/ BS or equivalent
international standards as mentioned in the contract at the manufacturer premises or other
places where the test facilities are available.

The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give notice to the Purchaser in writing of the
date and the place where the material or equipment will be ready for quality witness testing.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier accordingly
in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier timely notice in
writing of his intention to attend the test. Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises
of the supplier or of any manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall
provide free of charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and
instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test
efficiently. These tests shall be performed as per latest version of relevant IEC/ BS or
equivalent international standards as mentioned in the contract and only routine tests as agreed
upon, will be performed.
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/ equipments shall have passes the
tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect.
Should any inspected/ tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall
have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case Supplier
has to replace the equipment and to make good of them and the supplier shall conduct similar
pre-delivery Inspection and factory tests without any financial involvement to the purchaser. In
case any of the Equipment found not conforming to the specification at the time of post landing
Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relieved from the responsibility of replacing them on
making them good at their own cost, despite the Equipment were found good at the time of
Factory Acceptance Test. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any
warranty or other obligations under the contract.

475
NESCO’s Inspection Team of 03 Engineers shall have to conduct Technical Orientation and
Quality Test Witness at the manufacturer’s factory premises. The cost incurred for this purpose
shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed the cost in this regard is included in the
offered price.
The cost of Air Tickets (both way) from Bangladesh to Manufacturer’s Country (place of
Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness), Hotel Accommodation, fooding and lodging
etc. will be borne by the contractor. Other than this the contractor will pay a standard amount
of pocket money (USD 200) per day (including journey period). The period for this purpose is
07 (Seven) working days (Excluding Journey time). All the cost of this purpose shall be
deemed is included in the offered price.
No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved including
factory Test reports and written instructions has been issued by the Purchaser.

7.5.2.2 POST-LANDING INSPECTION AND TESTING :

The Supplier shall inform the purchaser immediately after arrival of the goods at the designated
store of NESCO (as per delivery schedule). An Inspection team of NESCO shall perform the
post-landing inspection in presence of supplier's representative. The Supplier shall arrange the
program of post-landing inspection. Any defect or damage have been found at post-landing
inspection, the defective or damaged materials/ goods to be replaced by the supplier at his own
cost within the stipulated time.
The purchaser’s right to inspect, test (where necessary) and reject the goods after delivery
at the designated store of NESCO shall in no way be limited or waived by reason of the goods
having previously been inspected, tested and passed by the purchaser prior to the good's
delivery.
The Inspection team will check the physical conditions and quantity of the goods
delivered. If necessary, the inspection team will select the sample of good(s) and sent the
selected sample goods to CERS, BPDB or BUET/ CUET/ KUET /RUET (as selected by the
inspection team) to carry out the test(s) as per contract to confirm the conformity to the
approved Technical Specifications, Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP), drawings and
relevant standards. If the tested sample(s) fail to confirm the specifications in tests, the full
consignment will be rejected. All cost of testing of Materials/ Goods including carrying,
loading, un-loading etc. will be borne by the supplier.

7.5.3 TECHNICAL ORIENTATION AND QUALITY TEST WITNESS OF 33/11 KV 10/13.33 MVA
POWER TRANSFORMER WITH RTCC PANEL & 33/0.415 KV AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER:
The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their
conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time
during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the
manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance.
The following test shall be carried out as per latest version of IEC or equivalent
standard unless otherwise mentioned at the manufacturer premises or other places where the
test facilities are available:-
Acceptance Tests:-
1. Measurement of turn ratio test;
2. Vector group test;
3. Measurement of winding resistance;
4. Measurement of insulation resistance;
476
 5. Measurement of no load loss & no-load current;
6. Measurement of impedance voltage & load loss;
7. Dielectric withstands Tests;
8. Transformer oil test;
9. Temperature rise test.
The purchaser can carry out the testing of any no. of transformers during Quality Test
Witness. But, the testing of transformers during Quality Test Witness will not be less
than
10% at random basis of the transformer ready for inspection but in any case it will not
be less than 3 nos. The manufacturer will provide all arrangements for the testing of
transformers desired by the purchaser in his factory.
The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice
in writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will be ready
for testing as provided in the contract and unless the purchaser shall attend at the place
so named on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier may proceed
with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the purchaser’s presence,
and shall forth with forward to the purchaser duly certified copies of test readings.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier
accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier
timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test.
Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any
manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of
charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and
instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such
test efficiently. These test shall be performed as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or
equivalent and only routine tests as agreed upon, will be performed.
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passes
the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that
effect.
Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall
have the right to reject any of the item or complete batch if necessary. In that case
Supplier have to replace the Equipment and to make good of them without any financial
involvement to the Purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not conforming with
the specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be
relieved from the responsibility of replacing them on making them good at their own cost,
despite the Equipment were found good at the time of Factory Acceptance Test. Nothing
in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligations
under the contract.
NESCO’s Inspection Team of at least 03 (Three) Engineers shall have to conduct Technical
Orientation and Quality Test Witness at the manufacturer’s factory premises. The cost incurred
for this purpose shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed the cost in this regard is
included in the offered price.
The cost of Air Tickets (both way) from Bangladesh to Manufacturer’s Country (place of
Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness), Hotel Accommodation etc. will be borne by
the contractor. Other than this the contractor will pay a standard amount of pocket money( 200
USD per day) (Excluding journey period).The period for this purpose is 07 (Seven) working
days (Excluding Journey time). All the cost of this purpose shall be deemed is included in the
offered price.
No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved and
written instruction have been received by the Purchaser.
477
7.5.3.1 POST LANDING INSPECTION:
Post landing inspection shall be done immediately after arrival of the goods/materials at
the designated store of NESCO; the Engineer & representative from consignee shall
conduct Post Landing Inspection in presence of the representative of Supplier. The
program of such inspection shall be intimated to the representative of Supplier by
NESCO upon arrival of the materials at NESCO store of the Inspector(s) to be selected
for test witnessing. Any defect or damage have been found at post-delivery inspection,
the defective or damaged panels/ materials/ goods to be repaired/ replaced by the
Bidder/ supplier at his own cost.

7.5.4 TECHNICAL ORIENTATION AND QUALITY TEST WITNESS OF 11KV XLPE

INCOMING & OUTGOING CABLE, CONTROL CABLE, ACSR MARTIN
CONDUCTOR, ACSR GROSBEAK CONDUCTOR STEEL STRUCTURE
The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their
conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time during
manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the manufacturers’ premises,
workmanship and performance.
At least the following test along with routine test shall be carried out as per latest version of
IEC Standard or equivalent IEEE standard or BS standard unless otherwise mentioned at the
manufacturer premises or other places where the test facilities are available:-
1. Measurement of Electrical Resistance of conducts.
2. High voltage test
3. Partial discharge test
4. Capacitance test
5. Voltage test on cable serving
6. Measurement of dimension of insulation and conductor

The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice in
writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will be ready for
testing as provided in the contract and unless the purchaser shall attend at the place so named
on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier may proceed with the tests,
which shall be deemed to have been made in the purchaser’s presence, and shall forth with
forward to the purchaser duly certified copies of test readings.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier accordingly
in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier timely notice in
writing of his intention to attend the test. The contractor shall submit the factory test report to
the engineer for check and verification at least 15 days prior to inspection.
Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer of
the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance,
labor, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as
may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test efficiently. These test shall be performed as
per relevant IEC Standard or equivalent IEEE standard or BS standard only routine tests as
agreed upon, will be performed.
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passes the tests
referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect. Should
any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall have the
right to reject any of the item or complete batch if necessary. In that case Supplier have to
replace the Equipment and to make good of them without any financial involvement to the
Purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not conforming with the specification at the
time of post landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relieved from the responsibility
of replacing them on making them good at their own cost, despite the Equipment were found
478
good at the time of Factory Acceptance Test. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the
supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.
NESCO’s Inspection Team of 03 Engineers shall have to conduct Technical Orientation and
Quality Test Witness at the manufacturer’s factory premises. The cost incurred for this purpose
shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed the cost in this regard is included in the
offered price.
The cost of Air Tickets (both way) from Bangladesh to Manufacturer’s Country (place of
Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness), Hotel Accommodation, fooding and lodging
etc. will be borne by the contractor. Other than this the contractor will pay a standard amount
of pocket money ( USD 200) per day (including journey period). The period for this purpose is
07 (Seven) working days (Excluding Journey time). All the cost of this purpose shall be
deemed is included in the offered price.
No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved and
written instruction have been received by the Purchaser.
The bidder has to mention the place of Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness in the
following table:-
Period of Technical Place & Country of
Sl. No. Item Orientation and Technical Orientation and
Quality Test Witness Quality Test Witness

7.5.4.1 Post Landing Inspection:

Post landing inspection shall be done immediately after arrival of the goods/materials at the
designated store of NESCO/project office/ site; the quality witness team (pre-delivery
inspection team) along with the engineer shall conduct Post Landing Inspection in presence of
the representative of Supplier.

The inspection team shall conduct the following test

i) Design and visual (physical) inspection and quantity checks

The program of such inspection shall be intimated to the representative of Supplier by NESCO
upon arrival of the materials at NESCO store/project office of the Inspector(s) to be selected
for test witnessing. Any defect or damage have been found at post-delivery inspection, the
defective or damaged panels/ materials/ goods to be repaired/ replaced by the Bidder/ supplier
at his own cost. The goods/materials materials shall be under the custody of the contractor for
installation. The contractor shall be responsible for all types of safety and security of the
inspected materials

7.5.5 INSPECTION AND TESTING of Substation Automation System

Inspection and testing before shipment/ supply shall be in accordance with the relevant IEC
standard.

7.5.5.1 Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness (Acceptance test)

The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect examine and test the goods/materials to confirm
their conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time
during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the manufacturers’
premises, workmanship and performance.
The Routine test shall be carried out as per latest version of relevant IEC/ BS or equivalent
international standards as mentioned in the contract at the manufacturer premises or other
places where the test facilities are available.

479
The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give notice to the Purchaser in writing of the
date and the place where the material or equipment will be ready for quality witness testing.
When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier accordingly
in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier timely notice in
writing of his intention to attend the test. Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises
of the supplier or of any manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall
provide free of charge such assistance, labor, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and
instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test
efficiently. These tests shall be performed as per latest version of relevant IEC/ BS or
equivalent international standards as mentioned in the contract and only routine tests as agreed
upon, will be performed.
As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/ equipments shall have passes the
tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect.
Should any inspected/ tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall
have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case Supplier
has to replace the equipment and to make good of them and the supplier shall conduct similar
pre-delivery Inspection and factory tests without any financial involvement to the purchaser. In
case any of the Equipment found not conforming to the specification at the time of post landing
Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relieved from the responsibility of replacing them on
making them good at their own cost, despite the Equipment were found good at the time of
Factory Acceptance Test. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any
warranty or other obligations under the contract.

NESCO’s Inspection Team of 03 Engineers shall have to conduct Technical Orientation and
Quality Test Witness at the manufacturer’s factory premises. The cost incurred for this purpose
shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed the cost in this regard is included in the
offered price.
The cost of Air Tickets (both way) from Bangladesh to Manufacturer’s Country (place of
Technical Orientation and Quality Test Witness), Hotel Accommodation, fooding and lodging
etc. will be borne by the contractor. Other than this the contractor will pay a standard amount
of pocket money (USD 200) per day (including journey period). The period for this purpose is
07 (Seven) working days (Excluding Journey time). All the cost of this purpose shall be
deemed is included in the offered price.

No goods shall be packed, prepared for shipment/delivery unless it has been approved including
factory Test reports and written instructions has been issued by the Purchaser.

7.5.5.2 POST-LANDING INSPECTION AND TESTING:

The Supplier shall inform the purchaser immediately after arrival of the goods at the
designated store of NESCO (as per delivery schedule). An Inspection team of NESCO shall
perform the post-landing inspection in presence of supplier's representative. The Supplier shall
arrange the program of post-landing inspection. Any defect or damage have been found at post-
landing inspection, the defective or damaged materials/ goods to be replaced by the supplier at
his own cost within the stipulated time.
The purchaser’s right to inspect, test (where necessary) and reject the goods after delivery
at the designated store of NESCO shall in no way be limited or waived by reason of the goods

480
having previously been inspected, tested and passed by the purchaser prior to the good's
delivery.
The Inspection team will check the physical conditions and quantity of the goods
delivered. If necessary, the inspection team will select the sample of good(s) and sent the
selected sample goods to CERS, BPDB or BUET/ CUET/ KUET /RUET (as selected by the
inspection team) to carry out the test(s) as per contract to confirm the conformity to the
approved Technical Specifications, Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP), drawings and
relevant standards. If the tested sample(s) fail to confirm the specifications in tests, the full
consignment will be rejected. All cost of testing of Materials/ Goods including carrying,
loading, un-loading etc. will be borne by the supplier.

N.B. Third Party Inspection:

a) For any reason, if purchaser’s/Employer’s representative(s) cannot attend above mentioned “Witnessing of
manufacturing process and tests of the equipment at manufacturer’s works including transfer of technical
know-how” program, a Third Party Inspection Company/Agency shall conduct/ witness Pre-shipment
Inspection as well as Factory Acceptance Tests as per Contract and relevant standard at the manufacturer’s
Premises with the concurrence of NESCO The Third Party Inspector shall submit a comprehensive report to
purchaser with recommendation accompanied with photograph and video clips with date and time of the
Equipment/Materials/Goods inspected within 7 days after completion of respective inspection/Test. After
approval of third party Inspection report by NESCO, shipping advice shall be issued to Supplier/Contractor.
No Equipment/Materials/Goods shall be shipped without shipping advice.
b) The inspections/Tests shall be performed on as-needed basis as per schedule provided by the respective
manufacturers.
c) Supplier/contractor/manufacturer shall not claim any additional cost for third party inspection. But if the
cost is less than the regular cost of PSI/FAT by NESCO's representatives, then the excess bill will be
deducted from final bill.
d) The third party inspection company/agency must not be involved in design, procurement, fabrication,
construction and installation under this contract.
e) Contractor/Supplier shall propose any of the following companies/agencies as Third Party Inspector:
1. BUREAU VERITAS
2. SGS
3. Black and Veatch
4. Mott MacDonald
5. TUV SUD
6. Lloyd Inspection Agency
7. Intertek group
8. Any other internationally accredited, independent & reputed inspection company/agency with global
presence having minimum 05 years experiences as third party inspection company/agency and related
activities in the major Engineering Industries can be selected. In addition, Inspection Company / agency must
be a member of the International federation of inspection agency (IFIA)/ TIC Council must have valid
accreditation certificate for ISO 9001 and ISO/IEC 17020 and experience in successful completion of the
similar test activities for relevant item.

f) With the approval of NESCO, contractor/supplier shall engage third party inspection company/agency.
The Third Party Inspection is applicable for Equipment/Materials/Goods manufactured outside Bangladesh.
NESCO reserves the right to revise the above mentioned list.

Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligation under the
provisions of the contract/ purchase order.

481
 7.6 Pre-commissioning Test of Substation
(Test reports and documents required for substation commissioning)
7.6.1 Circuit Breaker (33 kV):
1. Name plate data
2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance & DAR across open contact, Phase to Ground,
Phase to Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power frequency withstand test
(Hipot)/ Leakage current test etc.)
3. Closing/Opening operation check from Remote & Local, Closing Interlock check, Anti-
pumping operation check
4. Closing/Opening timing check
5. Contact resistance check
6. Spring charge operation check, heating and illumination circuit functionality check

7.6.2 CT/PT (33 kV & 11 kV):

1. Name plate data
2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance & DAR across Primary to Ground, Secondary to
Ground, Primary to Secondary, Secondary 1 to Secondary 2, Phase to Phase etc. with
minimum 5 kV test voltage for primary and 500 V test voltage for secondary / Power
frequency withstand test (Hipot)/ Leakage current test/ tan δ test etc.)
3. Polarity & Ratio test
4. CT magnetization curve test
5. CT secondary winding resistance check

7.6.3 Control & Relay Protection Panel (33 kV):

1. Name Plate Data
2. Complete Relay test (Over current & Earth fault relay, Directional Over current & Earth
fault relay (if applicable), Differential relay etc.
3. Primary injection test (Tripping & indication test of Over current & Earth fault relay,
CT core allocation check, Single point earthing check)
4. Differential relay & Restricted Earth Fault relay tripping, indication and stability test

482
 5. Master Trip relay, Trip circuit supervision relay, DC/AC fail relay and all other
auxiliary relay functionality check
6. Closing/Opening operation check from CP & SCADA, Closing Interlock check, Anti-
pumping operation check
7. Trip logic test
8. Alarm and indication circuit functionality check, Indicative meter and Energy meter
check
9. Heating and illumination circuit functionality check
10. Wiring/ Ferrule Number/ Color Coding check as per drawing

7.6.4 Switchgear Panel (11 kV):

1. Name Plate Data
2. Insulation Test of Circuit breaker (Insulation resistance & DAR across open contact,
Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power
frequency withstand test (Hipot)/ Leakage current test etc.)
3. Insulation Test of Busbar (Insulation resistance & DAR across Phase to Ground, Phase
to Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power frequency withstand test
(Hipot)/ Leakage current test etc.)
4. Complete Relay test (Over current & Earth fault relay, Directional Over current & Earth
fault relay (if applicable) etc.)
5. Primary injection test (Tripping & indication test of O/C & E/F relay, CT core
allocation check, Single point earthing check)
6. Master Trip relay, Trip circuit supervision relay, DC/AC fail relay and all other
auxiliary relay functionality check
7. Closing/Opening operation check from CP & SCADA, Closing Interlock check,
Mechanical Interlock check, Anti-pumping operation check
8. Alarm and indication circuit functionality check, Indicative meter and Energy meter
check
9. Closing/Opening timing check
10. Contact resistance check
11. Spring charge operation check, heating and illumination circuit functionality check
12. Wiring/ Ferrule Number/ Color Coding check as per drawing

7.6.5 Power Transformer:

1. Name plate data
2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance, DAR & PI across HV to LV, HV to Ground, LV
to Ground etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power frequency withstand test
(Hipot)/ Leakage current test/ tan δ test etc.)
3. Winding Resistance check
4. OLTC functionality check
5. Voltage Ratio check (At all tap changer positions)
6. Open circuit test (magnetizing current and no load loss measurement)
7. Short circuit test (At all tap changer positions)
8. Magnetic balance test

483
 9. Vector group check
10. Bushing CT polarity & ratio test, magnetization curve test, secondary winding
resistance check
11. Functionality check of cooling fan (Manual operation by WTI, OTI)
12. Functionality check and trip test of WTI, OTI, PRD, Buchholz relay (MT and OLTC)
etc.
13. AVR functionality check (if provided)
14. Oil Test Report (Main Tank (Top & Bottom) & OLTC)
15. Heating circuit functionality check.

7.6.6 Disconnecting Switch/Isolator/Earthing Switch (33 kV & 11 kV):

1. Name plate data
2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance & DAR across open contact, Phase to Ground,
Phase to Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power frequency withstand test
(Hipot)/ Leakage current test etc.)
3. Contact resistance check
4. Closing/Opening operation check, Mechanical Interlock check

7.6.7 Busbar (33 kV):

1. Busbar details (Size, Type and Capacity etc.)
2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance & DAR across Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power frequency withstand test (Hipot)/
Leakage current test etc.)

7.6.8 Underground Cable & Line Conductor (33 kV & 11 kV):

1. Underground Cable & Line Conductor details (Size, Type and Capacity etc.)
2. Insulation Test (Insulation resistance, DAR & PI across Phase to Ground, Phase to
Phase etc. with minimum 5 kV test voltage / Power frequency withstand test (Hipot)/
Leakage current test/ tan δ test (for cable only) etc.)
3. Phase Sequence Check

7.6.9 Earthing Resistance Measurement (Desired value < 0.25 Ω):

1. Substation mesh earthing
2. CRP panel & Switchgear panel earthing
3. 33 kV CB/CT/PT/LA/Isolator etc. earthing
4. Power Transformer body & neutral earthing

7.6.10 DC System:
Charger:
1. Nameplate data
2. Functionality check (Boost charge, Float charge, Trickle charge etc.)

484
 3. Protection check (Over voltage, Over load, Short circuit, Earth fault, Reverse
polarity etc.)
4. Alarm & Indication check

Battery:
1. Nameplate data
2. Capacity test (Battery bank shall be discharged at rated current by applying load
bank under charger switched off condition and voltage of each cell shall be
measured at 30 minutes interval with a duration up to Cell EODV)

7.6.11 Substation Automation System

7.6.12 Attachments:

1. Approved Equipment Layout Drawing (33 kV Switchyard, Control Room, 11 kV

Switchgear).
2. Approved Single Line Diagram along with relay model, CT ratio and load.
3. Approved Schematic diagram of CRP panel and Switchgear panel.
4. Approved General Arrangement (GA) drawing of Front View, Rear View, LHS view,
RHS view of the panel.
5. Fault level calculation, CT sizing calculation.
6. Trip Matrix along with detail relay settings and related calculation for Line Feeder,
Transformer feeder, Incomer Feeder and Outgoing Feeder.
NB:
1. The above mentioned information and reports must be submitted to the office of the
Superintending Engineer, Design & Inspection, NESCO, Dhaka at least 15 days before
the expected date of commissioning. Softcopy of the requested information and
documents will have to be emailed to design.inspection@nesco.gov.bd /
se.sp@nesco.gov.bd / pd.rajpdp@nesco.gov.bd.
2. The pre-commissioning test must be witnessed by NESCO engineers and must be
signed by the testing team members and witnesses.
3. Description of the test equipment for each test shall be mentioned.
4. The relay settings have to be finalized as per NESCO’s recommendation.

485
 SECTION 08
Guaranteed Technical Particular (GTP)
OF
(PLANT & EQUIPMENT)

486
 8.01. Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 33 KV Outdoor Type Vacuum Circuit
Breaker
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
1 Manufacturer’s Name & Country - To be mentioned
2 Manufacturer’s model no. - To be mentioned
3 Maximum Rated Voltage KV 36
4 Frequency Hz 50
5 Rated Normal current A 1600A
6 No. of phase - 3
7 No. of break per phrase - To be mentioned
8 Interrupting medium - Vacuum
9 Manufacturer's name and country of vacuum - ABB/Siemens/GE/S
interrupter chneider
10 Manufacturer's model no. of vacuum interrupter - To be mentioned
11 Impulse withstand on 1.2/50 s wave KVp 170
12 Power Frequency Test Voltage (Dry), at 50Hz, 1 KV 70
min.
13 Short time withstand current, 3 second, rms KA 31.5
14 Breaking capacity:
a) Symmetrical, rms KA 31.5
b) Asymmetrical, rms KA 25
15 Short circuit making current, peak KA 80
16 First phase to clear factor - To be mentioned
17 Rated transient recovery voltage at 100% rated KVp To be mentioned
short circuit breaking current
18 Rated line charging breaking current A To be mentioned
19 Rated cable charging breaking current A To be mentioned
20 Rated out of phase breaking current A To be mentioned
21 Is circuit breaking restrike free? Yes/No Yes
487
 Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
22 Trip coil current A To be mentioned
23 Trip coil voltage V, DC 110
24 Is the circuit breaker trip free? Yes/No Yes
25 Type of arc contacts or arc control Device - To be mentioned
26 Main Contact :
a) Type of contact - To be mentioned
b) Material of contract surfaces - To be mentioned
Less than 40
c) Contract resistance 
27 Does magnetic effect of load Yes/ No To be mentioned
Currents increase contact pressure?
28 Length of each break/ phase mm To be mentioned
29 Length of stroke mm To be mentioned
30 Weight of circuit breaker unit complete, without Kg To be mentioned
operating mechanism and structure
31 Weight of circuit breaker complete with all fittings Kg To be mentioned
as in service.
32 Maximum shock load imposed on floor or N To be mentioned
foundation when opening under fault conditions
(state compression or tension)
33 Maximum pressure rise in circuit Breaker due to KN/m2 To be mentioned
making or breaking of Rated current in outer
chamber
34 Routine pressure test on circuit KN/m2 To be mentioned
Breaker tanks or chamber

35 Design pressure type test on circuit KN/m2 To be mentioned

Breaker tanks or chamber
Operating Particulars:
36 a) Opening time: without current at 100% sec. 0.05 (maximum)
of rated breaking current
b) Breaking time Cycle 5
c) Closing time ms To be mentioned
d) Closing + breaking time ms To be mentioned
37 Maximum arc duration of any duty Cycle of IEC ms To be mentioned
60056-2 At…%
38 Current at which maximum arc duration occurs A To be mentioned
(critical current)
39 Make time ms To be mentioned
40 Minimum time for arc extinction to Contract ms To be mentioned
remark when adapted for auto re-closing
41 Time from closing of control switch to completion ms To be mentioned
of closing stroke during fault making
Constructional Features:
42 Is an external series break Incorporated in the Yes/ No To be mentioned
breaker?

488
 Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
43 Is any device used to limit transient Recovery Yes/ No To be mentioned
voltage?
44 Method of closing - To be mentioned

45 Method of tripping - To be mentioned

46 Number of close/ trip operation possible on one Nos. To be mentioned
spring charge
47 Rated voltage of spring winding motor for closing V.AC 230
48 Spring winding motor current A To be mentioned
49 Closing release coil current A To be mentioned
50 Closing release coil voltage V.DC 110
51 Minimum clearance in air :
a) Between phase mm 370
b) Phase to earth mm 325
c) Across circuit breaker poles mm To be mentioned
d) Live conductor to ground level mm To be mentioned
e) Live insulator to ground level mm To be mentioned
52 Degree of protection IP 55
53 Material of tank or chamber - To be mentioned
54 Material of moving contract tension rod - To be mentioned
55 Period of time equipment has been in Year To be mentioned
commercial operation
56 No .of tripping coil Nos. 2
57 Circuit breaker terminal connectors - Copper
58 Creepage distance (min) mm/KV 25
59 Method of indicating VCB ON/ OFF Mech.& To be mentioned
Elect.
60 Life of interrupter Years To be mentioned
61 Pressure in vacuum tube for VCB Bar To be mentioned
62 Guaranteed nos. of operation for vacuum
Interrupter
a) at rated Current switching Nos. To be mentioned

b) at Short circuit current switching Nos. ≥ 100

63 Rated operating sequence - O-0.3sec-

CO-3m-CO
64 All current carrying parts of VCB Shall be made - Terminals are made
of by Copper/Al-Alloy
and all other parts
are made by Copper.
65. Standard - IEC 62271-100

489
 Manufacturer’s Seal & Signature Bidder Seal & Signature

8.02. Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 33 KV Protection Control and Metering

Panel
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
1. Manufacturer's Name & Country of - To be mentioned
origin
2. Manufacturer's Model no. - To be mentioned
3. System nominal voltage kV 33
4. Maximum System Voltage kV 36
5. Rated Frequency Hz 50
A. PROTECTION CONTROL & METERING (Transformer Feeder)
6. Differential Relay
Manufacture's Name & ABB- (Sweden/
Country of Origin Switzerland/ Finland)
/ Siemens-(Germany)/
Alstom-(France/UK)/
Schneider-(France/UK)
/ SEL, USA
Manufacturer's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of Relay Numerical
programmable
Maximum through fault at which the protective equipment is stable with
recommend settings:
a) Earth faults rating Shall be mentioned
b) Phase faults % of Shall be mentioned
CT
rating
Maximum time delay between ms Shall be mentioned
initiation of fault and energize of
breaker trip circuit.
490
 Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
The Relay shall be IEC 61850 Yes
protocol type.
7. Restricted Earth Fault Relay
Manufacture's Name & ABB- (Sweden/
Country of Origin Switzerland/ Finland)
/ Siemens-(Germany)/
Alstom-(France/UK)/
Schneider-(France/UK)
/ SEL, USA
Manufacturer's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of Relay Numerical
programmable
Range of current setting : % of Shall be mentioned
CT
rating
Earth fault element Range of Sec Shall be mentioned
timing settings at 10 time CT rating
Burden of relay at 10 time CT VA Shall be mentioned
rating
Percentage of current setting at % Shall be mentioned
which relay will reset.
The Relay shall be IEC 61850 Yes
protocol type.

8 IDMT OVER CURRENT & EARTH FAULT Relay

Manufacture's Name & ABB- (Sweden/Switzerland/
Country of Origin Finland) / Siemens-
(Germany)/ Alstom-(France/
UK)/ Schneider-(France/UK) /
SEL, USA
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of relay Numerical
programmable
Multifunction
The Relay shall be IEC 61850 Yes
protocol type.
Range of current setting:
a) Phase element % of Shall be mentioned
CT Shall be mentioned
b) Each fault element rating
Range of timing settings at 10 time Sec Shall be mentioned
CT rating
Burden of relay at 10 time CT VA Shall be mentioned
rating
Percentage of current at which % Shall be mentioned
relay will reset
491
 Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
Reset time after removal of 10 Sec Shall be mentioned
times CT rated current
Three phase power measurement Yes / Yes
option No
Frequency Protection Yes/ Yes
No
Over voltage and under voltage Yes/No Yes
9 Separate Auxiliary Flag Relays for
Transformer self-protection (OTA,
OTT, WTA, WTT, BA, BT, OLTC
Surge, PRD for main tank.
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no Shall be mentioned
Type of Relays Shall be mentioned
10 Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) Relay
(Separate Relay for each trip coil)
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of Relay Shall be mentioned
11 Trip Relay (Separate Relay)
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Operating Time ms <10
Self-reset type for O/C, E/F Yes
protection
Hand & Electrical reset type for Yes
Differential, REF and Transformer
Self-protection

12 Annunciator
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Windows nos. 24

Built in buzzer and buttons for Yes

accept, mute, test, reset, etc.
13 Control Switch
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model/Type No. Shall be mentioned
Separate TNC/Discrepancy switch Yes
and Local Remote (L/R) selector
switch
14 Panel Dimension (Width) mm ≤800
15 Panel Dimension (depth & Height) mm To be mentioned
492
 Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
16 Panel DC Power Supply and
Panel Feature
Number of 110 V DC power Nos 2
supply incoming to panel
DC Power Supply changeover Automatic
DC Changer over time ms To be mentioned
SCADA Control Option Yes
CT PT hookup option in SCADA Yes
17 Test terminal block for over current Yes
Relay & Differential relay
B. PROTECTION CONTROL & METERING (Line Feeder)
18 IDMT OVER CURRENT & EARTH FAULT RELAY with Directional feature
Manufacture's Name & ABB- (Sweden/Switzerland/
Country of Origin Finland)/Siemens
(Germany)/Alstom-
(France/UK)/ Schneider-
(France/UK)
/ SEL, USA
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of relay Numerical
programmable
Multifunction
Directional Feature can be Yes/N Yes
activated/de-activated o
The Relay shall be IEC 61850 Yes
protocol type.
Range of current setting :
a) Phase element % of Shall be mentioned
CT Shall be mentioned
b) Each fault element rating
Range of timing settings at 10 time Sec Shall be mentioned
CT rating
Burden of relay at 10 time CT rating VA Shall be mentioned
Percentage of Current setting at % Shall be mentioned
which relay will reset
Reset time after removal of 10 time Shall be mentioned
CT rated current for:
a) Phase element (100%) Sec
b) E/F element (40%) Sec
Three phase power measurement Yes
option
Frequency Protection Yes
Over voltage and under voltage Yes
19 Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) Relay
(Separate Relay for each trip coil)
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
493
 Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
Type of Relay Shall be mentioned
20 Trip Relay (Separate Relay)
Manufacture's Name Shall be mentioned
Country of Origin Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Operating Time ms <10
Self-reset type for O/C, E/F protection Yes
21 Annunciator
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Windows nos. 12
Built in buzzer and buttons for Yes
accept, mute, test, reset, etc.
22 Control Switch
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model/Type No. Shall be mentioned
Separate TNC/Discrepancy switch and Yes
Local Remote (L/R) selector

Switch
23 Panel Dimension (Width) mm ≤600
24 Panel Dimension (depth & Height) mm To be mentioned
25 Panel DC Power Supply system
and Panel Feature
Number of 110 V DC power Nos 2
supply incoming to panel
DC Power Supply changeover Automatic
DC Changer over time ms To be mentioned
SCADA Control Option Yes/N Yes
o
CT , PT hookup option in SCADA Yes/N Yes
o
Test terminal block for over current Yes/N Yes
Relay o
26 METERING AND INSTRUMENTATION
26.1 Multi tariff programmable meter
Manufacture’s Name & Country Siemens (Germany/
Switzerland)/ AEG
(Germany) / ABB
(Switzerland)/ Toshiba
(JAPAN) /Elster (USA
/Romania), Landis+
Gyr (Switzer land/Greece)/
Honeywell (USA)/ CEWE
(UK)
Manufacture’s Model no. Shall be mentioned
Type of Meter Numerical
programmable

494
 Bidders
Sl NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No Requirement
value
Multifunction

Class of Accuracy 0.2

26.2 Multifunction meter ( KW,KWH, KVARh, Voltage,current,
PF,Frequency)
Manufacturer’s Name and Country - To be mentioned.
Manufacture’s Model no. - To be mentioned
Type of meter - Digital
Class of Accuracy - 0.5
Communication Protocol IEC-61850
26.3 VOLT METERS with Selector Switch
Manufacturer’s Name and Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture’s Model no. Shall be mentioned
Analogue/digital,90-
Type of Meter degree scale range
Class of Accuracy 1.0
26.4 AMPERE METERS
Manufacturer’s Name and Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture’s Model no. Shall be mentioned
Analogue/digital, 240-
Type of Meter
degree scale range
Class of Accuracy 1.0
Separate Ameter for each phase Yes
27 The PCM Panel Shall comply all Yes
the technical specification
mentioned in Section-7.

Manufacturer’s Seal & Signature Bidder Seal & Signature

495
 8.03 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 11KV Indoor Type Vacuum Breaker with
Protection, Control & Metering Cubicles

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
1. Manufacturer's Name & Country of origin - To be mentioned
2. Manufacturer's Model no. - To be mentioned
3. System nominal voltage kV 11
4. Maximum System Voltage kV 12
5. Rated Frequency Hz 50
6. Rated normal current:
a) Incoming for Power Transformer (10/13.33 MVA) A 1600

b) Bus Coupler A 2000

C) Outgoing Feeder A 630

7. No. of phase nos. 3
8. No. of breaks per phase nos. To be mentioned
9. Interrupting medium - Vacuum
10. Manufacturer's name and country of origin of Vacuum - To be mentioned
Interrupter
11. Manufacturer's model no. of vacuum interrupter - To be mentioned
12. Power Frequency withstand voltage kV 28
13. Lightning Impulse withstand voltage on 1.2/50 s kVp 75
wave
14. Emergency overload rating of normal at 200C ambient - To be mentioned
15. Duration in any 24 hrs. period - To be mentioned
16. Busbar Scheme no. Single
17. Number of Busbar nos. 3
0
18. Temperature Rise of Busbar at rated current C To be mentioned
19. Material of Busbar - Copper
20. Cross-section of Busbar mm2 To be mentioned
21. Rated normal current of bus bar
A.10/13.33 MVA A 2000

22. Bus bar insulation material - To be mentioned

23. Are floor plates or rails included? - To be mentioned
24. Overall dimensions of each circuit breaker unit :
a) Incomer :-
- Height mm To be mentioned
- Width mm ≤ 900mm
- Depth mm To be mentioned
b) Feeder :-
- Height mm To be mentioned
- Width mm ≤ 700mm

496
 Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
- Depth mm To be mentioned
c) Bus coupler with riser :-
- Height mm To be mentioned.
- Width mm ≤ 1800mm
- Depth mm To be mentioned
25. Width necessary for breaker withdrawal mm To be mentioned
26. Rated Short-time withstand Current (Rated short KA min 31.5
circuit breaking current) for 3 sec.
27. Rated Peak withstand Current (Rated short circuit KA min 62.5
making current)
28. Breaking capacity :
a) Symmetrical rms KA 31.5
b) Asymmetrical rms KA 25
29. Rated duration of short circuit Sec. 3sec
30. Degrees of protection by enclosures IP IP4X
31. First pole to clear factor - To be mentioned
32. Rate transient recovery voltage at 100% rated short KVp To be mentioned
circuit breaking current
33. Rated line charging breaking current A To be mentioned
34. Rated cable charging breaking current A To be mentioned
35. Rated out of phase breaking current A To be mentioned
36. Is circuit breaker re-strike free? - Yes
37. No. of tripping coil nos. 2
38. Trip coil current A To be mentioned
39. Trip coil voltage VDC 110
40. Is circuit breaker trip free? - Yes
41. Type of main contact - To be mentioned
42. Material of contact surface - To be mentioned
43. Contact resistance  To be mentioned
44. Does magnetic effect of load current increase contact? - To be mentioned
45. Length of each break/ phase mm To be mentioned
46. Length of stroke mm To be mentioned
47. Weight of circuit breaker complete, without operating Kg To be mentioned
mechanism and cubicles
48. Weight of circuit breaker complete with PCM cubicles Kg To be mentioned
as in service
49. Maximum shock load imposed on floor or foundation N To be mentioned
when opening under fault condition (state
compression or tensions)

OPERATING :
50. Operating Sequence - To be mentioned
51. a) Opening time without current at 100% of rated ms To be mentioned
breaking current
b) Braking time cycle To be mentioned
c) Closing time ms To be mentioned
497
 Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
52. Maximum arc duration of any duty cycle as per latest ms To be mentioned
revision of relevant IEC. at....%
53. Current at which maximum arc duration occurs A To be mentioned
(critical current)
54. Make time ms To be mentioned
55. Minimum time for arc extinction to contact remake ms To be mentioned
when adapted for auto re-closing
56. Time from closing of control of switch to completion ms To be mentioned
of closing stroke during fault making.
57. Is there anti-pumping facility? - Yes
58. Is there electrical and mechanical interlocking? - Yes
59. Pressure in vacuum tube bar To be mentioned
60. Guaranteed no. of operation for vacuum interrupter nos. To be mentioned
61. In normal condition at rated current switching nos. To be mentioned
62. In short circuit condition i.e. at the short circuit current nos. ≥ 100
switching
CONSTRUCTION FEATURE :
63. Is an external series break incorporated in the breaker? - To be mentioned
64. Is any device used to limit transient recovery voltage? - To be mentioned
65. Method of closing - To be mentioned
66. Method of tripping - To be mentioned
67. Minimum clearance in air :
a) between phases mm To be mentioned
b) phase to earth mm To be mentioned
68. Material of tank or chamber - To be mentioned
69. Material of moving contact tension rod - To be mentioned
70. Period of time equipment has been in commercial Years To be mentioned
operation
71. Is removable draw-out type VCB mounted on the - To be provided
lower part of the panel i.e. on floor?
72. All meters, protective relays, signaling etc. mounted - To be mentioned
on the upper part of the panel.
73. Rates voltage of spring winding motor for closing. Vac 230
74. Materials of all current carrying parts of VCB. - Terminals are made
by Copper/Al-Alloy
and all other parts are
made by copper.
75. Name of relevant IEC Standards to be followed for - To be mentioned
Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance.
76. Internal Arc Classification IAC A FLR- 31.5 KA for 1 KA 31.5 KA for 1 sec
sec (Must be supported by type test report from any
short-circuit testing liaison (STL) Member
[http://www.stl-liaison.org/web/03_Members.php]
Testing Organization or Laboratory as per relevant
IEC standard).
77. Earthing Switch To be provided
78. Earthing Switch Integrated with Panel Yes
79. Earthing switch Mechanical interlock with VCB Yes
Rack-in
498
 Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
80. Electrical interlock of Earthing switch with VCB rack To be mentioned
in
81. Panel Mounting Lightning arrester 12 KV, 10 KA To be mentioned
discharge current, short ckt 20 KA (min) for ≥0.2 sec
PROTECTION
A. 33/11KV, 10/13.33MVA 11KV TRANSFORMER
INCOMING CUBICLES
81.0 OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
WITH IDMT & INSTANTANEOUS FEATURES
81.1 Manufacture's name & country of relay - ABB- (Sweden/
Switzerland/
Finland) /
Siemens-
(Germany)/
Alstom-
(France/UK)/
Schneider-
(France/UK) /
SEL, USA
81.2 Manufacture's model no. - To be mentioned
81.3 Type of relay - Numerical
programmable with
directional and all
necessary features
81.4 The Relay shall be IEC 61850 protocol type. Yes
81.5 Range of timing settings at 10 time CT rating Sec To be mentioned
81.6 Burden of relay at 10 time CT rating VA To be mentioned

499
 Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
81.7 Percentage of current setting at which relay will reset % To be mentioned
81.8 Reset time after removal of 10 time CT rated current
for : To be mentioned
a) Phase element (100%) Sec To be mentioned
b) E/F element (40%) Sec
81.9 Over & Under voltage Protection Yes
81.10 Frequency Protection Yes
81.11 Three phase Power measurement option Yes
81.12 Trip Relays (Separate trip relay shall be provided)
Manufacturer’s Name and Country To be mentioned
Manufacturer’s Model/type No. To be mentioned
Operating Times <10 ms
Self-reset type for O/C, E/F protection Yes
Design: modular Type To be mentioned
81.13 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay (Separate relay shall
be provided for each trip coil)
Manufacture’s name & country of relay To be mentioned
Manufacture’s model no. To be mentioned
82.0 SEPARATE STANDBY EARTH FAULT PROTECTION
82.1 Manufacture's name & country - ABB- (Sweden/
Switzerland/
Finland) /
Siemens-
(Germany)/
Alstom-
(France/UK)/
Schneider-
(France/UK) / SEL
USA.
82.2 Manufacture's model no. - To be mentioned
82.3 Type of relay - Numerical
programmable with
all necessary
features
82.4 Range of current setting :
a) Phase element (% of CT rating) % To be mentioned
b) Earth fault element (% of CT rating) % To be mentioned
82.5 Range of timing settings at 10 time CT rating Sec To be mentioned
82.6 Burden of relay at 10 time CT rating VA To be mentioned
82.7 Percentage of current setting at which relay will reset % To be mentioned
82.8 Reset time after removal of 10 time CT rated
current for :
a) Phase element (100%) Sec To be mentioned
b) E/F element (40%) Sec To be mentioned
83 Control Switch
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model/Type No. Shall be mentioned
Separate TNC/Discrepancy switch and Local Remote Yes
(L/R) selector switch

500
 Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
84 Annunciator
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Windows nos. 12
Built in buzzer and buttons for accept, mute, test, Yes
reset, etc.
B 11KV BUS COUPLER CUBICLES
85.0 OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION WITH IDMT & INSTANTANEOUS FEATURES
85.1 Manufacture's name & country of relay - ABB- (Sweden/
Switzerland/
Finland) /Siemens-
(Germany)/
Alstom-
(France/ UK)/
Schneider-
(France/UK) /
SEL, USA
85.2 Manufacture's model no. - To be mentioned
85.3 Type of relay - Numerical
programmable with
all necessary
features
85.3 The Relay shall be IEC 61850 protocol type. Yes
85.4 Range of current setting :
a) Phase element (% of CT rating) % To be mentioned
b) Earth fault element (% of CT rating) % To be mentioned
85.5 Range of timing settings at 10 time CT rating Sec To be mentioned
85.6 Burden of relay at 10 time CT rating VA To be mentioned
85.7 Percentage of current setting at which relay will reset % To be mentioned
85.8 Reset time after removal of 10 time CT rated current
for : Sec To be mentioned
a) Phase element (100%) Sec To be mentioned
b) E/F element (40%)
85.9 Over & Under voltage Protection Yes
85.10 Auxiliary Voltage AC & DC V To be mentioned
86 Trip Relay (Separate trip relay shall be provided )
Manufacturer’s Name and Country To be mentioned
Manufacturer’s Model/type No. To be mentioned
Operating Times ms <10
Self-reset type for O/C, E/F protection Yes
Design: modular Type To be mentioned
87 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay (Separate relay shall
be provided for each trip coil)
Manufacture’s name & country of relay To be mentioned
Manufacture’s model no. To be mentioned
88 Control Switch
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model/Type No. Shall be mentioned
Separate TNC/Discrepancy switch and Local Remote Yes
(L/R) selector switch

501
 Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
89 Annunciator
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Windows nos. 8
Built in buzzer and buttons for accept, mute, test, Yes
reset, etc.
C 11KV OUTGOING FEEDER CUBICLES
90.0 OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION WITH IDMT & INSTANTANEOUS FEATURES
90.1 Manufacture's name & country of relay - ABB- (Sweden/
Switzerland/
Finland)/
Siemens (Germany)/
Alstom-
(France/UK)/
Schneider-
(France/UK)/
SEL, USA
90.2 Manufacture's model no. - To be mentioned
90.3 Type of relay - Numerical
programmable
90.3. The Relay shall be IEC 61850 protocol type. Yes
90.4 Range of current setting : To be mentioned
a) Phase element (% of CT rating) % To be mentioned
b) Earth fault element (% of CT rating) %
90.5 Range of timing settings at 10 time CT rating Sec To be mentioned
90.6 Burden of relay at 10 time CT rating VA To be mentioned
90.7 Percentage of current setting at which relay will reset % To be mentioned
90.8 Reset time after removal of 10 time CT rated current
for : To be mentioned
a) Phase element (100%) Sec To be mentioned
b) E/F element (40%) Sec
90.9 Over & Under voltage Protection Yes
90.10 Frequecny Protection Yes
91 Trip relay (Separate relay shall be provided )
Manufacturer’s Name and Country To be mentioned
Manufacturer’s Model/type No. To be mentioned
Operating Times <10
Self-reset type for O/C, E/F protection Yes
Design : modular Type To be mentioned
92 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay (Separate relay shall
be provided )
Manufacture’s name & country of relay To be mentioned
Manufacture’s model no. To be mentioned
93 Control Switch
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned
Manufacture's Model/Type No. Shall be mentioned
Separate TNC/Discrepancy switch and Local Remote Yes
(L/R) selector switch
94 Annunciator
Manufacture's Name & Country Shall be mentioned

502
 Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
Manufacture's Model no. Shall be mentioned
Windows nos. 12
Built in buzzer and buttons for accept, mute, test, Yes
reset, etc.
D METERING AND INDICATION FOR TRANSFORMER 11KV INCOMING, 11KV BUS COUPLER AND 11KV
OUTGOING FEEDER
95.0 Multi tariff programmable meter
95.1 Manufacture’s Name & Country Siemens
(Germany/
Switzerland)/
ABB (Switzerland
/Finland)
AEG (Germany)/
Itron(USA)
/Elster
(USA/Romania)
/Landis+gyr,
(Switzerland/Gree
ce)
/Toshiba (Japan)/
Honeywell
(USA)/CEWE
(UK)
95.2 Manufacture’s Model no. - To be mentioned
95.3 Type of meter - Numerical
Programmable
Multifunction
95.4 Class of accuracy - 0.2
96 Multifunction meter ( KW,KWH, KVARh, Voltage,current, PF)
Manufacturer’s Name and Country - Siemens, ABB,
AEG, Honeywel,
CEWE
Manufacture’s Model no. - To be mentioned
Type of meter - Digital
Class of Accuracy - 0.5
Communication Protocol IEC-61850
97.0 INDICATION VOLT METERS & AMMETERS
Manufacturer’s Name and Country - To be mentioned
Manufacture’s Model no. - To be mentioned
Type of meter - Analogue/digital
Class of Accuracy - 1.0
98.0 VOLTMETER WITH SELECTOR SWITCH

503
 Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
Manufacturer’s Name and Country To be mentioned
Manufacture’s Model no. To be mentioned
Type of meter Analogue/digital
Class of Accuracy 1.0
For Bus Coupler Cubicle two voltmeters shall be fitted Yes
for bus-1 and bus-2 respectively.
99 Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD) based Live Line Yes
Indicator (LLI) for each panel
100 The PCM Panel Shall be complied all the technical Yes
specification mentioned in
Section-7.

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

504
 8.04 Guaranteed technical particulars of 110v 3x5(6)A, 3-phase, 4-wire, 3-element, solid
state indoor type multi tariff programmable meter

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Sl. Manufacture’s
Description Unit Required Specification
No. particulars
Relevant ANSI / IEC
1 Reference Standard
Standard
2 Manufacturer’s name & address Shall be mentioned

Manufacturer’s type & model Shall be mentioned

3
3-Phase 4-wire solidly
4 Construction/connection
grounded neutral
Indoor installation in A socket
5 Installation
[for socket type]
6 Number of element 3 (Three)
7 Rated Voltage Volt 110V

8 Minimum Biasing Voltage Volt 40V

9 Variation of Frequency % ± 2%
10 Variation of Voltage % + 10, -20%
11 Accuracy class 0.2 (point two)
Rated Current
i) Nominal Current A =5
12
ii) Maximum Current A >6

13 Resister Type LCD Display

Number of Digits (Integer with
14 Nos. 5 with 1 (Programmable)
Decimal)
15 Starting Current ma 0.1% of Nominal Current
16 Losses at Nominal Load Watt Shall be mentioned
17 Meter Constant Imp./ Shall be mentioned
Integration Period 30 (Thirty) Minutes
Resetting Period 1 (one) month
18
Cumulative MD transfer Built in
Cycle Timing Device Built in
E x H
19 Size of the Digit of Display 4x8
in mm
20 No. of Terminal Nos. 10 (Ten) min

21 Type of socket and country of origin To be mentioned

Battery Service life and shelf Life

22 Year 10 (ten) & 15 (fifteen)
(minimum)
23 Year of manufacture Shall be mentioned

505
Sl. Manufacture’s
Description Unit Required Specification
No. particulars
List of Recommended spare parts (if
24 any Shall be mentioned
any)
25 Warranty Year 3 (three)
26 Meter Service Life (Min) Year 15 (fifteen)
27 Weight of meter Kg Shall be mentioned
mm x
28 Dimensions mm x Shall be mentioned
mm

29 Outlines, Drawings & Leaflets Shall be mentioned

Performance Curve for Balanced &

30 Shall be mentioned
Unbalanced load

Hermetically or Ultrasonic
31 Meter sealing condition
welded
a) Country of Origin
32 b) Place of Manufacture c) Place of Shall be mentioned
Testing
33 Memory Storage
i) Equipment Identification
Code
ii) Security code
iii) Access code
Shall be mentioned by putting
iv) Number of Power Yes/ No.
Interruption with Date &
Time
V Latest Power Failure- Time
& Date
Vi Event logs
vii) Cumulative kWh, kVarh (Q1
+ Q4) Reading for previous
two months
viii) Load profile with 30 min
interval at least 90 days for:
KWh, kVarh (Q1+Q4)
Phase Voltage or Vh
Phase Amps or Ah

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

506
 8.05 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 33kV OFF-LOAD Isolator with Earth Blade
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s

No. Description Unit Requirement Guaranteed
Particulars
General Description of Disconnecting Switch
-
1. Manufacturer’s Name and country
To be mentioned
2. Manufacturer’s Model - To be mentioned
3. Frequency Hz 50
4. System Nominal Voltage kV 33
5. System Maximum Voltage kV 36
6. Basic Insulation Level kV 170
7. Rated Normal Current A 1600

8. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (for 1 min) kV 70

9. Rated short time withstand current (for 3sec.) kA 31.5

10. Installation - Outdoor
11. Type - Single Vertical Break
12. Construction - Open
13. Mounting Position - Vertical
14. Number of Pole nos. 3 (Three)
15. No. of break per pole nos. One
16. Air gap between pole of phase mm 1000
17. Insulator Material - Porcelain
18. Creepage distance of Insulator mm/K 25
V
19. Current density at the minimum cross Section of To be mentioned
a) Moving Blade
Amps/
b) Terminal Pad
Sq.mm
c) Contacts
d) Terminal Connector
20. Maximum Temp. rise of current carrying parts To be mentioned
when carrying rated current continuously (deg. C)
Contacts:
21. Materials of the current carrying path Copper with Nickel
Plating
22. Contract Resistance for DS & ES μΩ Less than 50
23. Contact Area:
23.1 6x50 mm copper flat
Moving Blade for DS mm 2
bar, length 750±20
mm -02 Nos per phase
23.2 mm2 6x50 mm copper flat
Moving Blade for ES bar, length 500±15
mm -02 Nos per phase
10x60 mm Copper flat
23.3 Terminal Pad
mm2 bar -02 Nos per phase
507
Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s
No. Description Unit Requirement Guaranteed
Particulars
24. Contact type Spring loaded contact
25. Operation - Gang
26. Type of main DS operating mechanism - Manual
27. Number of main DS operating mechanism per set Nos 1
28. Type of Earth Switch operating mechanism - Manual
29. Number of Earth Switch operating mechanism per Nos 1
set
30. Nos. of Auxiliary Contracts (NO/NC) Isolator- 4NO-4NC
For Isolator& Earth Switch
- Earth switch – 4NO-
4NC

31. Locking facility in the operating box in both close - Yes

and open position
32. Mechanical Interlocking facility between main DS - Yes
and ES
33. Operating GI Pipe Dimensions: -
33.1 For main DS - OD- 42 mm, ID – 36
mm, Length – 6 meter
33.2 For Earth Switch - OD- 42 mm, ID – 36
mm, Length – 6 meter
33.3 Controlling handle length of Isolator operating Pipe ≥400mm
34. MS Solid Square Shaft Dimensions for gang -
operation (Hot Dip Galvanized)
34.1 For main DS - 32x32x3600 mm
34.2 For Earth Switch - 25x25x3600mm
35. Total weight of Isolator Kg To be mentioned
36. Total weight of earth switch Kg To be mentioned
37. Total weight of Unit Kg To be mentioned
38. Outline Dimensional & Cross-section Drawings of
Offered type 33KV Isolator & Mounting Structure
Arrangement - To be mentioned
39. Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing
Specification & Technical Data of Offered type - To be mentioned
Equipment.
40. Standard IEC-62271-102
41. Current density at the minimum cross Section of To be mentioned
a) Moving Blade Amps/
b) Terminal Pad
c) Contacts Sq.mm
d) Terminal Connector
42. Maximum Temp. rise of current carrying parts when deg. C To be mentioned
carrying rated current continuously (deg. C)

Note: All exposed MS parts should be Hot Dip Galvanized

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder
508
 8.06 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 33 kV OFF-LOAD Isolator without Earth Blade
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer'

No. Description Unit Requirement s Guaranteed
Particulars
General Description of Disconnecting Switch

-
1. Manufacturer’s Name and country
To be mentioned
2. Manufacturer’s Model - To be mentioned
3. Frequency Hz 50
4. System Nominal Voltage kV 33
5. System Maximum Voltage kV 36
6. Basic Insulation Level kV 170
7. Rated Normal Current A 1600

8. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (for 1 min) kV 70

9. Rated short time withstand current (for 3sec.) kA 31.5

10. Installation - Outdoor
11. Type - Single Vertical Break
12. Construction - Open
13. Mounting Position - Vertical
14. Number of Pole nos. 3 (Three)
15. No. of break per pole nos. One
16. Air gap between pole of phase mm 1000
17. Insulator Material - Porcelain
18. Creepage distance of Insulator mm To be mentioned
19. Current density at the minimum cross Section of To be mentioned
a) Moving Blade Amps/
b) Terminal Pad Sq.m
c) Contacts m
d) Terminal Connector
20. Maximum Temp. rise of current carrying parts To be mentioned
when carrying rated current continuously (deg. C)
Contacts:
21. Materials of the current carrying path Copper with Nickel
Plating
22. Contract Resistance μΩ Less than 50 μΩ
23.
6x50 mm copper flat
23.1 Moving Blade mm2 bar, length 750±20 mm
-02 Nos per phase
23.2 Terminal Pad 10x60 mm Copper flat

509
Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer'
No. Description Unit Requirement s Guaranteed
Particulars
mm2 bar -02 Nos per phase
24. Contact type Spring loaded contact
25. Operation - Gang
26. Type of main DS operating mechanism - Manual
27. Number of main DS operating mechanism per set Nos 1
28. Nos. of Auxiliary Contracts (NO/NC) Isolator- 4NO-4NC
For Isolator
-
29. Locking facility in the operating box in both and - Yes
open position
30. Operating GI Pipe Dimensions: -
a For main DS - OD- 42 mm, ID – 36
mm, Length – 6 meter
b Controlling handle length of Isolator operating Pipe ≥400mm
31. MS Solid Square Shaft Dimensions for gang -
operation (Hot Dip Galvanized):
For main DS - 32x32x3600 mm
32. Total weight of Isolator Kg To be mentioned
33. Total weight of Unit Kg To be mentioned
34. Outline Dimensional & Cross-section Drawings
of
- To be mentioned
Offered type 33KV Isolator & Mounting Structure
Arrangement
35. Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing
Specification & Technical Data of Offered type - To be mentioned
Equipment.
36. Standard IEC-62271-102

Note: All exposed MS parts should be Hot Dip Galvanized

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

510
 8.07 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 KV OFF-LOAD FUSED
ISOLATOR FOR Auxiliary Transformer
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer

No. Description Unit Requirement ' s guaranteed
Particulars
General Description of Disconnecting Switch
1. Manufacturer’s Name and country - To be mentioned

2. Manufacturer’s Model - To be mentioned

3. For Auxiliary Transformer
Application of the Disfconnecting Switch
4. Frequency Hz 50
5. System Nominal Voltage kV 33
6. System Maximum Voltage kV 36
7. Basic Insulation Level kV 170
8. Rated Normal Current A 400

9. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (for 1 min) kV 70

10. Rated short time withstand current (for 3sec.) kA 31.5
11. Installation - Outdoor
12. Type - Single Vertical Break
Offload Fused Isolator
13. Construction - Open
14. Mounting Position - Vertical
15. Number of Pole nos. 3 (Three)
16. No. of break per pole nos. One
17. Air gap between pole of phase mm 1000
18. Insulator Material - Porcelain
19. Creepage distance of Insulator mm To be mentioned
20. Current density at the minimum cross Section of To be mentioned
a) Moving Blade Amps/
b) Terminal Pad Sq.m
c) Contacts m
d) Terminal Connector
21. Maximum Temp. rise of current carrying parts To be mentioned
when carrying rated current continuously (deg. C)
Contacts:
22. Materials of the current carrying path Copper with Nickel Plating

23. Contract Resistance Less than 50 μΩ

24. Contact Area:

24.1 Moving Blade 6x50 mm copper flat bar,

mm 2 length 810±20 mm -02 Nos 2
per phase
511
Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer
No. Description Unit Requirement ' s guaranteed
Particulars
24.2 Terminal Pad 10x60 mm Copper flat bar -
mm2 02 Nos per phase

25. Contact type Spring loaded contact

26. Operation - Gang

27. Type of main DS operating mechanism Manual
-
28. Number of main DS operating mechanism per set 1
Nos
29. Nos. of Auxiliary Contracts (NO/NC) Isolator- 4NO-4NC
For Isolator -
30. Locking facility in the operating box in both and Yes
open position
31. Operating GI Pipe Dimensions
For main DS OD- 42 mm, ID – 36 mm,
Length – 6 meter
Controlling handle length of Isolator operating
≥400mm
Pipe
32. MS Solid Square Shaft Dimensions for gang
operation (Hot Dip Galvanized):
For main DS 32x32x3600 mm
33. Total weight of Unit Kg To be mentioned

34. Rated Fuse Voltage kV 33

35. Fuse type - DIN Fuse
36. Rated fuse link normal current A 6.3 Amperes
37. Rated fuse link interrupting current kA 31.5 kA, RMS Symmetrical
38. Fuse link type - Two element, slow/fast unit
39. Heavy duty, sealed cap with
Fuse end cap type -
weather seal at both ends
40. Shall co-ordinate with
Fuse link co-ordination - existing system protective
equipment
41. Outline Dimensional & Cross-section Drawings
of - To be mentioned
Offered type 33KV Isolator & Mounting
Structure Arrangement
42. Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing
Specification & Technical Data of Offered type - To be mentioned
Equipment.
43. Standard IEC-62271-102

Note: All exposed MS parts should be Hot Dip Galvanized

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

512
 8.08 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 KV OFF-LOAD FUSED
ISOLATOR FOR BUS PT

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s

No. Description Unit Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
General Description of Disconnecting Switch
1. Manufacturer’s Name and country - To be mentioned

2. Application of the Disconnecting Switch - For BUS PT

3. Manufacturer’s Model designation - To be mentioned

4. Frequency Hz 50
5. System Nominal Voltage kV 33
6. System Maximum Voltage kV 36
7. Basic Insulation Level kV 170
8. Rated Normal Current A 400
9. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (for 1 min) kV 70
10. Rated short time withstand current (for 3sec.) kA 31.5
11. Installation - Outdoor
12. Type - Single Vertical Break Offload
Fused Isolator
13. Construction - Open
14. Mounting Position - Vertical
15. Number of Pole nos. 3 (Three)
16. No. of break per pole nos. One
17. Air gap between pole of phase mm 1000
18. Insulator Material - Porcelain
19. Creepage distance of Insulator mm To be mentioned
20. Current density at the minimum cross Section of To be mentioned
a) Moving Blade Amps/
b) Terminal Pad Sq.m
c) Contacts m
d) Terminal Connector
21.Maximum Temp. rise of current carrying parts To be mentioned
when carrying rated current continuously (deg. C)
Contacts
22. 2Materials of the current carrying path Copper with Nickel Plating
4
23.Contract
2 Resistance Less than 50 μΩ
5

24. 2Contact Area

6
24.1 Moving Blade
5x30 mm copper flat bar,
mm2
length 810±20
2 Nos per phase
513
Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer' s
No. Description Unit Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
24.2 Terminal Pad 6x40 mm Copper bar flat 2
Nos per phase
mm2
25. 2Contact type Spring loaded contact
7
Operating Mechanism
26. 2Operation - Gang
8
27.Type of main DS operating mechanism Manual
-
28.Number
2 of main DS operating mechanism per set 1
Nos
9
29. 3Nos. of Auxiliary Contracts (NO/NC) Isolator- 4NO-4NC
0 For Isolator -
30. 3Locking facility in the operating box in both and Yes
1open position
31. 3Operating GI Pipe Dimensions
2
a For main DS OD- 42 mm, ID – 36 mm,
Length – 6 meter
b Controlling handle length of Isolator operating
≥400mm
Pipe
32. 3MS Solid Square Shaft Dimensions for gang
3operation (Hot Dip Galvanized)
33. 1For main DS 32x32x3600 mm
34. Total weight of Unit Kg To be mentioned
Fuse Description
35. 3Rated Fuse Voltage
6 kV 33
36. 3 Drop Out Fuse Barrel with
7Fuse type -
Link
37. 3Rated fuse link normal current
8 A 1 -2 Amperes
38. 3Rated fuse link interrupting current
9 kA 31.5 kA, RMS Symmetrical
39. 4Fuse link type
0 No Two element, slow/fast unit
40. 4 Heavy duty, sealed cap with
1Fuse holder type -
eye at both ends of fuse holder
41. 4 Shall co-ordinate with existing
2Fuse link co-ordination -
system protective equipment
42. Outline Dimensional & Cross-section Drawings
of Offered type 33KV Isolator & Mounting - To be mentioned
Structure Arrangement
43. Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing
Specification & Technical Data of Offered type - To be mentioned
Equipment.
44. Standard IEC-62271-102

Note: All exposed MS parts should be Hot Dip Galvanized

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

514
 8.09 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 kV BUS Section Isolator

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer'

No. Description Unit Requirement s guaranteed
Particulars
General Description of Disconnecting Switch
-
1. Manufacturer’s Name and country To be mentioned
2. Manufacturer’s Model - To be mentioned
3. Frequency Hz 50
4. System Nominal Voltage kV 33
5. System Maximum Voltage kV 36
6. Basic Insulation Level kV 170
7. Rated Normal Current A 1250
8. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (for 1 min) kV 70
9. Rated short time withstand current (for 3sec.) kA 31.5
10. Installation - Outdoor
11. Type - Single Horizontal
Break
12. Construction - Open
13. Mounting Position - Horizontal
14. Number of Pole nos. 3 (Three)
15. No. of break per pole nos. One
16. Air gap between pole of phase mm 1000
17. Insulator Material - Porcelain
18. Creepage distance of Insulator mm To be mentioned
19. Current density at the minimum cross Section of To be mentioned
a) Moving Blade
Amps/
b) Terminal Pad
Sq.mm
c) Contacts
d) Terminal Connector
20. Maximum Temp. rise of current carrying parts when To be mentioned
carrying rated current continuously (deg. C)
Contacts :
21. Materials of the current carrying path Copper with Nickel
Plating
22. Contract Resistance μΩ Less than 50 μΩ
23. Contact Area
23.1 6x50 mm copper flat
Moving Blade mm2 bar length 750±20 mm
-02 Nos per phase

515
 Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer'
No. Description Unit Requirement s guaranteed
Particulars
10x60 mm Copper flat
23.2 Terminal Pad mm2 -02 Nos per phase
24. Contact type Spring loaded contact
25. Operation - Gang

26. Type of main DS operating mechanism Manual

-
27. Number of main DS operating mechanism per set 1
Nos
28. Nos. of Auxiliary Contracts (NO/NC) Isolator- 4NO-4NC
For Isolator -
29. Locking facility in the operating box in both and open Yes
position
30. Operating GI Pipe Dimensions:
For main DS OD- 42 mm, ID – 36
mm, Length – 6 meter
Controlling handle length of Isolator operating Pipe ≥400mm
31. MS Solid Square Shaft Dimensions for gang
operation (Hot Dip Galvanized):
For main DS 32x32x3600 mm

32. Total weight of Isolator Kg To be mentioned

33. Total weight of Unit Kg To be mentioned
34. Outline Dimensional & Cross-section Drawings of
Offered type 33KV Isolator & Mounting Structure - To be mentioned
Arrangement
35. Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing
Specification & Technical Data of Offered type - To be mentioned
Equipment.
36. Standard IEC-62271-102

Note: All exposed MS parts should be Hot Dip Galvanized

Seal & Signature of the Bidder Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer

516
 8.10 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33 KV OUTDOOR TYPE SINGLE
PHASE CURRENT TRANSFORMER
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Manufacturer's
Sl.
Description Unit NESCO's Requirement Guaranteed
No.
Particulars
1 Manufacturer's Name & Country - To be mentioned
2 Manufacturer's Model No. - To be mentioned
3 Application - Metering and Protection
4 Type - Induction
5 Installation - Outdoor
6 Construction - Sealed Tank
7 Insulation - Oil
8 Number of Phase - Single
9 Rated Frequency Hz 50
10 Mounting - On Supporting Structure
11 Primary rated voltage (Phase to Phase) kV 33
12 Maximum System Voltage (Phase to Phase) kV 36
13 System Earthing - Effectively Earthed
14 Basic Insulation Level (1.2/50 Micro-Sec.) kV 170
Power frequency withstand voltage (1 Min. 50
15 kV 70
Hz.)
Ratio for 33KV Line feeder: A 600-1200/5-5A
16 Ratio for 33KV Transformer feeder:
A 400-800/5-5-5A
(10/13.33 MVA)
Type of Winding:
a) Primary - Single Winding
17 Double (1 protection & 1
b) Secondary - measuring)/Triple winding (2
protection & 1 measuring)
18 Accuracy Class:
a) for measurement - 0.2s
b) for Protection - 5P30
19 RCT at 750C:
a) measuring core mΩ To be mentioned
b) protection core mΩ To be mentioned
Knee point voltage
20 For Measuring Core V To be mentioned
For Protection Core V To be mentioned
21 Burden:
a) for measurement VA 30
b) for Protection VA 30
22 Short Time Current Rating for 3 Sec. kA 31.5
23 Extended Current Rating (% of rated current) % 120
24 Over Current Rating A <10
mm/kV
25 Creepage Distance 25
(Min.)
26 Rated accuracy limit factor - To be mentioned
27 Bushing - Porcelain outdoor type
Security factor, (FS for the
28 <5
metering core)
29 Standard - IEC 60044-1

Seal & Signatureof the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

517
 8.11 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 11kV Indoor Bushing /Ring Type Single Phase
Current Transformer for regular substation (11 KV switchgear)
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
FOR PROTECTION & METERING:
1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
2 Manufacturer’s model no. - To be mentioned
3 Application - Metering &
Protection
4 Installation - Indoor
5 Primary Rated Voltage (Phase to Phase) kV 11
6 Maximum System Voltage (Phase to Phase) kV 12
7 Basic Insulation Level (1.2/50 Micro-sec.) kV 75
8 Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (1 Min. 50 Hz). kV 28
Ratio:
9 Ratio for Outgoing feeder: A 300-600/5-5A
Ratio for Power Transformer incomer:
A 800-1600/5-5-5A
(10/13.33 MVA)
Ratio for Bus Coupler:
A 1000-2000/5-5-5A
10 Type of Winding :
a) Primary - Single Winding
b) Secondary - Double (1 protection
&1
measuring)/Triple
winding (2
protection & 1
measuring)
11 Rated output for Incoming panel
a) for measurement VA 20
b) for Protection VA 20
12 Rated output for outgoing panel
a) for measurement VA 20
b) for Protection VA 20
13 Accuracy class
a) for measurement - 0.2s
b) for Protection
- 11kV Transformer Incomer - 5P30
- 11kV Outgoing/ transformer feeder - 5P30
14 Rated short time thermal current, for 3 sec. KA 31.5
15 Current limit factor A <10
16 RCT at 75˚ C
For Measuring Core mΩ To be mentioned
For Protection Core mΩ
17 Knee point voltage
For Measuring Core V To be mentioned
For Protection Core V
18 Extended Current Rating (% of rated current) % 120
19. Major insulation - Epoxy resin
20 Name of relevant IEC Standards to be followed for - To be mentioned
Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance.
21 Creepage Distance Shall be mentioned

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

518
 8.12 Guaranteed Technical Particulars OF 33 KV OUTDOOR TYPE SINGLE PHASE POTENTIAL
TRANSFORMER

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Sl. Description Unit NESCO's Requirement Manufacturer's

No. Guaranteed Particulars
1 Manufacturer's Name & Country or - To be mentioned
origin
2 Manufacturer's Model No. - To be mentioned
3 Type - Induction Type
4 Ratio V 33000/√3:110/√3:110/√3
5 No. of phase Nos. Single Phase
6 Total capacitance at 100 Hz PF To be mentioned
7 50 Hz 1 (One) minute withstand voltage KV To be mentioned
wet
8 Impulse withstand (1.2/50 micro sec. KV 170
wave)
9 Rated burden per phase VA 50VA
10 Class of accuracy - 0.2+3P
11 Rated short time thermal current, for 3 KA 31.5
sec.
12 Temperature co-efficient of ratio per 0C - To be mentioned

13 System earthing - Effectively Earthed

14 Creepage Distance mm/kV 25 (min)
15 Maximum errors with 5% primary voltage:
a) Ratio % To be mentioned
b) Phase angle minutes To be mentioned
16 Total weight complete Kg To be mentioned
17 Standard - As per relevant IEC
60044-2

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

519
 8.13 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 11kV Indoor Type Single Phase Potential Transformer for
regular substation (11 KV switchgear)

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Sl. Description Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's

No. Requirement Guaranteed Particulars
1 Manufacturer's Name & Country or - To be mentioned
origin
2 Manufacturer's Model No. - To be mentioned
Application - Metering & Protection
3 Installation - Indoor
4 Mounting - On transformer
incoming panel
5 Type - Induction Type
6 Ratio V 11000/√3:110/√3:110/√
3
7 Rated Short Circuit Currents 31.5kA, 3Sec
8 Rated Burden :
a) for measurement VA 30 VA
b) for Protection VA 30 VA
9 Class of accuracy :

a) for measurement 0.2

b) for Protection 3P

10 No. of phase No. Single phase

11 No. of secondary winding Nos. To be mentioned

12 Creepage distance (min) mm/KV 25
13 Total weight Kg To be mentioned

14 Insulation - Epoxy resin

15 Name of relevant IEC Standards to be mm/kV To be mentioned
followed for Design, Manufacture,
Testing and Performance.

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

520
 8.14 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 33KV Single Phase Lightning Arrester
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Manufacturer's
Sl.
Description Unit Requirement Guaranteed
No.
Particulars
01 Reference Standard IEC 60099-4
02 Name and address of Manufacturer - To be mentioned
03 Country of origin To be mentioned.
04 Place of manufacture To be mentioned.
05 Manufacturer’s model No. - To be mentioned
06 Type of the Arrester - Metal Oxide (ZnO), Gapless-
Outdoor(Single Unit,)
07 Rated Arrester Voltage kV 36
08 Continuous Operating Voltage (COV, Uc) kV 22- 27.5
09 Nominal Discharge Current (8/20micro sec) KA 10
10 - Polymer (Hydrophobic
Type of Lightning Arrester housing
silicon)
11 Power Frequency withstand voltage of the kV rms 70 (Dry & Wet)
Arrester Housing, Dry & Wet
12 Impulse withstand Voltage of the Arrester kV (peak) 170
Housing.
13 Lightning Impulse Residual Voltage (8/20 kV (peak)
80 or better
micro-second wave)
14 Maxm. Steep Current Impulse Residual kV (peak)
Voltage at 10 KA of 1 micro second front 85 or better
time.
15 High Current Impulse Withstand Value (4/10 KA
100 or better
micro second)
Temporary Over voltage capability:
a) 0.1 Second kV (peak) Shall be mentioned
16 b) 1.0 Second kV (peak) Shall be mentioned
c) 10 Second kV (peak) Shall be mentioned
d) 100 Second kV (peak) Shall be mentioned
17 Leakage Current at rated voltage mA < 1 mA
18 Total Creepage distance (minimum) mm/ kV 31
Overall dimension :
19 a) Height mm Shall be mentioned
b) Diameter mm Shall be mentioned
20 Total weight of Arrester Kg. Shall be mentioned
21 Line discharge class - Shall be mentioned
22 Short Circuit Current Withstand duration Sec 20 kA, 0.2 sec
23 Minimum Energy Discharge capability - 5
(KJ/KV) at rated voltage
24 Min. Bending load (kgm) 500
25 Surge Counter /Monitor Shall be provided
26 Cable for Connecting Surge Counter Shall be provided

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

521
 8.15 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 11KV Single Phase Lightning Arrester
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)
Manufacturer's
Sl.
Description Unit Requirement Guaranteed
No.
Particulars
01 Reference Standard - IEC 60099-4
02 Name and address of Manufacturer - To be mentioned
03 Country of origin To be mentioned.
04 Place of manufacture To be mentioned.
05 Manufacturer’s model No. - To be mentioned
06 Type of the Arrester - Metal Oxide (ZnO),
Gapless-
Outdoor(Single Unit,)
07 Rated Arrester Voltage kV 9
08 Continuous Operating Voltage (COV, Uc) kV 8- 10 kV
09 Nominal Discharge Current (8/20micro KA 5
sec)
10 - Polymer
Type of Lightning Arrester housing (Hydrophobic
silicon)
11 Power Frequency withstand voltage of the kV rms ≥ 35 kV (Dry & Wet)
Arrester Housing, Dry & Wet
12 Impulse withstand Voltage of the Arrester kV (peak) ≥75 kV (peak)
Housing.
13 Lightning Impulse Residual Voltage (8/20 kV (peak)
35 kV (peak)
micro-second wave)
14 Temporary Over voltage capability:
a) 0.1 Second kV (peak) To be mentioned
b) 1.0 Second kV (peak) To be mentioned
c) 10 Second kV (peak) To be mentioned
d) 100 Second kV (peak) To be mentioned
15 Leakage Current at rated voltage mA < 1 mA
16 Total Creepage distance (minimum) mm/ kV 25
Overall dimension :
17 a) Height mm To be mentioned
b) Diameter mm To be mentioned
18 Total weight of Arrester Kg. To be mentioned
19 Line discharge class - Shall be mentioned
20 Short Circuit Current Withstand duration Sec 20 kA, 0.2 sec
21 Minimum Energy Discharge - Shall be provided
capability (KJ/KV) at rated
voltage
22 Min. Bending load (kgm) Shall be provided

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

522
 8.16 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of Ni-Cd BATTERY (110 V DC)
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Manufacturer's
NESCO's
Sl. No. Description Unit guaranteed
Requirement
Particulars
1. Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
2. Manufacturer’s model no. - To be mentioned
3. Type - Nickel Cadmium Alkaline
(enclosed type)
4. Operating Voltage V DC 110
5. Continuous Discharge Current at rate of Amp 10
10 hour & Final Cell Voltage 1.3 Volt
6. Short Time Discharge Current at rate of Amp 50
2 hour & Final Cell Voltage 1.1 Volt
7. Electrolyte type - To be mentioned
8. Capacity at 10 hour rate AH 100
9. Discharge Voltage Volt 1.3 Per Cell
10. Charging Voltage (Normal) Volt 1.6 Per Cell
11. Number of cells Nos. 92 nos. + 5 nos. Spare
12. Voltage per cell V 1.2
13. Charging Voltage (Maximum) Volt 1.75 Per Cell
14. Normal float charge rate A To be mentioned
15. Maximum boost charge rate A To be mentioned
16. Amp hour efficiency at :
a) 10 hour rate % To be mentioned
b) 1 hour rate %
17. Size of cell mm To be mentioned
18. Weight of cell and electrolyte kg To be mentioned
19. Standard - To be mentioned
20. Specific gravity of electrolyte To be mentioned
21. Release pressure for valve regulated type Kg/m2 To be mentioned
22. Volume of electrolyte per cell ml To be mentioned
23. Volume of reserve electrolyte per cell ml To be mentioned
24. No of electrode plates per cell Nos.
25. Type of racks
(a)Height
(b)Width
( c)Depth
26. Cell dimension:
(a) Height mm
(b) Width mm
(c) Depth mm
27. Rack Dimensions
(a)Height mm
(b)Width mm
( c)Depth mm

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder
523
 8.17 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of BATTERY CHARGER
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
1. Manufacturer’s name & country -
2. Manufacturer’s model no. -
3. Rating -
4. Rated Input voltage range V AC 415 V  10%
5. Rated Frequency Hz 50 Hz ( 3%),
6. No of Phase - 03
7. Control Shall be mentioned
8. Communication module for station Shall be provided
automation
9. Rectifier type Silicon
10. Nominal output voltage V DC 110
11. Charging operating control Boost and floating charge,
automatic with manual
operation
12. Output current A DC ≥ 40
13. Continuous current rating 110 % of rated current
14. Efficiency % ≥ 85
15. Voltage regulation % ± 0.5
16. Ripple voltage mV ≤ 150
17. Boost charging voltage V/cell 1.6 to 1.75 (programmable)
18. Boost charging time hour programmable
19. Operating temperature °C 0 to 50
20. Humidity % 95
21. Audible noise dB ≤ 65
22. Facilities for paralleling with Shall be provided
another charger
23. Protection against surge voltage Shall be provided
24. Protection against reverse polarity Shall be provided
25. Provision for current Shall be provided
limiting
26. Dropping Diodes unit at in the Yes
output circuit during Boost Mode
27. Provision of constant Shall be provided
voltage charge 90V -130V

524
 28. Provision of showing Shall be provided
earth leakage current by analog
meter
29. Battery Temperature compensation Shall be incorporated.
30. Alarm annunciator independent Shall be provided
of the microprocessor
31. Analog meters for voltage and Shall be provided
current measurement of
input, output and
battery power
32. Dimension Shall be mentioned
33. Output voltage range
a) normal charge V DC 110 V  1%
b) Float charge V DC 120 V  1%
c) boost charge V DC 150 V  1%

34. Normal/ boost charge independent Yes/ No

units?
35. Output current A 50
36. Rated Battery Current A 20
37. Efficiency %
38. Ripple Voltage %
39. Type of AVR - Static
40. Installation Break Down Voltage KV 2KV for 1 Minute
41. Type of rectifier Thyristor
42. MCCB
a) Quantity Nos.
b) Rating A

43. Standard -

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

525
 8.18 Guaranteed Technical Particulars FOR 33/11KV, 10/13.33 MVA POWER TRANSFORMER
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)
Manufacturer’s
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
1. RATING AND PERFORMANCE
1.1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
1.2 Manufacturer’s Model no. - To be mentioned
1.3 Continuous maximum rating (ONAN / ONAF) MVA 10/13.33
1.4 No. of phases Nos. 3
1.5 Rated frequency Hz 50
1.6 Normal transformation ratio at No-load kV 33/11.55
1.7 Rated HT voltage (phase to phase) kV 33
1.8 Maximum HT voltage (phase to phase) kV 36
1.9 Rated LT voltage (phase to phase) kV 11
1.10 Maximum LT voltage (phase to phase) kV 12
1.11 Installation - Outdoor
1.12 Type of Transformer - Core, Conservator, Oil
immersed
1.13 Direction of normal power flow - HT-LT
1.14 No of windings Nos. 2
1.15 Bushing materials - Porcelain
1.16 Type of cooling - ONAN/ONAF
1.17 Coolant - Mineral Oil free from
PCB as per IEC-60296
1.18 Type of earthing - Effectively earth
1.20 Type of base - On wheels with adequate
size and length of rails
and fixing arrangement
1.21 Phase connection:
a) 33 KV winding with bushing CT - Delta
b) 11KV winding with bushing CT - Star
1.22 Vector group - Dyn11
1.23 Neutral to be brought out :
a) HT - Nil
b) LT - Yes
1.24 Basic Insulation Level (BIL) :
a) High voltage winding KV 170
b) Low voltage winding KV 75
0
1.25 Max. Temp. Rise over 40 C of ambient (at CMR & normal tap change position) supported by
Design Calculation sheet (to be enclosed) on the basis of Design Data:-
0
a) Winding Temp. Rise C 65
0
b) Top Oil Temp. Rise C 55
TEST VOLTAGE :

526
1.26 Impulse front wave test voltage (1.2/50 micro
sec. wave shape) :
a) High voltage side kV 170
b) low voltage side kV 75
1.27 Power Frequency withstand test voltage for 1
(one) minute :
a) High voltage side kV 70
b) Low voltage side kV 28
1.28 Short circuit MVA available (10/13.33 MVA) :
a) at 33 KV MVA 1800
b) at 11KV MVA 500
1.29 Impedance voltage at 75 0C and at normal ratio %
and rated frequency and at ONAN condition.
a) 10/13.33 MVA 8.00%
1.30 All windings shall have uniform insulations - Yes
2. VOLTAGE CONTROL (OLTC)
2.1 Type of Tap Changer control - On load auto regulation
and remote & manual
control
2.2 OLTC, MDU & AVR Manufacturer’s name & - MR, Germany
country
2.3 Model Number Shall be mentioned
2.4 Nos. of tapping - 17
2.5 Tapping steps - +10% in steps of 1.25%
17 tapping (i.e.
33+8x1.25%)
2.6 HV or LV winding - HV winding
2.7 Power Frequency withstand test voltage kV 75
between first and last contracts of the selector
switch between diverter and switch contract.
2.8 Rated Voltage for control circuit Shall be mentioned
2.9 Power Supply for control motor Shall be mentioned
3. CORE
3.1 Manufacturer’s Name & Address To be mentioned
3.2 Material of core & grading To be mentioned
3.3 Core Loss/ Kg, supported by Characteristic To be mentioned
Curve (to be submitted )
3.4 Thickness of core, mm To be mentioned
3.5 Core Dia, mm To be mentioned
3.6 Total weight of core, Kg (Supported by Details To be mentioned
Calculation)
3.7 Maximum flux density in iron at normal
voltage and frequency and at normal ratio
(ONAF condition) Tesla < 1.7
a) Cores Tesla To be mentioned
b) Yokes
3.8 Magnetizing current (approx.) % To be mentioned

527
3.9 i) 10/13.33 MVA
a) No load losses at rated voltage, ratio and KW 7-12
frequency.
b) Full Load losses at rated voltage, normal KW To be mentioned
ratio & frequency in ONAN condition at
750C.
c) Full Load losses at rated voltage, normal KW 50-70
ratio & frequency in ONAF condition at
750C.
d) Auxiliary Losses KW To be mentioned
e) Total Loss (a+c+d) KW To be mentioned
3.10 Maximum current density in core at CMR A/mm To be mentioned
2

3.11 Simultaneous operating conditions under which

maximum
flux density is attained:
a) Frequency Hz To be mentioned
b) Voltage-
HV KV To be mentioned
LV KV To be mentioned
c) Tap -
d) Load MVA To be mentioned
and
P.F.
3.12 Maximum flux density in iron under conditions Tesla To be mentioned
entered on
line 3.11
3.13 (a) Maximum current density in HV winding at A/mm To be mentioned
CMR 2
(b) Cross section of HV winding mm2
3.14 (a) Maximum current density in LV winding at A/mm To be mentioned
CMR 2
(b) Cross section of LV winding mm2
3.15 Regulation at 75℃ and nominal tap (at
CMR):
To be mentioned
-at unity power factor %
To be mentioned
-at 0.9 lagging power factor %
4. DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION
4.1 Types of winding: - To be mentioned
a) HV
b) LV
4.2 Copper Conductor’s Manufacturer Name & To be mentioned
Address
4.3 Material of windings - copper
4.4 Winding resistance of :
a) H.T. winding, Ohm. To be mentioned
b) L.T. winding, Ohm. To be mentioned
528
4.5 Current density of :
a) H.T. winding, Amps/sq. mm A/mm To be mentioned
2

b) L.T. winding, Amps/sq. mm A/mm To be mentioned

2

4.6 Outer, Inner & Mean dia of copper winding:

a) H.T. winding, mm To be mentioned
b) L.T. winding, mm To be mentioned
4.7 Size of Copper conductor/bar :
a) H.T. winding SWG, dia. in mm / area in To be mentioned
mm2
b) L.T. winding SWG, area in mm2 To be mentioned
4.8 Number of Turns :
a) HT winding. nos. To be mentioned
b) LT winding nos. To be mentioned
4.9 Copper weight of windings :
a) HT winding (Supported by Details Kg To be mentioned
Calculation)
b) LT winding(Supported by Details Kg To be mentioned
Calculation)
4.10 Total weight of copper windings Kg To be mentioned
4.11 Type of insulation of : -
a) Tapping To be mentioned
b) Tapping connections
c) Core bolts
d) Core bolt washers
e) Side plates
f) Core laminations
4.12 Type of winding connections - To be mentioned
(crimped or brazed )
4.13 Thickness of transformer tank:
a) Top mm To be mentioned
b) Sides mm To be mentioned
c) Bottom mm To be mentioned
4.14 Vacuum withstand capability of the tank
Main tank Kpa
Conservator Kpa
Radiators Kpa
4.15 Provision of tank earthing and Core earthing - Yes
4.16 Bladder / Air bag in Conservator - Yes
4.17 Material used for gaskets for oil tight joints mm To be mentioned
5. RADIATORS
5.1 Thickness of radiator plates/ cooling tubes mm To be mentioned
5.2 Equipment for ON cooling state
a) radiators on main tank - To be mentioned
5.3 Number of radiators per transformer Nos. To be mentioned
5.4 Rating of each radiator bank KW To be mentioned
529
 5.5 Power of each fan KW To be mentioned
5.6 Nos. of fans Nos. To be mentioned
6. Oil Volume and Weight
6.1 Type of oil Class-1 grade, insulating
mineral oil, free from
PCB (polychlorinated
biphenyl)
6.2 Manufacturer Name of oil Shall be mentioned
6.3 Breakdown Voltage at 2.5mm gap between >50 kV
electrodes
6.4 Appearance Liquid and free from
suspended matter or
sediment
6.5 Density at 200 C 0.895 g/cm3 (maximum)
6.6 Flash point (Closed cup) 1400 C (minimum)
6.7 Kinematics Viscosity at -150 C 800 cSt. (Maximum)
6.8 Kinematics Viscosity at 200 C 40 cSt. (Maximum)
6.9 Pour point -300 C (maximum)
6.10 Neutralization value 0.03 mg KOH/g
(maximum)
6.11 Neutralization value after oxidation 0.40 mg KOH/g
(maximum)
6.12 Total sludge after oxidation 0.10% weight
(maximum)
6.13 PCB Content Free from PCB
6.14 Water content 25ppm (maximum)
6.15 Total oil required including cooler system Litres To be mentioned
6.16 Volume of oil above of the top yoke Litres To be mentioned
6.17 Total volume of conservator Litres To be mentioned
6.18 Weight of core and winding assembly Tones To be mentioned
6.19 Weight of each oil cooler bank complete with Tones To be mentioned
oil if mounted separately from transformer
6.20 Total weights of complete transformer, Tones To be mentioned
including attached radiators, voltage regulating
equipment ,all fittings and oil
6.21 Weight of transformer arranged for transport Tones To be mentioned
6.22 Brief description of transformer or parts thereof - To be mentioned
subjected to short-circuit test or for which
short-circuit calculations are available
7. TRANSFORMER BUSHING INSULATORS
7.1 Manufacture’s name & country - To be mentioned
7.2 Manufacture’s country Japan/ UK/ USA /
Germany/ France/
Sweden/ Europe /
Switzerland/ Canada
7.3 Insulator material - Porcelain
7.4 Bushing housing Porcelain
7.5 Bushing Current Rating at 75˚C A To be mentioned
530
7.6 Insulator type and rated voltage - To be mentioned
7.7 Pitch circle diameter and drilling of flange mm To be mentioned
appro
x.
7.8 Length of Insulator (overall ) mm To be mentioned
7.9 Weight of Insulator kg To be mentioned
7.10 One minute 50 Hz dry withstand routine test KV To be mentioned
voltage
7.11 Lightning Impulse flashover voltage (1.2/50 KV To be mentioned
wave )
7.12 Fullwave Lightning Impulse Voltage withstand KV To be mentioned
7.13 50 Hz wet withstand voltage across arcing KV To be mentioned
horns
7.14 Under oil flashover voltage type test KV To be mentioned
7.15 Total creepage distance of shedding mm Min. 25mm per KV
7.16 Protected creepage distance of shedding mm To be mentioned
7.17 Rated Short circuit Current withstand capability 31.5KA, 3sec
8. BUSHING CTS 33 KV FOR DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION
8.1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
8.2 Rated Voltage 33KV
8.3 Rated maximum Voltage 36KV
8.4 Ratio A
a) 10/13.33 MVA 300/5
8.5 Rated output VA 30 VA
8.6 Accuracy class - 5P30
8.7 Knee Point Voltage V To be mentioned
8.8 Electrical Clearance from phase to phase mm To be mentioned
8.9 Electrical Clearance phase to earth mm To be mentioned
9. BUSHING CTS 11 KV FOR DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION
9.1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
9.2 Rated voltage KV 11
9.3 Rated maximum voltage KV 12
8.4 Ratio
a) 10/13.33 MVA A 900/5
9.5 Rated output VA 30 VA
9.6 Accuracy class - 5P30
9.7 Knee Point Voltage V To be mentioned
10. NEUTRAL BUSHING CTS 11 KV FOR SEF & REF
PROTECTION
10.1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
10.2 Rated voltage KV 11
10.3 Rated maximum voltage KV 12
10.4 Ratio
a) 10/13.33 MVA A 900/5

531
10.5 Rated output VA 30 VA
10.6 Accuracy class - 5P30
10.7 Knee Point Voltage V To be mentioned
11 Oil Temperature Indicator
Manufacturer Name To be mentioned
Japan/ South Korea /UK/
USA / Germany/ France/
Country of manufacturer -
Sweden/ Switzerland/
Canada
Alarm contact 01No
Trip Contact 01No
Alarm & Trip Range To be mentioned
12 Oil Level Indicator
Manufacturer Name To be mentioned
Make/Model Number To be mentioned
13 Winding Temperature Indicator (HV & LV
Winding)
Manufacturer Name To be mentioned
Japan/ South Korea /UK/
USA / Germany/ France/
Country of manufacturer -
Sweden/ Switzerland/
Canada
Alarm contact 01No
Trip Contact 01No
Alarm & Trip Range
14 Dial Thermometer
Alarm Contact 01No
Trip Contact 01No
15 Buchholz relay and Oil Surge Relay Yes/No
Manufacturer Name To be mentioned
Japan /UK/ USA /
Germany/ France/
Country of manufacturer -
Sweden/ Switzerland/
Canada
Make/Model Number To be mentioned
Alarm contact 01No
Trip Contact 01No
16 PRD for Main Tank & Tap changer Yes/No
Manufacturer Name To be mentioned
Japan /UK/ USA /
Germany/ France/
Country of manufacturer -
Sweden/ Switzerland/
Canada
Make/Model Number To be mentioned
Alarm contact 01No
Trip Contact 01No
17 Breather for main tank and OLTC tank
Manufacturer’s Name & Address MR, Germany or
- Equivalent European
origin
532
 Model (Main Tank) - To be mentioned
Model (OLTC Tank) - To be mentioned
Type of breather Maintenance free sensor
-
controlled
18 Is terminal permanent terminal marking Yes/No
provided?
19 Parallel operation of identical transformer Required
20 Marshalling Box Shall be provided
21 Silica Gel Breather Shall be provided
22 Guaranteed Noise level db 70 (maximum)
23 Harmonics
R.M.S. value of the fundamental current Amp. To be mentioned
R.M.S. value of 3rd harmonics current Amp To be mentioned
R.M.S. value of 5th harmonics current Amp To be mentioned
24 Type of paint applied internally To be mentioned
25 Type of paint applied externally To be mentioned
26 Type of weatherproof anti rust material primer To be mentioned
27 Dimension of the transformer
Length mm To be mentioned
Width mm To be mentioned
Height mm To be mentioned
27 RTCC Panel along with Power Transformer
Provisions for RTCC signals to SCADA To be provided
Provisions for master/follower/independent
To be provided
scheme
Winding Temperature meter (HV and LV) To Be Provided
Tap position Indication Meter To Be Provided
MR, Germany/ABB,
AVR Relay
Sweden
Indication lamp with annunciator with Buzzer
i) Winding Temperature alarm (HT & LT) To be provided
ii) Cooling fan motor Running To be provided
iii) Oil temperature alarm To be provided
iv) Tap changer in progress To be provided
v) OLTC out of step To be provided
vi) Tap changer faulty To be provided
vii) Tap changer fan trouble To be provided
viii) Tap Changer drive Box MCB Trip To be provided
ix) Transformer MK box MCB Trip To be provided
Push Buttons
i) Manual step up To be provided
ii) Manual step down To be provided
iii) Fan start To be provided
iv) Fan Stop To be provided
533
 v) Emergency Stop To be provided
28 Following tests shall be done and detail test report shall be provided:
TYPE TESTS
a) Lightning Impulse Test - Shall be provided
b) Temperature Rise Test - Shall be provided
ROUTINE TESTS
a) Measurement of insulation resistance. - Shall be provided
b) Measurement of Voltage ratio test. - Shall be provided
c) Measurement of winding resistance (Both Shall be provided
Static and Dynamic with motor current) at -
Each Tap position
d) Vector group test Shall be provided
-
(Check of phase sequence)
e) Measurement of no-load loss & current. - Shall be provided
f) Measurement of short circuit impedance and Shall be provided
-
load loss.
g) Induced over voltage test - Shall be provided
h) Power frequency withstands test - Shall be provided
i) Dissipation factor test -
j) DGA Test after installation in NESCO
premises after particular time interval
-
according to percentage of gases present in the
sample
k) SFRA & DFRA Test (In the factory and
-
after installation but before commissioning)
l) Magnetic Balance Test -
m) Polarity test -
n) Zero sequence impedance test -
SPECIAL TEST
a) Short circuit withstands test report of HV- Shall be provided
-
LV.
b) Dynamic short circuit test report - Shall be provided
28.0 Standard Design, Manufacture,
Testing, Installation and
performance shall be in
accordance to the latest
edition of the IEC 60076
29 Full guarantee for 02 (Two) years - Yes

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

534
 8.19 Guaranteed Technical Particulars For 33/ 0.415 KV, 3-Phase, 200 kVA Station Auxiliary
Transformer
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO'S
Description Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Data
1 Manufacturer’s Name & Address To be mentioned
2 Manufacturer's Type & Model No. To be mentioned
3 KVA Rating 200
4 Number of Phases 3
5 Rated frequency, Hz 50
6 Rated primary voltage, KV 33
7 Rated no load sec. voltage, V 415
8 Vector group Dyn11
9 Highest system voltage of :
a) Primary winding, KV 36
b) Secondary winding, V 457
10 Basic insulation level, KV 170
11 Power frequency withstand voltage, KV
a) HT Side 70
b) LT Side 2.5
12 Type of cooling ONAN
13 Max. Temp. Rise over 400C of ambient supported by Calculation (to be submitted) of Load Loss,
Temperature Rise and Heat Dissipation by Radiator on the basis of Design Data:
a) Windings deg. C 65
b) Top oil deg. C 55
14 Type of primary tapping off load, % +1x2.5%, 0,
-3x 2.5%
15 Percentage Impedance at 75o C, % 4%
16 No-load loss, Watts Max 430 Watts
17 Load losses at rated full load at 750C, Watts Max 2800 Watts
18 Magnetising current at normal voltage, Amps To be mentioned
19 Efficiency at 750C and 100% load :
a) at 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned
b) at 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned
20 Efficiency at 750C and 75% load :
a) at 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned
b) at 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned
0
21 Efficiency at 75 C and 50% load :
a) at 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned
b) at 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned
0
22 Efficiency at 75 C and 25% load :
a) at 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned
b) at 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned
23 Regulation at full load :
a) at 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned
b) at 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned
Transformer Oil :
535
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO'S
Description Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Data
24 a) Type of oil Mineral
Insulating Oil
b) Manufacturer’s Name & Address To be mentioned
25 Total weight of oil, Kg To be mentioned
26 Breakdown Voltage at 2.5mm gap between electrodes > 50 kV
Transformer Core :
27 Manufacturer’s Name & Address To be mentioned
28 Total weight of core, Kg To be mentioned
29 Material of core & grading To be mentioned
30 Core Loss/ Kg, supported by Characteristic Curve & Core To be mentioned
Manufacturer's Brochure
31 Thickness of core, mm To be mentioned
32 Core Dia, mm To be mentioned
33 Max. magnetic flux density, Tesla < 1.7
Transformer Windings :
34 Copper Conductor's Manufacturer Name & Address To be mentioned
35 Material of windings copper
36 Winding resistance of :
a) H.T. winding, Ohm. (per phase at 75o C) To be mentioned
b) L.T. winding, milli-Ohm. (per phase at 75o C) To be mentioned
37 Current density of :
a) H.T. winding, Amps/sq. mm To be mentioned
b) L.T. winding, Amps/sq. mm To be mentioned
38 Outer, Inner & Mean dia of copper winding:
a) H.T. winding, mm To be mentioned
b) L.T. winding, mm To be mentioned
39 Size of Copper Conductor :
a) H.T. winding SWG, dia. in mm & area in mm2 To be mentioned
b) L.T. winding SWG, area in mm2 To be mentioned
40 Number of Turns :
a) HT winding, nos. To be mentioned
b) LT winding, nos. To be mentioned
41 Copper weight of windings :
a) HT winding, Kg To be mentioned
b) LT winding, Kg To be mentioned
42 Total weight of copper windings, Kg To be mentioned
43 Dimension of Transformer :
a) Width, mm To be mentioned
b) Length, mm To be mentioned
c) Height, mm To be mentioned
d) Tank Sheet thickness of top, bottom & side, mm To be mentioned
e) Total weight of transformer tank, Kg To be mentioned
44 a) Total weight of active part (core, coil and other To be mentioned
accessories), Kg
b) Total weight of complete Transformer including fittings To be mentioned
& oil, Kg

536
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO'S
Description Guaranteed
No. Requirement
Data
45 Type of breathings To be mentioned
46 Name of relevant IEC or other Equivalent Standards for To be mentioned
Design, manufacture, testing and performance.
47 Drawing :
a) General Arrangement & Outline Dimensions To be submitted
b) Internal Construction Details/ Sectional drawing of To be submitted
active parts including Insulation arrangement
c) HT & LT Bushings with dimension & current ratings To be submitted
d) Cross-section & Dimensional drawing of Core & To be submitted
Windings
e) Radiator with detail dimensional drawing To be submitted
f) Tap changer with dimension & current ratings. To be submitted
48 Routine Test Report :
a) Measurement of turn ratio test. To be submitted
b) Vector group test. To be submitted
c) Measurement of winding resistance. To be submitted
d) Measurement of insulation resistance. To be submitted
e) Measurement of no load loss & no-load current. To be submitted
f) Measurement of impedance voltage & load loss. To be submitted
g) Dielectric withstands Tests. To be submitted
h) Transformer oil test (including Tan delta). To be submitted
49 Type Tests report along with details test result and drawings for 33/0.415KV, 200KVA, 3-Phase, Dyn11
Distribution Transformer from an independent testing Laboratory/ Institute as per IEC 60076/ BS 171
Standards:
a) Impulse Voltage Withstands test. To be submitted
b) Temperature Rise test. To be submitted
50 Short-circuit Tests Report for the offered 33/0.415KV, To be submitted
200KVA, 3-Phase, Dyn11 Distribution Transformer as per
relevant IEC with detail test results & drawings from
reputed independent testing Laboratory/ Institution or detail
calculation on the basis of design data by the manufacturer.

Manufacturer’s Seal & Signature Bidder Seal & Signature

537
 8.20 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Single-Core, 300 mm2 11 kV XLPE Insulated Copper Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data, otherwise the Bid will be
rejected)

Sl. Description Unit NESCO'S Manufacturer's

No. Requirement Guaranteed
Data
1 Name of the Item 1CX300 mm2 11 kV XLPE
Insulated Copper Cables
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer/Country of Shall be mentioned
Origin
4 Standard Performance, Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
BDS or equivalent
international standards.
5. Country of Origin
6. VOLTAGE
Voltage between phases of three Phase
circuit
U kV 11
Umax kV 12
7. Manufacturing Process CCV/VCV
8. CORES
Number of Cores No. one
9. CONDUCTOR Electrolytic annealed
material copper
cross sectional area mm2
Min. No. & Dia of wires Nos./mm 300
To be mentioned
10. CONDUCTOR SCREEN
Material semi-conducting
Nominal Thickness mm 0.7
Diameter over screen mm To be mentioned
11. INSULATION
Material XLPE
Type of dry curing Inert gas
Nominal Thickness mm 3.4
Diameter of over Insulation mm To be mentioned
12. INSULATION SCREEN
Material semi-conducting
Nominal Thickness mm 0.5
Diameter over screen mm To be mentioned
13. METALLIC SCREEN
Number and diameter of copper screen No./mm
strands or Based on Design
or No./mm Calculation
Copper Wire with helically applied Copper with
Tape Thicknes
538
Sl. Description Unit NESCO'S Manufacturer's
No. Requirement Guaranteed
Data
s of tape
14. SEPARATION SHEATH
Material To be mentioned
Thickness of bedding mm 1.2
15. ARMOUR
Number & diameter of amour wire No./mm Based on Design
or or Calculation
Thickness of Corrugated Aluminum sheath mm
16. OUTER COVERING
Material Black extruded MDPE
Minimum average thickness mm To be mentioned (subject to
approval)
17. COMPLETED CABLE
Overall diameter mm To be mentioned
Weight per metre kg To be mentioned
Maximum drum length m 500
18. CABLE DRUMS
Material Steel
Overall diameter mm To be mentioned
Width m To be mentioned
Gross weight (with cable) kg To be mentioned
19. CONTINUOUS CURRENT CARRYING
CAPACITY
Based on the conditions specified:
One circuit A To be mentioned
Two circuits A To be mentioned
Three circuits A To be mentioned
In Air
One circuit A To be mentioned
20. PERMISSIBLE OVERLOAD
In Service Conditions % To be mentioned
For a period of Hours To be mentioned
21. MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR
TEMPERATURE
Laid direct in ground C 90
Drawn into ducts C 90
Erected in air C 90
22. CONDUCTOR SHORT CIRCUIT
CURRENT
Carrying capacity for one second, Cable
load as above prior to Short circuit and final KA 71.5
conductor Temperature of 250C`
23. METALIC SCREEN EARTH FAULT
CURRENT
Carrying capacity for one second, Cable KA 25 (with detail calculation)
loaded as above prior to Earth fault
24. MINIMUM RADIUS OF BEND 20 times of overall diameter

539
Sl. Description Unit NESCO'S Manufacturer's
No. Requirement Guaranteed
Data
Around which cable can be laid m of cable
25. MAXIMUM DC RESISTANCE
Per km of cable at 20C
of conductor of metallic layer ohm 0.0601
26. MAXIMUM AC RESISTANCE
Of conductor per km of cable at
Maximum conductor temperature ohm Based on Design
Calculation (Subject to
approval)
27. INSULATION RESISTANCE
Per km of cable per core
at 20C Meg.ohm 400
at maximum rated temperature Meg.ohm 40
28. EQUIVALENT STAR REACTANE
Per km of 3 phase circuit at
Nominal frequency Ohm/Km 0.102

29. MAXIMUM ELECTROSTATIC Based on Design

CAPACITANCE Calculation (Subject to
Per Km of cable µF approval)
30. MAXIMUM INDUCED VOLTAGE
On metallic layer/sheath
Under fault condition V To be mentioned
31. MAXIMUM CHARGING CURRENT
Per core per meter of cable at
Nominal voltage Uo mA To be mentioned
32. MAXIMUM DIELECTIC LOSS
Of cable per meter of 3 phase circuit when
laid direct in the ground at nominal voltage
Uo and normal frequency at maximum
conductor Temperature W/m ≤0.38
33. METALLIC SHEATH LOSS
Of cable per meter of 3 phase circuit, At
nominal voltage Uo, normal frequency And
at the specified current rating W To be mentioned
34. MAXIMUM PULLING TENSION kg To be mentioned
35. Indoor, Outdoor Termination Kit have to To be provided
comply with Technical Specification

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

540
 8.21 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF ACCESSORIES FOR 33kV XLPE,
1-CORE, 300 mm2 COPPER CABLE.
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)
NESCO'S Manufacturer's
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Requirement Guaranteed
Data

Indoor Termination Kits for 33KV, 1-Core 300 mm2 XLPE Copper cable
i. Name & address of the
manufacturer Shall be mentioned
ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be mentioned
iii. Application 2
For 33KV, XLPE, 1C x 300 mm
Copper Conductors
iv. Installation For Indoor Switchgear terminations

v. System 33KV, effectively earthed system

vi. Cable conductor 300 mm2 Copper Conductors

- Heat shrinkable high voltage

insulating and non-tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control
tubing
vii. Ki tcontent - Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 300 mm2
Copper Conductors
- Installation instructions

Outdoor Termination Kits for 33KV, 1Cx300 mm2 XLPE Copper cable
Name & address of the
i. manufacturer Shall be mentioned

ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be mentioned

For 33KV, XLPE, 1C x 300 mm2
iii. Application Copper Conductors
For Indoor installation on - poles/
iv. Installation structures
v. System 33KV, effectively earthed system
vi. Cable conductor 300 mm2 Copper Conductors

541
 NESCO'S Manufacturer's
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Requirement Guaranteed
Data
- Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating
and non-tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
vii. Kitcontent - Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skir
- Suppor tinsulator
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 500mm2 Copper
Conductors
- Support insulators Tee Brackets
- Installationinstructions
Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

542
 8.22 Guaranteed Technical Particulars 11kV, XLPE, 3C X 185 mm2 COPPER CABLE
(To be filled up by the manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the Bid will be rejected)

Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's

NESCO'S
No. Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
1 Name of the Item 3CX185 mm2 11 kV
XLPE Insulated Copper
Cables
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance, Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
BDS or equivalent
international standards.
Country of Origin
5. VOLTAGE
Voltage between phases of three Phase
circuit
U kV 11
Umax kV 12
6. CORES
Number of Cores No. Three
Manufacturing Process To be mentioned
7. CONDUCTOR
material Electrolytic annealed
cross sectional area mm2 copper
Min. No. & Dia of wires Nos./mm 185
37/ To be mentioned
8. CONDUCTOR SCREEN
Material semi-conducting XLPE
Nominal Thickness mm 0.5
Diameter over screen mm To be mentioned
9. INSULATION
Material XLPE
Type of dry curing Inert gas
Nominal Thickness mm 3.4
Diameter of over Insulation mm To be mentioned
10. CORE SCREEN
Material semi-conducting XLPE
Nominal Thickness mm 0.5
Diameter over screen mm To be mentioned
11. METALLIC SCREEN
Number and diameter of copper screen No./mm
strands or Based on Design
or No./mm Calculation
Copper Wire with helically applied with
Copper Tape Thicknes

543
Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's
NESCO'S
No. Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
s of tape
12. INNER JACKET
Material PVC
Nominal Thickness mm 1.7
External diameter mm To be mentioned
13. ARMOUR
Number & diameter of amour wire No./mm Based on Design
or or Calculation
Thickness of Corrugated Aluminium mm
sheath
14. OUTER COVERING
Material Black extruded MDPE
Minimum average thickness mm 3.1
15. COMPLETED CABLE
Overall diameter mm 64
Weight per metre kg 7.8
Maximum drum length m 250
16. CABLE DRUMS
Material Steel
Overall diameter mm To be mentioned
Width m To be mentioned
Gross weight (with cable) kg To be mentioned
17. CONTINUOUS CURRENT CARRYING
CAPACITY
Based on the conditions specified:
One circuit A 403
Two circuits A 329
Three circuits A 285
In Air
One circuit A 440
18. PERMISSIBLE OVERLOAD
In Service Conditions % To be mentioned
For a period of Hours To be mentioned
19. MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR
TEMPERATURE
Laid direct in ground C 90
Drawn into ducts C 90
Erected in air C 90
20. CONDUCTOR SHORT CIRCUIT
CURRENT
Carrying capacity for one second, Cable
load as above prior to Short circuit and
final conductor Temperature of 250C`
KA 26.5
21. METALIC SCREEN EARTH FAULT
CURRENT
Carrying capacity for one second, Cable KA 25 (with detail
loaded as above prior to Earth fault calculation)
544
Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's
NESCO'S
No. Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
22. MINIMUM RADIUS OF BEND 20 times of overall
Around which cable can be laid m diameter of cable
23. MAXIMUM DC RESISTANCE
Per km of cable at 20C
of conductor ohm 0.0991
of metallic layer ohm To be mentioned
24. MAXIMUM AC RESISTANCE
Of conductor per km of cable at
Maximum conductor temperature ohm 0.129
25. INSULATION RESISTANCE
Per km of cable per core
at 20C Megohm 400
at maximum rated temperature Megohm 40
26. EQUIVALENT STAR REACTANE
Per km of 3 phase circuit at
Nominal frequency Ohm/Km 0.103
27. MAXIMUM ELECTROSTATIC
CAPACITANCE
Per Km of cable µF 0.412
28. MAXIMUM INDUCED VOLTAGE
On metallic layer/sheath
Under fault condition V To be mentioned
29. MAXIMUM CHARGING CURRENT
Per core per metre of cable at
Nominal voltage Uo mA To be mentioned
30. MAXIMUM DIELECTIC LOSS
Of cable per metre of 3 phase circuit when
laid direct in the ground at nominal W/m 0.44
voltage Uo and normal frequency at
maximum conductor Temperature

31. METALLIC SHEATH LOSS

Of cable per metre of 3 phase circuit, At
nominal voltage Uo, normal frequency W To be mentioned
And at the specified current rating
32. MAXIMUM PULLING TENSION kg 1295 Kg

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

545
 8.23 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 11 KV XLPE, 3-CORE, 185 mm2
COPPER CABLE ACCESSORIES
(To be filled up by the manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the Bid will be rejected)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO'S
DESCRIPTION Guaranteed
No Requirement
Data
1
Indoor Termination Kits for 11 KVXLPE, 3-Core, 185mm2 Copper Cable
i. Name and address of the Shall be furnished
manufacturer
ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be furnished
iii. Application 2
For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm Copper
Conductors
iv. Installation For Indoor installation in
switchgear terminations
v. System 11KV, effectively earthed system

vi. Cable conductor 185 mm2 Copper Conductors

vii. Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage

Insulating and non-tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Stress relieving mastic strip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 185 mm2
Copper Conductors
- Installation instructions
2 OutdoorTerminationKits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core,185mm2 Copper Cable
i. Name and address of the Shall be furnished
manufacturer
ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be furnished
iii. Application 2
For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm Copper
Conductors
iv. Installation For outdoor installation on
poles/structures
v. System 11KV, effectively earthed
system
vi. Cable conductor 185 mm2 Copper Conductor

546
 Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO'S
DESCRIPTION Guaranteed
No Requirement
Data
vii. Kitcontent - Heat shrinkable high voltage
Insulating and non-tracking tubing
- Heat shrinkable stress control tubing
- Stress relieving mastics trip
- Truck resistant sealant tape
- Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt
- Support insulator
- Cable preparation kit
- Solderless earth connection kit
- Compression lugs for 185mm2
Copper Conductors
- Support insulators Tee Brackets
- Installation instructions

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

547
 8.24 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Single-Core, 150 mm2 PVC Insulated and PVC
Sheathed Copper Cable.
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's

NESCO'S
No. Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
1 Name of the Item 1CX150 sq. mm PVC
Insulated and PVC
Sheathed Cables
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
BDS or equivalent
international standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 1CX150
6 Material PVC Insulated and PVC
Sheathed plain annealed
copper.
7 Numbers & Diameter of wires mm Min 37 Wires
8 Maximum DC resistance at 20 deg. /KM 0.124
C
9 Nominal thickness of insulation Mm 1.8
10 Nominal thickness of sheath Mm 1.8
11 Colour of sheath Black
12 Approximate outer diameter Mm 21.9
13 Approximate weight Kg/KM 1640
14 Continuous permissible service V 600/1000
voltage
15 Current rating at 30 deg. C ambient Amps 350
temperature U/G
16 Current rating at 35 deg. C ambient Amps 405
in air
17 Drum wound length M 500
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum Standard AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83,
C16 –82, P5 –83.

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

548
 8.25 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Single-Core, 95 mm2 PVC Insulated and PVC
Sheathed Copper Cable for grounding system

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's

NESCO'S
No. Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
1 Name of the Item 1CX95 sq. mm PVC
Insulated and PVC
Sheathed Cables
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
BDS or equivalent
International standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 1CX95
6 Material PVC Insulated and PVC
Sheathed plain annealed
copper.
7 Numbers & Diameter of wires Mm 19/2.52
8 Maximum resistance at 30 deg. C /KM 0.1964
9 Nominal thickness of insulation Mm 1.6
10 Nominal thickness of sheath Mm 1.8
11 Color of sheath Black
12 Approximate outer diameter Mm 19.4
13 Approximate weight Kg/KM 1129
14 Continuous permissible service V 600/1000
voltage
15 Current rating at 30 deg. C ambient Amps 270
temperature U/G
16 Current rating at 35 deg. C ambient Amps 300
in air
17 Drum wound length M 500
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum Standard AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83,
C16 –82, P5 –83.

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer Seal and Signature of the Bidder

549
 8.26 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 4CX2.5 mm2 PVC Insulated and PVC Sheathed Copper
Cable

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's

NESCO'S
No. Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
1 Name of the Item 4CX2.5 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed
Copper Cable with
Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
BDS or equivalent
International standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 4CX2.5 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed Copper
Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of Copper mm 7/0.67
wires
8 Diameter of Steel wires mm 1.4
9 Thickness of Steel Tape mm To be mentioned
10 Maximum resistance at 30 deg. C /KM 7.28
11 Nominal thickness of insulation mm 0.8 (min.)
12 Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8 (min)
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
15 Approximate outer diameter mm 17
16 Approximate weight Kg/KM 670
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum Standard AWPA C1 – 82,
C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

550
 8.27 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 4CX6 mm2 PVC Insulated and PVC Sheathed Copper
Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's

NESCO'S
No. Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
1 Name of the Item 4CX6 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed
Copper Cable with
Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
BDS or equivalent
International standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 4CX6 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed Copper
Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 7/1.04
Copper wires
8 Numbers & Diameter of Steel mm 4x0.8
wires
9 Nominal size of Steel Tape mm 0.25
10 Maximum resistance at 30 deg. /KM 3.20
C
11 Nominal thickness of insulation mm 1.0 (min.)
12 Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8 (min)
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
15 Approximate outer diameter mm 21
16 Approximate weight Kg/KM 920
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82,
Standard C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

551
 8.28 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 4CX4 mm2 PVC Insulated and PVC Sheathed Copper
Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's

NESCO'S
No. Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
1 Name of the Item 4CX4 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed
Copper Cable with
Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
BDS or equivalent
International standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 4CX4 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed Copper
Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 7/0.85
Copper wires
8 Numbers & Diameter of Steel mm 4x0.8
wires
9 Nominal size of Steel Tape mm 0.25
10 Maximum resistance at 30 deg. /KM 3.20
C
11 Nominal thickness of insulation mm 1.0 (min.)
12 Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8 (min)
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
15 Approximate outer diameter mm 20
16 Approximate weight Kg/KM 810
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82,
Standard C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

552
 8.29 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 8CX2.5 mm2 PVC Insulated and PVC Sheathed Copper
Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's

NESCO'S
No. Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
1 Name of the Item 8CX2.5 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed
Copper Cable with
Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
BDS or equivalent
International standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 8CX2.5 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed Copper
Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 7/0.67
Copper wires
8 Numbers & Diameter of Steel mm 4x0.8
wires
9 Nominal size of Steel Tape mm 0.25
10 Maximum resistance at 30 deg. /KM 7.69
C
11 Nominal thickness of insulation mm 0.8 (min.)
12 Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8 (min)
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
15 Approximate outer diameter mm 20
16 Approximate weight Kg/KM 1040
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82,
Standard C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

553
 8.30 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 16CX2.5 mm2 PVC Insulated and PVC Sheathed Copper
Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's

NESCO'S
No. Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
1 Name of the Item 16CX2.5 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed
Copper Cable with
Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
BDS or equivalent
International standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 16CX2.5 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed Copper
Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 7/0.67
Copper wires
8 Numbers & Diameter of Steel mm 4x0.8
wires
9 Nominal size of Steel Tape mm 0.25
10 Maximum resistance at 30 deg. /KM 7.69
C
11 Nominal thickness of insulation mm 0.8 (min.)
12 Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8 (min)
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
15 Approximate outer diameter mm 25
16 Approximate weight Kg/KM 1630
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82,
Standard C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

554
 8.31 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for 24CX2.5 mm2 PVC Insulated and PVC Sheathed Copper
Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's

NESCO'S
No. Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
1 Name of the Item 24CX2.5 mm2 PVC
Insulated
and PVC Sheathed Copper
Cable with Armouring
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in accordance
to the BS, IEC, BDS or
equivalent International
standards.
5 Cable Size mm2 24CX2.5 mm2
6 Material Plain annealed Copper Cable
7 Numbers & Diameter of mm 7/0.67
Copper wires
8 Numbers & Diameter of Steel mm 4x0.8
wires
9 Nominal size of Steel Tape mm 0.25
10 Maximum resistance at 30 deg. /KM 7.69
C
11 Nominal thickness of insulation mm 0.8 (min.)
12 Nominal thickness of sheath mm 1.8 (min)
13 Colour of sheath Black
14 Colour of Core Red, Yellow, Blue, Black
15 Approximate outer diameter mm 28
16 Approximate weight Kg/K 1730
M
17 Drum wound length M 1000
18 Net Weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
20 Treated Wooden Drum AWPA C1 – 82,
Standard C2 –83, C16 –82,
P5 –83.

Seal and Signature Seal and Signature

of the manufacturer: of the Bidder:

555
 8.32 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for ACSR MARTIN
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit Manufacturer's

NESCO'S
No Guaranteed
Requirement
Data
1 Name of the Item ACSR MARTIN
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in accordance
to the BS, IEC, ASTM, BDS
or equivalent International
standards.
5 Installation Overhead
6 Type Stranded
7 Material Hard drawn Aluminium steel
reinforced
8 Overall diameter mm 36.17
9 Nominal cross-sectional area of conductor mm2 772.10
10 Number/diameter of Aluminium Strand No./mm 54/4.02
11 Nominal Aluminium cross sectional area mm2 685.40
12 Number/diameter of Steel Strand No./mm 19/2.41
13 Nominal Steel cross sectional area mm2 86.70
14 Weight of conductor Kg/KM 2590
15 Drum wound length M 500
16 Net weight Kg Shall be mentioned
17 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
18 Maximum DC Resistance of Conductor at /KM 0.0425
20 °C
19 Minimum breaking Load of Conductor Kg min 11400
20 Maximum working tension of conductor KN Shall be mentioned
21 Current rating at 35ºC rise over 40ºC Amps. 1200 A (Min)
ambient temperature (75ºC)
22 Practical (final) modulus of elasticity hbar 7700
23 Co-efficient of linear expansion /ºC shall be mentioned
24 Aluminum to Steel Ratio Shall be mentioned
25 Lay length for Outermost Layer of mm Shall be mentioned
Aluminium
26 Lay direction for Outermost Layer of Right hand
Aluminium
27 Lay ratio for Outermost Layer of 10-14
Aluminium
28 Treated Wooden Drum Standard AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83,
C16 –82, P5 –83.

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

556
 8.33 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for ACSR GROSBEAK
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit NESCO'S Manufacturer's

No. Requirement Guaranteed
Data
1 Name of the Item ACSR GROSBEAK
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
ASTM, BDS or equivalent
international standards.
5 Installation Overhead
6 Type Stranded
7 Material Hard drawn Aluminium steel
reinforced
8 Overall diameter mm 25.15
9 Nominal cross sectional area of conductor mm2 374.70
10 Number/diameter of Aluminium Strand No./m 26/3.97
m
11 Nominal Aluminium cross sectional area mm2 321.68
12 Number/diameter of Steel Strand No./m 7/3.09
m
13 Nominal Steel cross sectional area mm2 53.02
14 Weight of conductor Kg/K 1304
M
15 Drum wound length M 500
16 Net weight Kg Shall be mentioned
17 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
18 Maximum DC Resistance of Conductor at /KM 0.0900
20 °C
19 Minimum breaking Load of Conductor Kg 11400
20 Maximum working tension of conductor KN Shall be mentioned
21 Current rating at 35ºC rise over 40ºC ambient Amps. 538 (min)
temperature (75ºC)
22 Practical (final) modulus of elasticity hbar 7700
23 Co-efficient of linear expansion /ºC 18.9 x 10-6
24 Aluminum to Steel Ratio Shall be mentioned
25 Lay length for Outermost Layer of mm Shall be mentioned
Aluminium
26 Lay direction for Outermost Layer of Right hand
Aluminium
27 Lay ratio for Outermost Layer of Aluminium 10-14
28 Treated Wooden Drum Standard AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –83,
C16 –82, P5 –83.

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

557
 8.34 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Disc Insulator

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description NESCO'S Manufacturer's

No. Requirement Guaranteed
Data
01. Name of the Item Disc Insulator
02. Name of Manufacturer & Address Shall be mentioned
03. Manufacturer’s Code No. To be mentioned
04. Standard Performance, Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
ASTM, BDS or equivalent
International standards.
05. Installation Overhead
06. Type Disc
07. Material Porcelain
08. Creepage Distance 292 mm
09. Flash over voltage
Power Frequency, Dry 78 kV
Power Frequency, Wet 45 kV
10. Withstand Voltage
Power Frequency, Dry 70 kV
Power Frequency, Wet 40 kV
11. Power Frequency Puncture Voltage 110 kV
12. 50% Impulse flashover Positive 120 kV
13. 50% Impulse flashover Negative 125 kV
14. Mechanical Failing Load 70 KN
15. Nominal Diameter 255 mm
17. Minimum Spacing 146 mm
18 Dry Arching Distance minimum 171 mm
19 Coupling Size 16 mm
20 Weight in Kg To be mentioned

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

558
 8.35 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 33 KV Bus bar insulator string
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead with appropriate data)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
1 Manufacturer’s Name & Country - To be mentioned
2 Manufacturer’s model no. - To be mentioned
3 Insulator material - Porcelain
4 Number of units per string Nos. 4
5 Insulator Voltage Class KV 15
6 Insulator Materials Porcelain
7 Type of Insulator - Ball and socket type
disc, security clip made
of rod brass alloy.
8 Creepage/ leakage distance (min.) mm 298
9 Total creepage distance of string mm 850
10 Unit Spacing mm 146
11 Dry Arcing distance (minimum) mm 1968
12 Diameter of Insulator mm 256
13 Withstand Voltage, Minimum :
a) Power Frequency, dry (one KV 70
min.)
b) Power Frequency, wet (one KV 40
min.)
c) Impulse 1.2/50  sec KV 110
14 Flashover Voltage, Minimum :
a) Power Frequency, dry KV 80
b) Power Frequency, wet KV 50
c) 50% Impulse 1.2/50  sec KV 125
wave, positive or impulse 1.2/50
sec wave positive.
d) 50% Impulse 1.2/50  sec KV 130
wave Negative
15 Power Frequency Puncture KV 110
Voltage, minimum
16 Radio Influence Voltage Data,
minimum
a) Power frequency test voltage KV 10
RMS to Ground
b) Maximum RIV at 1,000 Kc V 50
17 Minimum Mechanical Strength for Suspension :
a) Electro-mechanical Breaking Kg 7260
Load
b) Mechanical Breaking load Kg 6800
c) Tension Proof Test Load Kg 3400
d) Time Load Test Value Kg 4536
e) Mechanical Impact Strength mm Kg 630
18 Minimum Mechanical Strength for Strain Stringing :
559
 a) Electro-mechanical Breaking Kg 11340
Load
b) Mechanical Breaking load Kg 11340
c) Tension Proof Test Load Kg 3400
d) Time Load Test Value Kg 4536
e) Mechanical Impact Strength mm Kg 530
19 Insulator Hardware Insulator hardware for
insulator strings or bus-
support such shall have
UTS-120 KN and
galvanized as per BS-
729 OR ASTM A-153.
20 Standard AS per latest editions of
IEC-383.

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

8.36 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for H-Type Connector

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Manufacturer's

NESCO's
No. guaranteed
Requirement
Particulars
Compatible for ACSR GROSBEAK
1. Name & Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Code No. Shall be mentioned
3. Applicable Standard Design, Testing & Performance
shall be in accordance to BS,
IEC, BDS, ANSI, ASTM or
equivalent international
standards.
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be installed
for the above-mentioned
conductor.
5. Type H-Type
6. Material Aluminium
7. Minimum Continuous Current 538 Amps (min).
rating at 35ºC rise over 40ºC
ambient temperature (75ºC)
8. Length Shall be mentioned (Subject to
approval)
9. Weight of 100 nos. in Kg Shall be mentioned

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

560
 8.37 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Guy/Earth Wire.
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's

No. Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
1 Name of the Item Guy/Earth Wire
2 Name &v Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
3 Manufacturer's Code No. Shall be mentioned
4 Standard Performance Design
and Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS,
BDS or equivalent
International
standards.
5 Installation Overhead/Stay
6 Type Stranded, Solid and
Bare
7 Material High Strength Steel
8 Overall diameter mm 9.50
9 Number/diameter of each strand No./mm 7/3.15
10 Nominal cross sectional area of mm2 54.53
conductors
11 Weight of Guy Wire Kg/KM 430
12 Ultimate Tensile Strength KN 62.75

13 Galvanisation As per ASTM B498-

74, Class-A
14 Modulus of Elasticity Kg/mm2 19.7 x 103

15 Coefficient of linear expansion /ºC 11.3 x 10-6

16 Drum wound length M 1500

17 Net weight Kg Shall be mentioned
18 Gross weight Kg Shall be mentioned
19 Lay length mm Shall be mentioned
20 Lay direction Right hand
21 Lay ratio 13-18
22 Treated Wooden Drum Standard AWPA C1 – 82, C2 –
83,
C16 –82, P5 –83.

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

561
 8.38 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for PG Clamp
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Sl. Description Manufacturer's

NESCO's
No. guaranteed
Requirement
Particulars
Compatible for ACSR GROSBEAK to ACSR GROSBEAK
1. Name & Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Code No. Shall be mentioned
3. Applicable Standard Design, Testing & Performance
shall be in accordance to BS,
IEC, BDS, ANSI, ASTM or
equivalent international
standards.
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be installed
for the above-mentioned
conductor.
5. Type Bolted Type
6. Material Aluminium Alloy
7. Minimum Continuous Current 538 Amps (min).
rating at 35ºC rise over 40ºC
ambient temperature (75ºC)
8. Dimension 125 mm x 50 mm
9. Weight of 100 nos. in Kg Shall be mentioned

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

562
 8.39 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF STEEL STRUCTURE DESIGN
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad with appropriate data)

Manufacturer'
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit s guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
1 Manufacturer's Name and Country - To be mentioned
2 Maximum ratio of unsupported length of steel
compression to their least radius of gyration:
a) Main members mm 120
b) Bracing's mm 180
c) Redundant mm 180
3 B.S. 4360 grade 43A steel or other approved
standard :
a) Elastic limit stress in tension members Kg/mm2 To be mentioned
b) Ultimate stress in compression members Kg/mm2 Sc=F/S[{1+0.0001
(expressed as function L/R) 1x (L/R)2/ M}]
4 B.S. 4360 grade 50C steel or other approved
standard :
a) Elastic limit stress in tension members Kg/mm2 To be mentioned
b) Ultimate stress in compression members Kg/mm2 Sc=F/S[{1+0.0001
(expressed as function L/R) 66 x{(L/R)2/M}]
5 Formula for calculation of ultimate stress in - SC=F/S[1+{LE/2
compression. E}x {(L/R)2/M}]
Where,
SC = Ultimate stress in compression Kg/mm2 To be mentioned
F = Yield strength Kg To be mentioned
S = Section mm2 To be mentioned
L/R = Length / Radius of gyration cm To be mentioned
LE = Elastic limit stress Mg/mm2 24 or 36
E = Elasticity module Kg/mm2 22000
M = Rigidity Coefficient at each end - To be mentioned
M=1 with only one bolt at each end of member - To be mentioned
M=2 with two bolts at each end of a member - To be mentioned
M=4 if L/R between 110 and 130 - To be mentioned
M=3 if L/R over to 130 - To be mentioned
6 Minimum size of member mm 45 x 45 x --
7 Weight of each Column Kg To be mentioned
8 Weight of each Girder Kg To be mentioned
9 Total weight Kg To be mentioned

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

563
 8.40 Guaranteed TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF SHIELD WIRE, EARTHING GRID AND EARTHING
ELECTRODE
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad with appropriate data)
Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO's
Description Unit guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
A. SHIELD WIRES
1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
2 Material - High Strength Steel
3 Grade of Steel Kg 60000
4 Nos. of Strand Nos. 7
5 Diameter of each strand mm 3.05
6 Overall diameter mm 9.525
7 Nominal cross -section mm2 35
8 Weight per km length Kg 407
9 Maximum rated current (3 seconds ) A To be mentioned
2
10 Maximum working tension of main connection Kg/m To be mentioned
11 Resistance of conductors per 1000 meters at 20 c ohms To be mentioned
12 Rated Ultimate Tensile Strength Kg/mm2 4900
13 Maximum permissible span length m To be mentioned
14 Maximum sag under own weight of maximum mm To be mentioned
span
15 Co-efficient of liner expansion cm/ 0C. To be mentioned
16 Class of Zinc Coating - Class-A
17 Galvanization - As per BS-729 OR
ASTM A-153
B. EARTHING GRID
1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
2 Material - Copper
3 Overall diameter mm To be mentioned
4 Nominal cross -section
a) Interconnecting the earth electrodes mm2 To be mentioned
b) Connecting equipment to mesh mm2 To be mentioned
6 Area of each earthing grid mxm To be mentioned
7 Depth of bedding of conductor mm To be mentioned
8 Maximum earth fault current for 3 sec. KA 31.5
9 Resistance of conductors per 1000 meters at 200c Ohms To be mentioned
C. EARTHING ELECTRODES
1 Manufacturer’s name & country - To be mentioned
2 Material - Copper
3 Dimensions :
a) Dia mm 16
b) Length Meter 6
4 Number of electrodes per group - As per schedule
5 Number of earthing point per substation - To be mentioned
6 Calculated resistance of combined earth grid and ohm Less than one (1)
points

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder
564
 8.41 Guaranteed Technical Particulars of 11kV Pole mounted Isolator with Earth Blade
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected)

Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer'

No. Description Unit Requirement s Guaranteed
Particulars
General Description of Disconnecting Switch
-
1. Manufacturer’s Name and country
To be mentioned
2. Manufacturer’s Model - To be mentioned
3. Frequency Hz 50
4. System Nominal Voltage kV 11
5. System Maximum Voltage kV 12
6. Basic Insulation Level kV 75
7. Rated Normal Current A 800

8. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (for 1 min) kV 28

9. Rated short time withstand current (for 3sec.) kA 31.5
10. Installation - Outdoor
11. Type - Single Vertical Break
12. Construction - Open
13. Mounting Position - Vertical
14. Number of Pole nos. 3 (Three)
15. No. of break per pole nos. One
16. Air gap between pole of phase mm To be mentioned
( to be confirmed during design
approval)
17. Insulator Material - Porcelain
18. Creepage distance of Insulator mm/K 25
V
Contacts:
19. Materials of the current carrying path Copper with Nickel Plating
20. Contract Resistance for DS & ES μΩ Less than 50
21. Contact Area:
21.1 6x50 mm copper flat bar, length
Moving Blade for DS mm2 (to be mentioned, subject to
approval) mm -02 Nos per phase
21.2 6x50 mm copper flat bar, length
Moving Blade for ES (to be mentioned, subject to
approval) mm -02 Nos per phase
10x60 mm Copper flat bar -02 Nos
21.3 Terminal Pad per phase
mm2
22. Contact type Spring loaded contact

565
 Sl. NESCO's Manufacturer'
No. Description Unit Requirement s Guaranteed
Particulars
23. Operation - Gang
24. Type of main DS operating mechanism - Manual
25. Number of main DS operating mechanism per set Nos 1
26. Type of Earth Switch operating mechanism - Manual
27. Number of Earth Switch operating mechanism per Nos 1
set
28. Nos. of Auxiliary Contracts (NO/NC) Isolator- 4NO-4NC
For Isolator& Earth Switch - Earth switch – 4NO-4NC

29. Locking facility in the operating box in both close - Yes

and open position
30. Mechanical Interlocking facility between main - Yes
DS and ES
31. Operating GI Pipe Dimensions: -
31.1 For main DS - OD- 42 mm, ID – 36 mm, Length
– 8 meter (length to be confirmed
during design approval)
31.2 For Earth Switch - OD- 42 mm, ID – 36 mm, Length
– 8 meter (length to be confirmed
during design approval)
31.3 Controlling handle length of Isolator operating ≥400mm
Pipe
32. MS Solid Square Shaft Dimensions for gang -
operation (Hot Dip Galvanized)
32.1 For main DS - 32x32x3600 mm
(to be confirmed during design
approval)
32.2 For Earth Switch - 25x25x3600mm (to be confirmed
during design approval)
33. Total weight of Isolator Kg To be mentioned
34. Total weight of earth switch Kg To be mentioned
35. Total weight of Unit Kg To be mentioned
36. Outline Dimensional & Cross-section Drawings
of Offered type 33KV Isolator & Mounting
Structure Arrangement - To be mentioned
37. Manufacturer's Printed Catalogue describing
Specification & Technical Data of Offered type - To be mentioned
Equipment.
38. Standard IEC-62271-102

Note: All exposed MS parts should be Hot Dip Galvanized

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

566
 8.42 Guaranteed Technical Particulars For Substation Automation System
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad, otherwise the bid shall be rejected.)

Sl. No DESCRIPTION Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's

Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
1 Name of the Manufacturer To be mentioned
Country of Origin EU/USA/CANADA/Japan
2 General Requirement:
i IEC61850. Fully
Communication protocol at all levels complying with the
standard.
ii Temperature range (min/max) Computer °C 0 to 50
iii % 20 to 90 non- condensing
Relative humidity
iv Base of Station HMI Active X
v System performance and inter-operability test
among ABB, Siemens, Alstom, Schneider, GE Yes
and SEL IEDs done in the system verification center.
vi Control IEDs and protection IEDs are from same YES
manufacturer
vii All updated SCD, ICD and CID files shall
be provided in portable hard drives and YES
CD/DVD
viii The inverter shall be from the origin of
SAS and design calculation shall be
provided YES
ix Separate battery set with charger shall be
provided YES
3 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED’s)
i Manufacturer’s name & address To be mentioned
ii Serial communication interface included? YES
iii Protection & Control IED’s connected same bus? Yes (IEC61850)
iv Self monitoring To be provided
v Display of measured values To be provided
vi Remote parameterization To be provided
vii Disturbance record upload & analysis To be provided
4. Detailed Requirements:
i Number of years of proven field experience of Year
Offered system. 05
(Note: Proof of experience should be furnished. The
components used in the offered system and those with field
experience should be the same)
ii Model of the Substation Automation System To be mentioned
iii Name and Address of the manufacturer To be mentioned

567
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's
Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
iv The Automation Panel shall be from the origin
Yes
of the manufacturer of the system
v Engineering and Assembling of the
substation automation system shallbe from the origin Yes
vi of the system.
Design life of Substation Automation System Year ≥ 20
vii ISO 9001/9002 or
Manufacturers quality assurance system
equivalent
viii Dimensions of cubicle
- Width mm To be mentioned
mm
- Depth
mm
- Height
ix Floor load N/㎡ max. 600
5. Station Level Equipment:
i Station Computer Industrial PC
ii Power supply to the servers 230 V AC from
iii MTBF (Mean time between Failures) Hrs Inverter
To be mentioned
iv MTTR (Mean time to repair) Hrs To be mentioned
v Dual Station Computers Provided in YES
redundant hot standby configuration
vi Hot standby takeover time Seconds
vii Number of years of proven field experience Year >5
of offered software
viii Operating System Windows
ix All standard picture as per Tspec included in To be provided
HMI
x Process Status Display & Command To be provided
Procedures
xi Event processing as per Tspec To be provided
xii Alarm processing as per Tspec To be provided
xiii Reports as per Tspec To be provided
xiv Trend Display as per Tspec Tobeprovided
xv UserAuthoritylevelsasperspec To be provided
xvi System supervision & monitoring as per Tspec To be provided
xvii Automatic sequence control as per Tspec To be provided
xviii High quality SCD file complete with ICD To be provided
files & station topology
6. Gateway to Central Control Room (02 Nos.)
i -Name of manufacturer, Address & Country of origin To be provided
ii -Model no. To be provided

568
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's
Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
iii Year 05
- Number of years of proven field experience of
offered unit
iv IEC60255-5
- Insulation tests
v IEC61000-4-4,Calss4
- Fast disturbance tests
vi EN50081-2ClassA
- Industrial environment
vii - Industrial grade hardware with no moving parts To be provided
(PC-based gateway is not accepted)
viii Year 20
- Design life of offered equipment
ix To be provided
- Redundant communication channel
x To be provided
- Redundant CPU
xi To be provided
- Redundant DC/DC Supply
xii Hrs To be mentioned
- MTBF (Mean time between Failures)
xiii Hrs To be mentioned
- MTTR (Mean time to repair)
7. Station Bus:
Physical Meduim Glass fibre optic
8. Interbay Bus
Physical Meduim Glass fibre optic
9. Printer Server
MTBF Hrs To be mentioned
10. Event Printer
MTBF Hrs To be mentioned
11. Hard Copy Colour Printer
MTBF Hrs To be mentioned
12. Master Clock – GPS (Global Positioning System)
Receiver:
Name of the manufacturer & country of origin
Manufacturer’ s address
Model
MTBF Hrs To be mentioned
13. Bay Control Unit HV
i Name of the manufacturer & country of origin To be mentioned
ii Manufacturer’ s address To be mentioned
iii Model To be mentioned
iv Number of years of proven field experience of offered Year ≥5
unit

569
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's
Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
v Separate Bay-controller unit provided for each bay & Yes
feeder
vi HV
Type of Bay-controller offered HV/MV
vii Select Before Operate with Open Execute & Close Yes
Execute
viii Single bit dependence No
ix Interlocking, bay & stationwide Synchrocheck To be provided
x function
Maximum Voltage difference Specify range
xi Maximum Frequency difference Specify range
xii Maximum Phase difference Specify range
xii Double command blocking Yes
xiii Independent settable parameter groups Yes
xiv Local Display Unit 4
xv Sequence of event recorder To be provided
xvi Events 256
xvii Time resolution 1ms
xviii Disturbance recorder function Yes
xix Comprehensive self-supervision Yes
xx Battery free backup of events and Yes
disturbance records
xxi Insulation tests IEC60255-5
xxii Fast disturbance tests IEC61000-4-4,Class4
xxiii MTBF Hrs To be mentioned
xxiv MTTR Hrs To be mentioned
Temperature range: IED’s
xxv Operation °C -10 to +50
xxvi Transport and storage °C -10 to +50
Relative humidity:
xxvii Operating max./min % 93
xxviii Transport and Storage % 93
14. Backup Control Mimic – HV
Name of the manufacturer & country of origin To be mentioned
i Manufacturer’ s address To be mentioned
Model To be mentioned

570
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's
Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
Control functionality:
Control of breaker as well as all isolators/earthing
To be provided
Switch (Control functionality should not be
ii To be provided
affected if bay-controller fails) Key-Locked
Interlock override function To be provided
Separate backup control mimic provided
To be provided
for each bay & feeder
15. Bay Control Unit – MV
i Name of the manufacturer & country of origin To be mentioned
ii Manufacturer’ s address To be mentioned
iii Model To be mentioned
iv Number of years of proven field experience of offered Year 05
unit
v Separate Bay-controller unit provided for each bay Yes
& feeder
vi Type of Bay-controller offered HV/MV HV
vii Select Before Operate with Open Execute & Close Yes
Execute
viii Single bit dependence No
ix Interlocking, bay & stationwide Synchrocheck To be provided
function
x Maximum Voltage difference Specify range
xi Maximum Frequency difference Specify range
xii Maximum Phase difference Specify range
xii Double command blocking Yes
xiii Independent settable parameter groups Yes
xiv Local Display Unit 4
xv Sequence of event recorder To be provided
xvi Events 256
xvii Time resolution ms 1
xviii Disturbance recorder function Yes
xix Comprehensive self-supervision Yes
xx Battery free backup of events and Yes
disturbance records
xxi Insulation tests IEC60255-5
xxii Fast disturbance tests IEC61000-4-4,Class4
xxiii MTBF Hrs To be mentioned
xxiv MTTR Hrs To be mentioned
Temperature range: IED’s
xxv Operation °C -10 to +50
xxvi Transport and storage °C -10 to +50

571
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's
Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
Relative humidity:
xxvii Operating max./min % 93
xxviii Transport and Storage % 93
16. Backup Control Mimic – MV
Control functionality:
i Control of breaker as well as all isolators /earthing To be provided
switches
ii Separate backup control mimic provided for each bay To be provided
& feeder
17. Ethernet Switch
i Name of manufacturer &. address To be mentioned
ii Model number To be mentioned
iii Type Industrial Grade, rackable
19”-24 ports (min.)
iv Redundant Power supply To be provided
18. Operator Work Station (OWS)
Brand Any International reputed
Model To bebrand.
mentioned
Type Industrial PC
Country of Manufacture USA/ UK/ EU /Japan/
Canada
Processor GHz Intel core i7 10th generation
or latest generation or
latest(GHz)
Clock Speed GHz 3.0 GHz (min), 8 MB Cache
Memory (min)
Bus Speed MHz Min. 1600 MHz or higher
RAM GB 8 GB, Expandable to 16 GB
(mini.)
HDD TB 2 x 1 TB SSD (RAID with
NVMe)
Mouse Same Brand USB Scroll
Optical Mouse
Keyboard Same brand USB Keyboard
Monitor inch Same brand LED 24",
1920x1080, Full HD
Monitor
OS Support Windows 10 Professional or
latest
OS License windows with
Software
recovery kit
Software Licensed Anti-Virus
Software

572
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's
Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
19 Engineer Work Station (EWS)
Brand Any International reputed
brand.
Model To be mentioned
Type Industrial PC
Country of Origin USA/ UK/ EU/ Japan/
Canada
Processor GHz Intel Core i5 Processor, 10th
generation or latest(GHz)
Clock Speed GHz 3.0 GHz (min), 8 MB L3
Cache Memory (min)
Bus Speed MHz Min. 1600 MHz or higher
RAM GB (2x4 GB) 1 DIMM DDR4
HDD GB Min. 512 GB SSD NVMe
Mouse Same Brand Wireless Scroll
Optical Mouse
Keyboard Integrated standard Keyboard

Monitor inch 15.6", Full HD, True Life

Display
Battery 6 cell lithium-ion battery
Battery Backup 6 hours or higher with A/ C
Adapter
OS Support Windows 10 professional or
latest
OS License windows with
recovery kit
Software Licensed Anti-Virus
Software
20 Laser Color Printer
Brand Any International reputed
brand.
Model To be mentioned
Country of origin USA/ UK/ EU/ Japan/
Canada
Toner type Toner and associated drum
Toner type unit in single case, Nostarter
toner.
Resolution dpi 1200 x 1200 (Minimum)

573
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's
Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
Printing Speed PPM 62-Page-per Minute (Letter),
Printing Speed 35 (A4)
(min.)
First Page Print Out seconds As fast as 8 seconds
Memory GB 256 MB (Minimum)
Expandable to 1 GB
Trays 100 sheet multi- input tray, 2
x 500 sheet input tray 50-
sheet face up
output tray, 250-sheet face
down output tray purpose
Media Sizes Letter, Legal, A4, A5, B5 and
custom sizes
Media Types Paper (Plain, Preprinted,
Media Types Letterhead, Bond, Color,
Recycled, Rough),
Transparencies, Labels
21 Event Printer
Brand Any International reputed
brand.
Model To be mentioned
Country of origin USA/ UK/ EU/ Japan/
Canada
Print Method Pin 9 Pin Serial Impact Dot
Matrix.
Print Speed Lps Min. 6.0 LPS (30 Columns:16
CPI).
Data Buffer KB 4KB.
Inked Ribbon ERC-38(Black/Red).
Interface USB Interface, Bi-
directional parallel.
22 System Performance: <2
Exchange of display (First reaction) Sec <1
Presentation of a binary change in the Process display Sec <1
Presentation of an analogue change in the process display Sec <1
From order to process output Sec <1
From order to updated of display Sec <1
23 UPS
Brand Any International
reputed brand.
Model To be mentioned

574
Sl. No DESCRIPTION Unit NESCO's Manufacturer's
Requirement guaranteed
Particulars
Country of Manufacturer USA/ UK/ EU/ Japan/
Canada
Capacity VA
Backup 2 hours
Battery capacity To be mentioned
24 Protocol Converter / IO module, if required
Brand To be mentioned
Model To be mentioned
Country of Manufacturer USA/ UK/ EU/ Japan/
Canada

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

575
 8.43 MANUFACTURER’S GUARANTEED TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE FOR 415V, 3-
PHASE, 100 AMPS MCCB & ENCLOSURE

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer’s Letterhead Pad with appropriated data )

Sl. NESCO’s Manufacturer's

Description
No. Requirement guaranteed Data
A. Three phase 100A LV MCCB
01. Manufacturer’s name & address To be mentioned
02. Manufacturer’s model no. To be mentioned
03. Operating voltage 415 V AC
04. Max. system voltage 457 V AC
05. Rated continuous current 100 Amps.
06. Number of poles 3 (three)
Rated insulation voltage i.e. maximum system ≥ 800 Volts AC
07.
voltage (Ui)
08. Rated Impulse withstands voltage i.e. Uimp ≥ 8.0 kV
09. Frame size 200 Amps.
Rated service Short circuit Breaking capacity i.e.
10. 36 KA
Ics
from ≤40% to ≥100% of rated
11. Thermal element setting
continuous current.
from ≤400% to ≥1000% of
12. Magnetic element setting
rated continuous current
13. Operating mechanism As cl. 7.4 2.8 of spec.
14. Construction As cl. 7.4 2.10 of spec.
15. Nominal dimension (Height x Width x Depth) mm x mm x mm
16. Indication for ON-TRIP-OFF position To be provided
17. Original Printed catalogue To be furnished
18. Dimensional drawing To be furnished
19.
Weight , Kg To be furnished
20. IEC Standards for Design, manufacture, testing latest editions of IEC 60947-1
and performance. and IEC 60947-2 or equivalent
international standards.
B. MCCB Panel/ Enclosure
01. Manufacturer’s Name & Address To be mentioned
02. Manufacturer’s Model no. To be mentioned
03. Construction As cl. 7.4 3.0 of spec.
04. Overall dimension (Height x Width x Depth) 500 mm x 300 mm x 200mm

576
Sl. NESCO’s Manufacturer's
Description
No. Requirement guaranteed Data
05. Thickness (minimum) 1.63 mm
06. Material of the box Galvanized steel sheet of min
1.63 mm thick.
07. Necessary fixing channels with adjustable hole Shall be provided
including nuts, bolts etc.
Latest revision of ASTM A90/
08. Standard of galvanization BS EN ISO 1461:2009
standard.
09. Dimensional drawing To be furnished

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

577
 8.44 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND GUARANTEES OF LED
FLASH LIGHT
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad with appropriate data)
Sl. NESCO’s Manufacturer's
Description Unit
No. Requirement guaranteed Particulars
1 Manufacturer’s Name & country -
To be mentioned
of origin
2 Manufacturer’s model No. -
To be mentioned
3 Input Voltage V
220
4 Operating Voltage V 180-240
5 Rated Wattage W 200
6 Efficacy lu/W 100
7 Driver Efficiency Min 90%
8 Life Span Hrs 50000
Operating temperature -5 to 50degree C
9 color temperature K 5000-6000

10 Housing - in two pieces (upper and

lower housings) Die cast
aluminum housing
11 Electrical and gear compartment Integral Inverter
Electronic
12 Protection Degree
IP65
13 painting
RAL 7035
14 Frequency Hz
50
15 Front Glass F - Flat
glass
16 Net Wight Kg
To be mentioned

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

578
 8.45 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND GUARANTEES OF LED SIGN
BOARD (ELECTRONIC)
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad with appropriate data)

Manufacturer's
NESCO’s
Sl No Description
Requirement
guaranteed
Particulars
1 Pixel pitch minimum 10.0 mm
2 LED configuration SMD
3 LED density Minimum 8500
LED/m²
4 Brightness 6,500 nits (calibrated)
5 Color Processing 16 bit/color
6 Colors 281 trillion
7 Hor. viewing angle -70°/+70°
8 Vert. viewing angle -35°/+10°
9 Power consumption (typical) Max 300 W/m²
10 Heat dissipation (typical) 784 BTU/hr/m²
11 Operational temperature -20°/+50°C
12 Ruggedness IP65 (front)
13 Dimensions (HxWxD) To be mentioned
14 Module surface Minimum 1 m²
15 Weight / Tile Minimum 450 kg
16 Certifications CE, ETL, FCC Class
A, CEBEC, RohS

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

579
 8.46 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR H-TYPE CONNECTOR
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO’s
Description guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
Compatible for ACSR MARTIN to ACSR MARTIN
1. Name & Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Code No. Shall be mentioned
3. Applicable Standard Design, Testing &
Performance shall be in
accordance to BS, IEC, BDS,
ANSI, ASTM or equivalent
international standards.
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be installed
for the above-mentioned
conductor.
5. Type H-Type
6. Material Aluminum
7. Minimum Continuous 1200 Amps (min).
Current rating at 35ºC rise
over 40ºC ambient
temperature (75ºC)
8. Length 150 mm (min)
9. Weight of 100 nos. in Kg Shall be mentioned

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

580
 8.47 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR PG CLAMP (MARTIN TO
MARTIN)
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO’s
Description guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
Compatible for ACSR MARTIN to ACSR MARTIN
1. Name & Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Code No. Shall be mentioned
3. Applicable Standard Design, Testing & Performance
shall be in accordance to BS,
IEC, BDS, ANSI, ASTM or
equivalent international
standards.
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be installed
for the above-mentioned
conductor.
5. Type Bolted Type
6. Material Aluminum Alloy
7. Minimum Continuous Current 1200 Amps (min).
rating at 35ºC rise over 40ºC
ambient temperature (75ºC)
8. Dimension 125 mm x 50 mm
9. Weight of 100 nos. in Kg Shall be mentioned

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

581
 8.48 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR PG CLAMP (GROSBEAK TO
GROSBEAK)
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO’s
Description guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
Compatible for ACSR GROSBEAK to ACSR GROSBEAK
1. Name & Address of the Shall be mentioned
Manufacturer
2. Manufacturer’s Code No. Shall be mentioned
3. Applicable Standard Design, Testing &
Performance shall be in
accordance to BS, IEC,
BDS, ANSI, ASTM or
equivalent international
standards.
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be
installed for the above-
mentioned conductor.
5. Type Bolted Type
6. Material Aluminium Alloy
7. Minimum Continuous 538 Amps (min).
Current rating at 35ºC rise
over 40ºC ambient
temperature (75ºC)
8. Dimension 110 mm x 45 mm
9. Weight of 100 nos. in Kg Shall be mentioned

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

582
8.49 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND GUARANTEES OF 33 KV
BUS BAR & JUMPER

(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad with appropriate data)

Manufacturer's
Sl. NESCO’s
Description Unit guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
1 Manufacturer’s Name and country - To be mentioned
2 Material (conductor)
a) Bus bars - ACSR MARTIN
b) Jumper/ connections - MATRTIN/
HAWK/
GROSBEAK
3 Overall diameter mm To be mentioned
4 Nominal cross section mm2 To be mentioned
5 Cross section and make –up - To be mentioned
6 Maximum rated current A 1600
7 Maximum working tension of Kg/m2 To be mentioned
main connections
8 DC Resistance of conductors per 1000 Ohms To be mentioned
meters at 20 0C
9 Tensile breaking stress of material N/ mm2 To be mentioned
10 Maximum permissible span length m To be mentioned
11 Maximum sag under own weight mm To be mentioned
of maximum span

Seal & Signature of the Manufacturer Seal & Signature of the Bidder

583
 8.50 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR AIR COOLER
(To be filled up by the manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected

NESCO’s Manufacturer's
Sl.
Item Description guaranteed
No. Requirement
Particulars
In Door Unit Specification: Floor Ceiling Unit 4 Ton

01 Brand International reputed Brand

like General, Panasonic,
Toshiba, Hitachi etc.
02 Model To be Mentioned

03 Country of Origin To be Mentioned

14 kW
04 Cooling Capacity (Min)
48,000 Btu/h
15 kW
05 Heating Capacity (Min)
48,000 Btu/h

06 Air Flow Min 1600 m3/h

Min 940 CFM
07 Sound Pressure Level <45 dB
08 Dimension To be Mentioned
09 Net weight To be Mentioned
Original Brochure & Catalogue
10 To be Submitted with
supporting the model offered by
Tender Document
the Tenderer
02 (Two) year from the day of
11 Free Servicing completion of installation testing
and commissioning of VRF
system.
02 (Two) Year from the day of
12 Warranty installation, testing and
commissioning of VRF system
inclusive of Parts
13 Power Consumption To be Mentioned

Seal & signature of bidder Seal & signature of Manufacturer

584
 8.51 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS (GTP) FOR 33 KV T-TYPE
CONNECTOR (36/25 mm)

Sl. Ma nufa ct ure r’s

Description NE S CO ’ s R eq u irem e nt
No. Pa rtic u la r s

Compatible for ACSR MARTIN to ACSR GROSBEAK

1. Name & Address of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned

2. Manufacturer’s Code No. Shall be mentioned

3. Applicable Standard BS, IEC, BDS or equivalent

international standard
4. Installation Outdoor and shall be installed for
the above-mentioned conductor.
5. Type Bolted Type
6. Material Aluminium Alloy
(LM6 or higher grade)
7. Minimum continuous current rating at 35°C Shall be mentioned and capable
rise over 40°C ambient temperature (75°C) of carrying the continuous current
of the specified conductor in
Amps.

8. All Dimensions, Dia and Hole Size Shall be as per drawing (Drg.
No. 7.2) ( To be confirmed)

9. Weight of 100 nos. in Kg Shall be mentioned

10. Dimensional Drawing Shall be enclosed

Seal & signature of bidder Seal & signature of Manufacturer

585
 8.52 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF LV AC & DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer Letterhead Pad with appropriate data)

Manufacturer's
NESCO’s
Sl No Description Unit guaranteed
Requirement
Particulars
DC DISTRIBUTION PANEL
1 Manufacturer’s name & country To be mentioned
2 Rated normal current of Bus-bar A 200
3 No. and size of fuse circuits Nos./ A To be mentioned
4 Thickness of sheet steel (enclosure ) mm To be mentioned
5 Dimension
mm x mm x mm To be mentioned
6 Weight Kg To be mentioned
7 MCCB
a) Manufacturer's Name and Country To be mentioned
b) Manufacturer's model no. To be mentioned
c) Rated voltage To be mentioned
d) Rated current To be mentioned
AC DISTRIBUTION PANEL
1 Manufacturer’s name & country To be mentioned

2 Rated normal current of Bus-bar A 400

3 No. and size of fused circuits nos/ A 3
4 Thickness of sheet steel (enclosure) mm 4
5 Dimension mm x mm x mm To be mentioned
6 Weight Kg To be mentioned
7 a) Manufacturer's Name and Country To be mentioned
b) Manufacturer's model no. To be mentioned
c) Rated voltage To be mentioned
d) Rated current To be mentioned

Seal & signature of bidder Seal & signature of Manufacturer

586
 8.53 Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Single-Core, 120 mm2 11 kV XLPE Insulated
Copper Cable
(To be filled up by the Manufacturer in Manufacturer's Letterhead Pad with appropriated data, otherwise the Bid
will be rejected)

Sl. Description Unit NESCO'S Manufacturer's

No. Requirement Guaranteed
Data
1 Name of the Item 1CX120 mm2 11 kV XLPE
Insulated Copper Cables
2 Name of the Manufacturer Shall be mentioned
3 Address of the Manufacturer/Country of Shall be mentioned
Origin
4 Standard Performance, Design and
Testing shall be in
accordance to the BS, IEC,
BDS or equivalent
international standards.
5. Country of Origin
6. VOLTAGE
Voltage between phases of three Phase
circuit
U kV 11
Umax kV 12
7. Manufacturing Process CCV/VCV
8. CORES
Number of Cores No. one
9. CONDUCTOR Electrolytic annealed
material copper
cross sectional area mm2
Min. No. & Dia of wires Nos./mm To be mentioned
To be mentioned
10. CONDUCTOR SCREEN
Material semi-conducting
Nominal Thickness mm To be mentioned
Diameter over screen mm To be mentioned
11. INSULATION
Material XLPE
Type of dry curing Inert gas
Nominal Thickness mm To be mentioned
Diameter of over Insulation mm To be mentioned
12. INSULATION SCREEN
Material semi-conducting
Nominal Thickness mm To be mentioned
Diameter over screen mm To be mentioned
13. METALLIC SCREEN
Number and diameter of copper screen No./mm
strands or Based on Design
or No./mm Calculation
Copper Wire with helically applied Copper with
Tape Thicknes
s of tape
14. SEPARATION SHEATH

587
Sl. Description Unit NESCO'S Manufacturer's
No. Requirement Guaranteed
Data
Material To be mentioned
Thickness of bedding mm To be mentioned
15. ARMOUR
Number & diameter of amour wire No./mm Based on Design
or or Calculation
Thickness of Corrugated Aluminum sheath mm
16. OUTER COVERING
Material Black extruded MDPE
Minimum average thickness mm To be mentioned (subject to
approval)
17. COMPLETED CABLE
Overall diameter mm To be mentioned
Weight per metre kg To be mentioned
Maximum drum length m 500
18. CABLE DRUMS
Material Steel
Overall diameter mm To be mentioned
Width m To be mentioned
Gross weight (with cable) kg To be mentioned
19. CONTINUOUS CURRENT CARRYING
CAPACITY
Based on the conditions specified:
One circuit A To be mentioned
Two circuits A To be mentioned
Three circuits A To be mentioned
In Air
One circuit A To be mentioned
20. PERMISSIBLE OVERLOAD
In Service Conditions % To be mentioned
For a period of Hours To be mentioned
21. MAXIMUM CONDUCTOR
TEMPERATURE
Laid direct in ground C 90
Drawn into ducts C 90
Erected in air C 90
22. CONDUCTOR SHORT CIRCUIT
CURRENT
Carrying capacity for one second, Cable
load as above prior to Short circuit and final KA To be mentioned
conductor Temperature of 250C`
23. METALIC SCREEN EARTH FAULT
CURRENT
Carrying capacity for one second, Cable KA To be mentioned (with
loaded as above prior to Earth fault detail calculation)
24. MINIMUM RADIUS OF BEND 20 times of overall diameter
Around which cable can be laid m of cable
25. MAXIMUM DC RESISTANCE
Per km of cable at 20C
of conductor of metallic layer ohm To be mentioned
26. MAXIMUM AC RESISTANCE
Of conductor per km of cable at

588
Sl. Description Unit NESCO'S Manufacturer's
No. Requirement Guaranteed
Data
Maximum conductor temperature ohm Based on Design
Calculation (Subject to
approval)
27. INSULATION RESISTANCE
Per km of cable per core
at 20C Meg.ohm To be mentioned To
at maximum rated temperature Meg.ohm be mentioned
28. EQUIVALENT STAR REACTANE
Per km of 3 phase circuit at
Nominal frequency Ohm/Km To be mentioned
29. MAXIMUM ELECTROSTATIC Based on Design
CAPACITANCE Calculation (Subject to
Per Km of cable µF approval)
30. MAXIMUM INDUCED VOLTAGE
On metallic layer/sheath
Under fault condition V To be mentioned
31. MAXIMUM CHARGING CURRENT
Per core per meter of cable at
Nominal voltage Uo mA To be mentioned
32. MAXIMUM DIELECTIC LOSS
Of cable per meter of 3 phase circuit when
laid direct in the ground at nominal voltage
Uo and normal frequency at maximum
conductor Temperature W/m To be mentioned
33. METALLIC SHEATH LOSS
Of cable per meter of 3 phase circuit, At
nominal voltage Uo, normal frequency And
at the specified current rating W To be mentioned
34. MAXIMUM PULLING TENSION kg To be mentioned
35. Indoor, Outdoor Termination Kit have to To be provided
comply with Technical Specification

Seal and Signature of the manufacturer: Seal and Signature of the Bidder:

589
 Section 9. Drawings

Contents:

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM OF

9.1 Tilokpur Santahar (New 2X10/13 MVA 33/11KV Substation);

590
 Outgoing Line Incomming line Incomming line
LA 33 KV 33KV Isolator, LA 33 KV 33KV Isolator, LA 33 KV 33KV Isolator,
1600A,31.5KA,3sec 1600A,31.5KA,3sec 1600A,31.5KA,3sec
CT 600-1200/5-5A, CT 600-1200/5-5A, CT 600-1200/5-5A,
5P30,0.2S 5P30,0.2S 5P30,0.2S
VCB VCB VCB
1600A,31.5KA,3sec 1600A,31.5KA,3sec 1600A,31.5KA,3sec
33KV Isolator, 33KV Isolator, 33KV Isolator,
1600A,31.5KA,3sec 1600A,31.5KA,3sec 1600A,31.5KA,3sec 33KV BUS
33KV Isolator, 33KV Bus Section Isolator 33KV Isolator, Fused
1600A,31.5KA,3sec 1600A,31.5KA,3sec 1600A,31.5KA,3sec Isolator
33KV BUS PT1 33KV BUS PT2
VCB VCB 33/0.4KV
1600A/31.5KA,3sec 1600A/31.5KA,3sec
Auxiliary Tr.
CT 400-800/5-5-5A, CT 400-800/5-5-5A, 200KVA
5P30,0.2S 5P30,0.2S
LA 33 KV LA 33 KV
Power Transformer, T1 Power Transformer, T2
33/11KV,10/13.33MVA 33/11KV,10/13.33MVA
LA 33 KV 2*1C 300 sq.mm XLPE Cable LA 33 KV 2*1C 300 sq.mm XLPE Cable
CT 800-1600/5-5-5A, CT 800-1600/5-5-5A,
CT
5P30,0.2S 5P30,0.2S
1000-2000/5-5-5A,
1600A 11KV Switchgear 5P30,0.2s 1600A 11KV Switchgear
CT 300-600/5A, 11KV BC 2000A CT 300-600/5A,5P30,0.2s
11KV BUS PT1
5P30,0.2s
LA 11KV 11KV BUS PT2
630A 11KV LA 11KV 630A 11KV
Switchgear Switchgear
3*185 sq.mm 3*185 sq.mm
XLPE XLPE
Feeder-1 Feeder-2 Feeder-3 Feeder-4 Feeder-5 Feeder-1 Feeder-2 Feeder-3 Feeder-4 Feeder-5
Single Line Diagram Of 33/11 KV,2*10/13.33MVA
AIS Sub-Station At Tilokpur, Santahar,Bogura.